Home

IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual October

Contents

1. Hardware Maintenance Service 1 4 mmmum 1 Lead Lead V de Vdc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 3 4 12 5V 11 4 2 3 1 4 8V 5 3V Connector P4 1 4 Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 3 1 12 5V 11 4 2 3 4 4 8V 5 3V Connectors P5 P5 P7 and P8 1 4 Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 3 1 12 5V 11 4 2 3 4 4 8V 5 3V 149 Real Time Clock Problems The software time of day clock real time clock will not provide precise time under all circumstances The clock is interrupt driven The accuracy of the clock varies with the interrupt activity Most likely time variations are a result of multiple interrupts over a long period of time rather than a hardware failure In circumstances where precise time is required an alternate time keeping device should be used Check the system date time using the Reference Diskette Set Features menu If the date time is accurate the problem is with the software Note Some LAN software might update the time on the workstation using the server time Remote Power on Jumper 95 Note Not on all 95 systems The jumper labeled JMP4 is on the system board near the serial port Set the jumper to position for direct connect and leased line modems Set the jumper to position 1 default for all other modems For more information see Power on Features on page 380 Running Automatic Co
2. 5 usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 A1ouiejy uiejs S 101 suondo 337 Hardware Maintenance Service 5160699 0 98X18 2719828 0298X18 Jejdepy jej ejeg eues N ASNN Od 0929402 LEQBXbL 1779 08 8 592 61 aInpoW MOWan AN 7929402 775408 Jejdepy uonounininiw X X X X X vc98X18 IAIN 5845967 swajshs 101 2109406 0826428 19 1146378 1846348 10J pg eiqeo 6 6640 48 64 8 dnyoeg ede 2091979 0221819 Ja depy 81490 x x L x 0051091 1516068 Jejdepy awed us x 5031579 89 1819 xi 1eidepy uonisinboy X 9917445 100 1 Ja depy sng X v98v4 c 100 1 4e1depy sng x 0168X 19 Jejdepy sng x 1012400 sng X 89t LXZ6 81 94 Jejdepy 2519 saea JequinN JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 snoeuej eosiy PS 2 Maintenance Manual 338 x 2926428 19409 1710426 2 54 14 5 x 1167 66 Jejdepy 3
3. Hardware Maintenance Service 197 Model 56 57 8556 8557 System Board Pointing device connector Keyboard connector Parallel port connector Password override connector J18 Serial port connector Display connector External SCSI connector SCSI terminator Control assembly connector 1 Power supply connector P2 11 Internal SCSI connector 12 connector P1 13 Diskette drive connector 14 Math coprocessor connector 15 Video memory connectors 16 Bus adapter connector 17 Memory module connector 1 MEM 1 18 Memory module connector 2 MEM 2 19 Memory module connector MEM 3 lo chau n nrn nr imi WNP uu d 198 5 2 Maintenance Manual Model 56 57 9556 9557 System Board FWN PH Pointing device connector J1 Keyboard connector J2 Parallel port connector J3 Override jumper connector JMP1 Serial port connector 1 J4 Privileged access password Jumper Serial port connector 2 J5 Display connector J7 External SCSI connector J6 Internal SCSI connector J16 Control panel connector J19 Power supply
4. 0632 1 Diskette Drive A Diskette drive 0 seek failure 0642 1 Diskette Drive B Diskette drive 1 seek failure 0653 1 Format diskette Diskette not formatted or 2 Diskette defective 0655 1 Diskette Drive Diskette drive controller 2 Diskette Drive Cable failed 3 Diskette Drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board 107X 1 Check SCSI Check for proper installation terminators for of SCSI terminators proper installation 2 SCSI Cable 3 SCSI Terminator 4 SCSI Device 5 SCSI Adapter 1701 1 Hard Disk Drive Hard disk drive failed Press F1 to restart the System 1702 1 Hard Disk Drive Hard disk drive controller Adapter if installed error 2 System Board 1704 1 Hard Disk Drive Hard disk drive configuration Adapter if installed error controller failed 2 System Board 1715 1 Run Setup and enter The Hard Disk Drive the correct hard disk Configuration information is drive information not correct 1726 1 Hard Disk Drive Hard disk drive read error Press F1 to restart the System 182X 1 SCSI Adapter 190X 1 SCSI Cable Ensure that each SCSI 2 SCSI Terminator device is properly installed 3 SCSI Device and powered on 4 SCSI Adapter 1XXX 1 SCSI Adapter not listed above 221X 1 SCSI Cable Ensure that each SCSI 2 SCSI Terminator device is properly installed 3 SCSI Device and powered on 4 SCSI Adapter 222X 224X 1 SCSI Adapter 2401 1 Correct the switch The monochrome color setting Switch is
5. 5760 AO 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good WT B 5760 AL 1500 RAID O 03 24 94 Good WT 3840 AZ 1005 RAID 1 93 24 94 Good wr 1500 RAID 5 03 24 94 Good WT Di 3510 RAID 0 03 24 94 Good WT C8 1500 KAID G 93 24 94 Good WE 1170 RAID 1 03 24 94 Good WT an the defau c to quit form 1 This pop up allows you to select the RAID level you want to assign to the logical drive you are defining and it allows you to select the logical drive size You can enter the size in megabytes or you can accept the default value shown When you need to confirm an action the Confirm pop up appears in this area 2 You can select any of the choices that appear on the menus 3 The Bay Array selection list shows each bay in the server for each channel numbered 1 through 7 The abbreviation in the bay indicates the status of the drive installed in the bay Selections are made from this list to determine which bays hard disk drives are in the arrays The letter to the right of the bay identifies the array in which the hard disk drive in that bay is grouped Hardware Maintenance Service 155 Note The Channel Bay Array area on the screen does not reflect the physical configuration of the server The hard disk drives are installed in horizontal banks of bays in banks C D and E there are 6 bays numbered 1 through 6 from left to right See Installing Internal Drives Type 86XX on page 176 to see the physica
6. Machine Type Model 7546 411 640 641 8580 All Models 8590 All Models 8595 All Models 9577 All Models 9585 All Models 9590 All Models 9595 All Models 92 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Cabling The Data Access Arrangement DAA provides access to a local telephone system on the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN The External Power Control Box EPCB connects between the power connector on the computer and an electrical outlet External DAA Cabling Refer to ServerGuard Adapter Parts on page 306 for the external DAA for your country The following illustration shows the arrangement of the cables when using an external DAA 1 Flat end of DAA Cable to modem 2 MiniDIN end of DAA Cable to External DAA 3 External DAA 4 RJ 11 end of PSTN Cable to External DAA 5 Other end of PSTN Cable to telephone outlet 6 Telephone outlet A B d a DAA Cable Check The DAA cable PSTN cable and External DAA are wired with pin 1 connected to pin 1 pin 2 connected to pin 2 and etc A continuity check of the cables will determine if the cables are good Hardware Maintenance Service 93 External Power Control Box Cabling Connect the external power control box to both the computer power supply connector and the ServerGuard Adapter power control connector 1 Power Control Cable to ServerGuard Adapter 2 Power Supply Cable to system unit 3 Power Supply Cable to electrical outlet 94 PS 2 M
7. 11 12 13 13 13 13 14 14 15 18 234 Top Cover Assembly Power Supply Cover Screw Thumbscrew Base Frame Assembly R Base Frame Assembly R 386SLC 486SLC Rear Panel Rear Panel 386 SLC 486 SLC Cable Cover 386 SLC 486 SLC Control Assembly Speaker Assembly Power Switch Button Bus Adapter Support Bus Adapter Support 386 SLC 486 SLC Adapter Guide Cable Shield Control Assembly Cable Shield Control Assembly 386 SLC 486 SLC System Board 35 SX System Board 35 SLC System Board 35 386 SLC System Board 35 486 SLC Real Time Clock Module 1MB Memory Module Kit 85ns 2MB Memory Module Kit 85ns 4MB Memory Module Kit 8MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 8MB Memory Module Kit 80ns Bus Adapter Bus Adapter 386 SLC 486 SLC Retainer Plate Front Cover Logo R Model 35 SX Model 35 LS Model 35 SLC Model 35 386 SLC Model 35 486 SLC Cover Lock Pawl for 92F0003 Floor Stand Miscellaneous Parts Kit see page 303 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 79F3448 79F3443 79F3463 79F3449 96F7781 79F3477 52G7918 96F7773 79F3446 79F3447 79F3460 79F3452 92F0239 79F3461 95F5607 96F7769 41G3948 96F7506 10G3966 10G3976 8509237 90X8624 92F0104 92F3337 64F3606 64F3607 79F3529 10G3967 79F3451 79F3457 79F3478 06G9825 92F0238 52G9334 92F0003 79F3459 79F3458 79F3471 Index DASD 35 10 10 10 16 16 16
8. 8 x 8224926 057 926 vSvc Howay 27 8x82L 2517959 NY pieoq uiejs s x 1791956 875 966 2985 8912 pue L Sd 10 94D 21 gxszt x 0028X90 ainpoy X 9 saea sng Ly JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 332 6612926 2166426 WWIS Wal Uld zZ 5008 AN 102 526 6626062 NINIS NSNPU 404 EW 1021926 6826496 WIS PJEPUEIS 0 00 ANY 082 026 9515560 Mowe vIOWOd 5 9 1 7992456 ainpoy ANT 922 026 1586560 vIOINOd 18322006 2 18860 0quoo vIOINOd WVHS L YSEIH az S x x 9612926 7010426 Wal Uld zZ 598 ANT S X x 8614926 2010426 WWIS Wal Uld 22 5902 ANT x 7221956 9558964 oepiA INVHA SINE X 622 906 2912260 vIOWOd NYYS x E 09974895 gt ainpoy AN x 29924 S ainpoyy SNL x x 2222026 1962909 1012 oepiA SNL X X 2612926 8600 56 2602 ININIS PJEPUEIS Aysnpul Uld 06 5102 SNL X x 6 6571966 EGP Ajuo jutogenjeA Aowa
9. 8988491 X xs 8968422 5 0 Hod deJM Uld GZ uuo ou S L X X 1696458 Jejdepy abing X 2066407 dem 82 X X 075 378 e pig eoepelu eiqeioejes saea sng Ly JequinN JequinN VIOWOd 5 uondo nud aunyeay suondo 298j191u eumjeeu uoneoiunuiuio g PS 2 Maintenance Manual 326 X 881491 2 904409 eoeyelu x 868149 2 Kiowan ON Z 201d00 eoepelu Sz X saea ainpayyoy sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 suondo e ej1eju uoneoiunuiuio 327 Hardware Maintenance Service 00773 0 228590 E vAeidepy 9994966 youshor 1892526 195 9 9992526 pied 2620914 e ug 2 989 926 oipny pu3 YBIH 80509520 5080 ejdsig 0571920 6571920 ueder aidepy Aejdsiq 6862881 802 881 1464881 103 2161881 1464881 V v L98 Jeidepy edsig L X
10. saea ainpayyoy sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN VISINDd JeuueYyd prepuejs uondo ndd eipeuinniy PS 2 Maintenance Manual 340 x 1678904 5900498 9961 Jejdepy ISOS 1409 ejgeo x 2878904 0170914 261 sng 1A z ISOS x i 0798 2 90615 1eidepy xsiq pexi4 x E 1900426 1953 ia X og Z826X06 x Jeidepy sng ayeysiq pue YSIG pexi4 x 1 96 06 68219 10 Ajuo 120 Jedepy Pexi4 X 01776 06 e 190 120 1e1depy pexi4 x GOS8XzZ Z2S8XZZ 10 Ajuo 120 1 isiq Pexi4 x 770579 LGL9X2L Jeidepy eAug eneysiq eux x 98 Jejdepy sng eAug enexsiq Syz0Sv9 89 9X24 57 ayeysiq gxooe x 2001979 966 491 anaysig ANT I 10 gx09 x 8678904 0910426 8961 2 1 ISOS 19 2 x 9678004 6 8708 5961 Jeidepy ISOS LV 19 91 saea 4equinN 4equinN usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 e21 eg 1 341 Hardware Maintenance Service X x
11. x 5865828 9000 58 10J suoeolUnWWOD x 2221091 9018 pueqpeoug xs ES 7051051 9609828 Jejdepy SNOUCIYDU SIG saea sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN jueuem VISINDd jeuueyd prepuejs uondo ndd 94nyea4 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 314 9899HEL 88Z5Ht0 Bury uo xeJ erea YSI 0060908 0060908 peoueApy NV 1SSSI8 IM Weal 0001008 0001008 NYT SS9J8JIM NWAI 9 60 7965560 WWW 8 91980 zesegot 0855560 0855560 Zasego 104 pled 11P940 NAI 6126926 6156906 Wyn 8 91980 1 esegot 0655560 0665560 L esego 104 Wal x S061XS9 006L1XS9 ueis S 8112 101 peeds ufi x 9261 99 0261 99 ueis S 2112 104 peeds YGIH x 8750 56 x 1750486 eseg 229409 4 x 9750486 19914 1 x 5750486 eseg Jeqi4 004 x a L SZXv6 v 1
12. 5 Sdqyy E B F 967560 puelS m 0868978 1 EUJO X3 1868948 Jejdepy VSI E X 1726928 41172 NYT YSI SdqN zi 670 6048 1eidepy VIOWOd 57 69 18 9292 NYT SAAN saea sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN Ajueuem VIOWOd Jouueu2 uondo ny aunyeay PS 2 Maintenance Manual 312 X 8221091 4018 24 9 qe 221091 2018Xc4 puegeseg x 6229X69 v6c9X69 gt Jejdepy 85 98 x 9679458 7679458 Jejdepy uone nur3 6278 8278 L x 9975474 7975472 UONDSUUOD 0 26 S x 8604954 1556954 WEpoW xvJ eied VIOWOd sdqooge sdaoovz X zm 0791 76 2921 99 104 suoneoiunuiuoo X 9921 76 2921 99 v 1eidepy 002 L 00 X 90004dv 0051 008 100 1982 9 E X X 1774966 1988526 wapo sdax y L Sdayp v L 5 5 X 9vv 926 0988926 v6cc 51 10J
13. eLLPOLO oipny LLLPOLO ea L S X 1068 0 6017919 0861 SAUGQ WOH QO leuia YSI X X 80629229 0198 9599 v80c enaq jeondo eigeiuveg 9 41 21 saea ainpayYyoy sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN usnpul uondo nua aunyea4 asva 353 Hardware Maintenance Service 7772999 JSUB9 D 989996 5899967 5899967 ISOS S8 2HS0 A ddng S00cHSO jeondo vLYEHSO une 1v3W3 ISOS SAUA YSIG Ieondo zere 7771999 Jeuee o 989996 ueg i 5899967 289996t ISOS S8Z2HSO A ddng 3 m T S00cHSO E eondo v8Z2HSO epeue5 sn ISOS ASIA 656741 1578358 i J8M0d sng Ly JequunN JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 354 2923HS0 F 6292 1 BAUG eondo z Sd 9920526 pue G6 SI POWN 104 1 Buds
14. 392 Running Selected Module Tests 392 Running All Selected Modules 392 Changing Selected Tests in Test Groups 392 Running an Individual Test 393 Stopping the Tests 393 Using the System Utilities 393 Formatting Diskettes 393 Using the Low Level Format Program 394 When To Use the Low Level Format Program 394 Preparing the Hard Disk Drive for Use 394 File Editor 394 File Edit Function Key Usage 394 QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Control Keys 396 Disk Array System 396 Storage Capacity 397 Data Protection 397 Hot Spare Drive 398 Hot Spare Drive Replacement 398 Bay IDS ud Wa ed 398 Configuration 398 Saving Disk Array Configuration to Diskette 399 Restoring the Disk Array Configuration 399 Recording the Vital Product Data on a New System Board 400 Upgradable POST and BIOS 400 X PS 2 Maintenance Manual PCMCIA Adapter Model 33 400 Led indue p Gu pla ak rT 401 Non IBM Displays 402 Serial Port 2 uu i mu ee 403 Parallel Port 404 Supported Cables 404 Diskette Drive Controller 404 Keyboard and Pointing Device Connectors 404 System Memory 405 System Board Memory 405 Memory Expansio
15. 4 904409 504409 5 sweJoS Sued 2101 92 10 1 X 99952 2101 92 10 1 X amp v9 Howa L Z Mod 10 deJM uld GZ 2 0 sdo v zzr Su nig 52 2 0 uog sdo q eee su 92 uuo 504409 ANL 2961460 u d 20 gN L 504409 97215 8881460 10 87215 JosseooJdo gMzIG 2 LZdv 10 87992 585970 20 ainpoyy Aowa 87992 PS 2 Maintenance Manual suondo eumjeeu uoneoiunuiuio g 324 x x 7595488 x 680049 2 0 deIM Uld GZ uuo SdO v zer sd x 261460 pig 99 9 v zezv sd x 982 89 pig 99 9 v zzr su x 9885485 Z 8 0 v eer su x 8880425 2 0 des Uld GZ uuoo SdO G ZEz SH x 96 1360 pig 2 62 59 x 9
16. 190x Expected device did not respond 19Yx DMA arbitration level conflict Y assigned arbitration level 220x Adapter hardware error 221x Global timeout on adapter device did not respond 222x Adapter DMA error 223x Adapter buffer defective 224x Command aborted by adapter 301x Invalid parameter in SCB 303x Command not supported Hardware Maintenance Service 117 QEET Information 304x Command aborted by system 305x Command rejected buffer not disabled 306x Command rejected Adapter diagnostic failure 307x Format rejected 308x Assign rejected command in progress 309x Assign rejected device already assigned 30Ax Command rejected device not assigned 30Bx Command rejected maximum LBA exceeded 30Cx Command rejected 16 bit card slot address range exceeded 313x Invalid device for command 3FFx Status not returned by adapter 401x Recovered error not an error condition 402x Device not ready 403x Device medium error 404x Device hardware error 405x Illegal request for device 406x Device unit attention would not clear 407x Device data protect error 409x Device vendor unique error 40Ax Copy operation aborted by device 40Bx Device command aborted 40Cx Device search data command satisfied 40Dx Device volume overview residual data remains in buffer
17. 5 usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 suondo oipny Aejdsiq 329 Hardware Maintenance Service x 2273L8 7117348 s v 1eydepy z vox 7689 9 189 496 104 10 x Z88SXSZ 189 496 Kejdsiq vox X X LESGBXTL LES8XTL 9 q80 ped ey 1epeeu x x 9195651 9198651 pedAay saea JequinN JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 suondo oipny Aejdsiq PS 2 Maintenance Manual 330 x x S0Z9HEL OLZ9HEL 9505 BINS Sd Pseoghay JU OGyOeIL x 897 026 897 026 2822 UIOGYOBIL YUM uono x x 657 926 69 026 9822 ped ey PNO L x x 0699HEL 9697 90 9992 S Sd OUUM SSNOW peoueuu3 x x S60SH90 1192 Hod eis RIG II esno peoueuu3 x E 1371926 157 956 1822 asnoy peoueuu3 x x 097 026 097 926 SPEL JeSI N JONUOIN x x 6899HEL LZ9HEL 9992 aINS 1v Sd ajgesnfpy X 19472526 197 956 evel 915 Sd II Yutogyoe1 pueoghey SM LOL x 997 026 997 026 2622 5 2 5 peoueuu3 10 x 967 926 967 926 L822
18. HOd 9 x 9961424 81980 MOd 9 x 0095970 PHOM SHAU rz x 9 x 9020498 PHOM 5 0 Hod dem 91980 12 1309 9 x 1066970 PHOM 21980 12 HOd 9 x 6988391 deam pig 99 4 9 x 962416 pag eoeyelu 293 0 222 58 9 x 2961460 pig eoepelu 99 9 O ZEZSY UOd p x 58561460 9 6 416 3 Pig eoepelu 99 4 0 762 SY x 996 416 pig eoepelu 99 5 v 2zzy SH Mod v O ZES SH UO x 8 7491 deam pig 2913 p p pue 8 x 25 2415 e1q8199 95 0 91980 SE A 04 1 x 1924 9 eigeioejes 0 12 uod t saea sng 1v JequinN JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 suondo eoejieju eumjeeu uoneoiunuiuio g PS 2 Maintenance Manual 322 21299400 22601 91 2020491 2222491 404 I x 87992 NW 20 00 ayez 0LZ2XS8 2618X09 JosseooJdo eoeyeju JA8ZL 0028X09 22249 10J Aiowew I x x879 9020498 PHOM Lex 40 dem Uld 82 5066307 Al eiqeioejes 10 Uld 82 910414 AUC 0 uod SE A nid deJM Uld vE
19. Handling Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Devices Grounding Requirements Drive and Diskette Compatibility Matrix Hard Disk Drive Settings ATA Preparing a Hard Disk for Moving Security ves cd ee eek ae a ees VBO cask ae ete BUS awa Cover Lock and Tamper Evident Switches Rear Panel Security Option Passwords Additional Override Jumper Functions Privileged Access Password Power on Features System Features Microprocessors Processor Boards 70 Processor Boards 90 95 NVRAM NVRAM Extension POST Overview Reference and Diagnostic Diskettes Accessing System Programs and Starting Diagnostic Tests QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Using the Test Programs Using the System Utilities Disk Array System Recording the Vital Product Data on a New System Board Upgradable POST BIOS PCMCIA Adapter Model 33 Video xen bee a ee RE Non IBM Displays S rial Port uc y oor TR RS AEG Parallel Supported Cables Diskette Drive Controller Keyboard and Pointing Device Connectors p System Memory System Board Memory Memory Expan
20. 1 RWND 244 Top Cover Rear Cover Base Frame Assembly R Power Supply Fan Assembly Power Switch Link Drive Cradle Keylock Assembly see DASD Front Cover with Logo R 55 SX Front Cover with Logo R 55 LS Speaker Speaker Adapter Guide no speaker System Board 55 SX System Board 55 LS LTO LEO Fuse 3 Amp System Board Real Time Clock Module 2KB NV RAM Module 1MB Memory Module Kit 2MB Memory Module Kit 4MB Memory Module Kit 80387SX Math Coprocessor 16 MHz 486SLC System Board Upgrade 2MB Memory Module Kit for 61G3502 4MB Memory Module Kit for 61G3502 8MB Memory Module Kit for 61G3502 Bus Adapter 55 LS Bus Adapter 55 SX Bus Adapter Support Adapter Support Panel Adapter Bracket Drive Grounding Bracket Miscellaneous Parts Kit see page 301 Shipping Carton PS 2 Maintenance Manual 27F4172 27F4670 27F4167 27F4166 27F4168 27F4170 27F4169 27F4677 33F8230 27F4672 27F4673 27F4667 57F3003 72X8561 8509237 64F0722 90X8624 92F0104 92F3337 33F8160 71G2602 92F0102 92F0105 64F3606 64F3732 27F4666 27F4674 27F4671 27F4674 33F8156 27F4171 83X9431 Index DASD 55 SX 1 44MB Diskette Drive 1 3 Ht 64F0162 Diskette Drive Slide for 64F0162 64F0156 8 Diskette Drive Bezel 27F4230 8 Blank Bezel 72X7534 Drive A Cable 27F4912 Drive B Cable 34F0000 30MB Hard Disk Drive DBA 64F4146 40MB Hard Disk Drive DBA 56F8896 60MB Hard Disk Driv
21. Cylinder 0 errors The test detected an error reading the first cylinder of the hard disk drive Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 3 System Board Device is Not Ready Ready the Device or Press Any Key 1 Ensure the device is powered on 2 Replace failing device 3 Device Adapter if installed 4 System Board Disk Error Encountered Opening Output File Press Any Key To Continue 1 Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 3 System Board DMA X Failed The Main Components Test detected an error while testing the DMA controller 1 System Board Hardware Maintenance Service 67 Error Message Symptom FRU Action DMA Page Register Failed An error was detected while outputting all possible values to the DMA Page Register 1 System Board Drive x Media y Mismatch The capacity listed for the drive in the File Allocation Table ID does not match the calculated capacity of the drive 1 Check diskette and diskette drive capacity 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board Drive in channel X bay X does not respond Installation stopped 1 Replace the drive in the bay indicated Error in video buffer Bad bits The video memory test failed 1 Video Adapter 2 System Board 3 Display Exception Interrupt In Protected Mode Diags Cannot Continue Server error all system tests will stop Re
22. eq 2928412 6711618 WW 9578991 ISOS Lya S e 990 5598974 uondo ISOS ede oipny WW S E 990 9505976 4 90 SIG PIEH z ISOS epiwiseJ 892 7505976 0 90 SIG z ISOS 1524 YH 892 zi 7772999 Jeueo 2 7 a m S00cHSO m jeondo v6LZHSO r v8vt ISOS ASIA 9 08 X X 6262929 8699967 9802 eondo GOE I x x 1276499 ue 4 X X 5556358 X X vS9996t A ddns saea ainpayyoy sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 343 Hardware Maintenance Service 7550 26 S 114 098 0 89 1eidepy ISOS 9929 LZS8XZZ pue 09 Sjapoy 104 Jemod 91980 1996499 08 pue 09 sjapoyy 104 1 8 7996499 1196 66 06 98 ZZ ZG 104 18789 7578991 ISOS ede 19 se s 9901 9 159897 uondo ISOS oipny NINY 525 9901 7 0115907 9415907 AWIS pilos VIOWOd 0570426 ase Duikueo 7219928 e ug SIG vIOWOd x 957991
23. uondo ndd 94nyea4 asya eBe101s PS 2 Maintenance Manual 350 iB gt E 2100498 oseg 7098004 602 1 0158 9 1 II WOH QO peoueuua 2800426 Uy 1700395 OLSE pue 9898 I POWN 10J 14 0100426 sued yy 0195558 s uoydpe H 28004326 suuds 0100468 08 pue 09 siapo 6176465 ppeo AD x gt 5700378 08 09 reubis R 5 9800426 5 yams 31980 E 1398XZZ 08 pue 09 SjapoN 104 eiqe 8510379 G6 1 104 jezeg 7700 78 08 pue 09 SI POWN 104 jezeg 8000468 44 pue Op 5 jezeg X x 098902 061919 5861 II INOH QO 1595 saea ainpayYyoy sng 1v JequinN JequinN JequinN lt uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 351 Hardware Maintenance Service P X 0 68 90915 1eidepy x 1900426 i83 X Z826X06 Jejdepy sng SNSYSIG pue YSIG pex
24. 10 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Installed Devices List If an adapter or device is missing from the Installed Devices list and you are able to add it to the list do so and continue with the diagnostic tests If an adapter or device is missing from the installed devices list and you cannot it to the list you might have one of the following conditions The diagnostic code for the missing device is not on your Advanced Diagnostics diskette The missing device is a 5 25 Inch External Diskette Drive Adapter or another unrecognizable adapter The missing device is defective The bus adapter is defective The adapter or device is not an IBM product If the number of drives installed in the computer differs from the number shown in the installed devices list an error can occur during the diagnostic tests Restart the computer and correct the drive information in the Set Configuration menu before running the diagnostic tests Warning For some models customized setup configuration other than default settings might exist on the computer you are servicing Running Automatic Configuration can alter those settings Note the current configuration settings using the View Configuration option and verify that the settings are in place when service is complete Hardware Maintenance Service 11 Symptom to FRU Index AT Bus This index supports the following PS 2 Models 25 25 SX 25 286 30 30 286 33 35
25. 5 25 inch Diskette Drive Bezel 1 2 Ht Cover Lock Assembly Pawl required for 92F0003 Front Cover Logo R 56 SX 56 LS 56 SLC 56 SLC LS Floor Stand Cable Cover Miscellaneous Parts Kit see page 303 Index DASD 56 11 11 11 10 1 44MB 3 5 Inch Drive 2 88MB 3 5 Inch Drive 2 88MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive with electronic eject Bezel Bay 1 for 92F0132 Bezel Bay 2 for 92F0132 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Tray 1 2MB 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Rail Kit for 64F4102 Diskette Drive Cable 40MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 60MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 80MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 104MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 120MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 160MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 212MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI Hard Disk Drive Cable 79F3448 79F3443 79F3463 79F7208 79F7212 95F6018 79F7213 79F3447 79F3460 79F7218 95F5607 84F7994 85F0298 92F0102 92F0105 64F3606 92F0078 10G7103 61G2099 79F7210 33F8354 07G2858 85F0093 79F3450 85F0091 85F0068 92F0003 79F3459 79F7216 79F7217 06G6607 00G6609 79F3458 79F3462 79F7209 85F0050 64F4148 92F0132 92F0146 92F0133 85F0097 64F4102 85F0041 07G2857 56F8866 6128296 56F8854 95F4748 6128298 56F8851 95F4749 92F0406 92F0428 79F7214 Hardware Maintenance Service 247 Model 57 8557 Parts PS 2 Maintenance Manual 248 Index System Unit 57 1 ARON 1 5 12 12
26. 881 881 Kejdsiq X n 49 6469 G 81980 Aeldsiq 1 L x 96 6469 oapisyoipny X a 2616469 m 9 qe2 eipejNuonov L X 7226469 9226469 uondo e1mde eipejuonoy x 216469 55 6369 ANT v erdepy ejdsig elpeyyuonoy xn 555 X 0226469 1516369 i Jejdepy jeuueu 1595 s4234 JequinN JequinN JequinN jeuueyd prepuejs uondo nus 94njea4 suondo oipny Aejdsiq PS 2 Maintenance Manual 328 gt X 88S14 G cv8vJec uz Jejdepy ueaJos 1799914 sng VSI LV Jeidepy jeuosidg cS0vYH90 pieog obey 294 629 526 Jes Jeyeeds 699 926 e ug 2 cS0vH90 D UOHOW Od DI3dN 999 026 yousAor 1892526 19 Jayeeds 99820026 olpny 2620914 e ug INOH 02 5 78940026 oipny x X x 626 426 9921496 v 1eidepy oipny IN A 6 6 66 gt Jes Jeyeeds 998 026 a olpny 1620914 e ug NOY AD 5894966 7698 oipny pu3 01 x X 91 2967 5 JequinN JequinN JequinN
27. Adapter ServerGuard Battery Backup 3V Lithium Battery Pack Main 7 2V NiCad for Belgium Brazil Luxembourg Netherlands Taiwan All other countries Cable External DAA to Modem All countries except Japan Cable External DAA to PSTN for Australia Austria Belgium Canada Chile China Czechoslovakia Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary Iceland Ireland Israel Italy 58G4339 Japan Luxembourg Malaysia Netherlands Norway New Zealand Poland Portugal Romania Singapore South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan United Kingdom United States Yugoslavia 306 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 61G3628 33F8354 82G4776 82G4776 82G4776 82G4776 82G4776 61G3629 92F0287 58G4343 58G4386 58G4346 43G3398 43G3398 58G4332 43G3398 58G4333 58G4334 58G4335 58G4347 43G3398 58G4332 43G3398 58G4336 43G3398 58G4338 48G9594 43G3398 43G3398 58G4340 58G4334 58G4332 43G3398 43G3398 43G3398 43G3398 58G4344 43G3398 58G4336 58G4348 43G3398 58G4345 43G3398 43G3398 DAA External for Australia Austria Belgium Canada Chile China Czechoslovakia Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary Iceland Ireland Israel Italy 43G3408 Japan incl DAA to Modem cable Luxembourg Malaysia Netherlands Norway New Zealand Poland Portugal Singapore South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan United Kingdom United States Yugoslavia External Power Control B
28. Determining Models 90 95 Processor Type On these models memory operation differs with each type of processor board type 1 2 or 3 Use any of the three methods in the Processor Board Matrix 90 95 to determine which one it is then continue with the appropriate memory section Processor Board Matrix 90 95 1 Go to the Diagnostic Main Menu and select Display revision levels you might have to select More utilities first Note the submodel code displayed on the screen The customer can use this screen to tell you the submodel code 2 Read the FRU number printed near the card edge of the processor board 3 Look for a second label marked P1 PC to the right of the front serial number of the system The second label indicates that the processor board has been upgraded 126 PS 2 Maintenance Manual The following table converts the model code submodel code FRU number reference diskette type or the second label to the processor type Mod Sub Sub Processor Board FRU 2nd Ref Mod Mod Number and Lab Disk 90 95 Description Type OGX 2D 2 92F0049 486SX 20 2 1 0JX 11 14 64F0201 486 25 1 1 OKX 13 16 64F0198 486 33 2 1 OMX 2B 2 92F0048 486 50 P3 1 OGX 2F 2E 92F0065 487SX 20 P4 1 OHX 57 58 92F0079 486SX 25 5 2 591 92F0079 486 SX251 P6 2 OLX 3F 40 92F0161 486DX2 25 50 P7 2 5B 502 92F0079 486 25 502 P8 2 OMX 29 28 57F1597 486 50 PA 3 ONX 4
29. Diskette Identifying Drive Mark 3 5 Inch 1 44MB 1 44 on the eject button 3 5 Inch 2 88MB 2 88 on the eject button The following table provides compatibility information for 3 5 inch diskettes and 3 5 inch diskette drives Diskette 1 44MB 2 88MB Capacity Drive Drive 1 0MB Read Write Read Write 2 0MB Read Write Read Write 4 0MB Not Compatible Read Write The following table provides identification information for 5 25 inch diskette drives Diskette Identifying Drive Mark 5 25 Inch 360KB External Asterisk on bezel 5 25 Inch 1 2MB Internal 1 2 on the eject button The following table provides compatibility information for 5 25 inch diskettes and 5 25 inch diskette drives Diskette 360KB 1 2MB Capacity Drive Drive 360KB Read Write Read Write 1 2MB Not Compatible Read Write Notes 1 360KB diskette written to or formatted on a 1 2MB drive can be read reliably only on a 1 2MB drive 2 On some early 90 and 95 computers with a type 1 processor board installed the system board used will not support the 2 88MB diskette drive 370 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Hard Disk Drive Settings ATA These drives have jumper tab or switch settings Always set the first drive to be the primary master drive 1 second drive is installed set it to be the secondary slave drive 2 Note Do not move any other jumpers tabs or switches on the drives 40MB and
30. For 8570 systems refer to ECA059 ECA051 For 8580 AXX Models see ECA051 for possible system board replacement to correct Trap 002 NMI or DOS parity errors System Aid Diskette A system aid diskette is now available for Trap 0002 errors Dealers can download it from the Technical Advisors Bulletin Board as file TRAP2LOG The diskette will read NVRAM and indicate which of four possible sources caused the error The four possible errors and their causes are listed below Error Information Code 110 Usually a system board memory error If replacing the memory does not fix the problem suspect the system board 111 I O Channel Check Any adapter could cause this error but usually a memory adapter is the cause 112 Watchdog Timeout Could be hardware or software If replacing the system board does not fix the problem suspect the software 113 DMA Timeout Usually a software error but possibly a hardware failure system board If itis a 70 A21 with a 113 error see ECA056 run CHKDSK Contact the software vendor for more information If it is any other system with a 113 error refer to ECA023 Check the hardware 132 PS 2 Maintenance Manual PCMCIA Diagnostics PS 2 E Model 33 The PS 2 E Model 33 has a PCMCIA adapter that acts as a bus from the system board to the option adapters If the computer has a problem carefully remove and reseat the riser card any PC Cards and the PCMCIA
31. Memory connectors J7 J8 J9 J10 J33 and J34 IDE hard disk drive LED connector W10 Power LED connector W9 Speaker connector J11 Processor socket EISA slots J23 J24 J25 J26 and J27 PCI slots J30 J31 and J32 Mouse port J15 Keyboard port J14 Serial port J20 Power supply connector P1 J12 Power supply connector P2 J17 Serial port COM2 J21 Parallel port J18 Real time clock socket Diskette drive connector J19 Power supply connector P3 J37 IDE 2 hard disk drive connector J22 A AN Pin 1 PS 2 Maintenance Manual PC Server Pentium System Board Jumper Settings A label showing the following jumper locations is located on the top of the base frame assembly inside the system unit Jumper Settings Parity Check Jumper Configuration Setting J1 Pentium parity check enabled Installed Default Not installed Pentium parity check disabled Jumper Settings DRQ Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W14 DRQ6 Pins 1 2 DRQ7 Pins 2 3 Jumper Settings Secondary Cache Selection Jumper Configuration Setting J40 5 volts for the Installed Jumper blocks Pentium all pins
32. Switch 4 is always set to on The table below shows how switches 1 2 and 3 set for IDs 6 through 0 Switches Switches SCSI ID 1234 SCSI ID 1234 e JARA 2 5 Un EG ENEE ieee MEI Value 124 Value 124 Notes 1 2 If present switch 5 is always and switch 6 is always off On external SCSI devices that have a rotary switch to set the SCSI ID set the switches or jumpers on the FRU device inside the external cover to 0 off to enable the rotary switch Hardware Maintenance Reference 411 SCSI ID Jumper Settings To set the SCSI ID on a hard disk drive or CD ROM with jumpers do the following Note If you are servicing a 2GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 16 bit 68 pin refer to 2GB SCSI 16 Bit 68 Pin Hard Disk Drive ID Switch Settings 1 Position the device so that the single pin is in the 4th position from the left The single pin might be in either the upper or lower position 59952 SCSI ID 2 Refer to the table below to position the hard disk drive and CD ROM jumpers for IDs 6 through 0 SCSI Jumpers SCSI Jumpers ID 123 ID 123 6 2 5 1 4 E 0 3 2GB
33. Understanding SCSI ID Numbers Each SCSI device must be assigned at the time of installation a unique SCSI identification number SCSI ID The SCSI adapter or controller and the SCSI devices attached to it are referred to as a SCSI chain the system can support more than one SCSI chain When changing drives be sure to see Terminator Function on page 414 Selecting a SCSI ID The SCSI ID 6 5 4 3 2 1 or 0 available for a device depends on which 105 are already assigned to devices in the same SCSI chain For example if there is already one device in the SCSI chain assigned SCSI ID 6 no other SCSI devices in that chain can be set to SCSI ID 6 The ID you choose determines the priority of the device SCSI device IDs should be set as follows The SCSI adapter or controller is preset as SCSI ID 7 highest priority A fixed media read and write device such as a hard disk drive should be assigned a high priority ID such as 5 Note The default drive with the IML code loaded is usually SCSI ID 6 Removable media devices CD ROM optical drive or a tape drive should be assigned a priority ID of 4 3 2 1 or 0 an ID below the fixed media devices Hardware Maintenance Reference 409 Typically a low priority or mid priority device should not be assigned a SCSI ID higher than a high priority device At the time of installation a SCSI device should be labeled indicating the SCSI ID assigned to that de
34. VIOWOd paepueis usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 316 gt X OccLOSL S018Xc4 m 4e1depy Od 22079 1419828 Jeidepy YONN 0996928 eoeyeju 6796048 vIOWOd 87 6978 Jejdepy oipny VIOND n S9 6H0L 9076978 7 8686948 7076048 eyjensny 2076048 VYA P 9626928 E x 7656918 AeMION ar 26 6978 27 0626928 Arey 88 6928 pueju4 vva EE 98 6928 VYG X z z 78569 8 yya saea 21 sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN VISINDd Jouueyd 1 uondo ndd 94njea4 317 Hardware Maintenance Service 290853 S98KXOL uonoeuuo 01 VON OZE S L90SXOZ 0915390 104 ejqeo OZE S 6687 91 0915390 v jeidepy 0 6 9SZEXSZ 1905X02 104 S SIG OZE S Lv 619 L905X02 04 5 8672926
35. deam WEpoW 2 222 54 x 11 29 81480 WEPON 2 zez sd X 662 1460 2 0 Bnig deam 0 282 5Y x 00640 0 dej O ZEZ SH x x v6vSovo 1 8 0 desm uuoo 2 22 59 x SvaLX29 198UUO9 O ZEz SH x 6vScv9 Bnid deam 198UU09 9 22 54 E x 982 89 pig 2919 2 z 2 SH x 26 2 9 deam 904409 x 8 7491 desm 904409 eoejieju saea 21 sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 suondo e ej1eju eumjeeu uoneoiunuiuio 325 Hardware Maintenance Service 0681591 2881491 dew 12 uondo eiqeo 12 7066307 5 0 HOd dem SL 12 96vScv9 de SE A 198149 SE A 6balx29 uuo GEA 1821 89 99 5 S A 6881491 eiqeo SE A 910414 0 uod dem YE SE A 0066307 eigeioojes L 8 0 dem GEA x 1681491 dem van X 8881491 eiqeo
36. 027557XX 1 7 2V NiCad Main Battery Pack 2 ServerGuard Adapter t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error FRU Action 027558XX 027559XX 1 PCMCIA Type II 027560XX 027561XX Modem 2 ServerGuard Adapter 027562XX 1 External Power Control Box not connected 2 External Power Control Box 3 ServerGuard Adapter 027563XX 027564XX 1 External Power Control Box 2 ServerGuard Adapter 0275XXXX 1 Update Diagnostic Software 0279XXXX 1 Fast Wide Streaming RAID Adapter A FRU No 06H3059 2 System Board 3 Signal Pass Through Card if installed 1998009X 1 Restore System Partition I999XXXX 1 Default Hard Disk This is usually not a Drive hardware failure Go to 2 Processor Board IML and IPL Errors on 90 95 page 55 before replacing 3 SCSI Adapter FRUs Specific 1999XXXX 4 SCSI Cable error codes are listed after IML and IPL Errors t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 IML and IPL Errors You are here because the system detects an Initial Machine Load IML problem or an Initial Program Load IPL problem You can correct most of these errors without replacing any FRUs IML IPL problems are associated with the following An 1999XXXX error is displayed The computer powered on wi
37. 1 44MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive 2 88MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive 2 88MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive with electronic eject Bezel Bay 1 for 92F0132 Bezel Bay 2 for 92F0132 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel 1 3 Ht 1 2MB 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Rail Kit for 64F 4102 5 25 Inch Blank Bezel 1 3 Ht 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel 1 3 Ht 5 25 Inch Blank Bezel 1 2 Ht Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel Diskette Drive Cable Diskette Drive Cable 386 SLC 486 SLC 40MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 80MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 80MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 104MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 170MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 170MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 212MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 212MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 245MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 245MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 340MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 420MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 527MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE Hard Disk Drive Bezel Hard Disk Drive Cable Hard Disk Drive Cable Double Hard Disk Drive Cable Bay 3 85F0050 64F4148 92F0132 92F0146 92F0133 85F0093 64F4102 85F0041 79F3450 85F0068 85F0091 92F0159 79F3453 96F7768 64F4132 64F4133 92F0152 95F4748 95F4728 71G4958 93F0118 95F4749 61G3754 92F0403 92F0404 71G4930 92F0405 85F0091 79F3454 96F7780 96F7776 Hardware Maintenance Service 235 Model 40 8540 Parts PS 2 Maintenance Manual 236 Index System Unit 40 1 PPR RWNDD Top Cover Assembly without lock Rear Cover Rear Cover 386
38. 1988926 xe4 ejeq sdoxr y 1 5 2 59 Yvc6948 jeues Uld 6 o 76698 Jejdepy eves 22258 vIOWOd 0826978 eiqeo Jejdepy jeues ZEZSY vIOWOd 919 926 7000458 2 54 x 921449 S aBleg ar X 2921429 7 eige2 L X 2921429 eigeo x 1921428 eigeo JoyeEoIUNWWOQEUO0YUd L X 6190579 9787 55 Jejdepy 1ojeoiunuiuoneuoud S X 1221061 1018 2 Jejdepy pueqeseg JOMIAN 53 X xz 2119828 5 10M9N Od saea sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN VISINDd jeuueYyd prepuejs uondo ndd n PS 2 Maintenance Manual 318 8 8218 69 0792492 9587 VSI 40 Jaldepy VIOWOd 959 1001 1015 OML visedepy Burg uexo 6EBLXEB einpoiw Jeldepy 8686466 5970391 Jeydepy 1888492 75503456 104 SINPOW 1954485 7550456 Jejdepy 4 9 0717372 6717372 Jersey sng Burg uexyo 1 4888468 SLv6dvZ
39. 3 Select Set startup sequence and follow the instructions on the screen Example Default Startup Sequence The example below shows the default startup sequence for the system Startup Number Device ERR 2 88MB 3 5 inch Diskette Drive SCSI hard disk slot 1 ID LUN 6 Bang caes Not selected AU AUN Not selected Note The selections and device types vary Example Changing the Startup Sequence Assume the following drives are installed in the system Diskette Drives 3 5 inch diskette drive primary 3 5 inch diskette drive second 5 25 diskette drive third Hard Disk Drives 400MB hard disk drive primary hard disk drive divided into two 200MB partitions If you want to start the system from a 3 5 inch diskette a 5 25 inch diskette or the hard disk drive you can define the startup sequence as follows Startup Number Device teats YE 2 88MB 3 5 inch Diskette Drive 1 2 5 25 inch Diskette Drive 2 SCSI hard disk slot 1 ID LUN 6 Bice Rug qo Not selected In this example the system looks for a startable diskette in the primary 3 5 inch diskette drive and then looks for a startable diskette in the 5 25 inch diskette drive If there is not a startable diskette in either drive the system loads the operating system from the System Partition on the hard disk drive Hardware Maintenance Reference 421 System Unit Power Supplies Wh
40. Before you remove and replace any SCSI devices in Server 95A you should be familiar with disk array features and technologies Warning If hard disk drives in the disk array are not removed and replaced correctly data in the disk array could be lost To service the Server 95A you should have the following items shipped with the system Configuring Your Disk Array booklet Micro Channel Computers Reference IBM RAID Controller Diskette The programs on the Reference and Diagnostic Diskettes do not affect devices attached to the RAID controller You only can view manage configure and troubleshoot devices attached to the IBM RAID Controller by using the IBM RAID Controller Diskette Server 95A Reference and Diagnostic Diskettes Server 95A does not have a System Partition on any of the hard disks therefore you must have a copy of these diskettes to run diagnostics on the base system Storage Capacity The capacity shown and reported by the IBM RAID Controller is the binary equivalent that is 540MB hard disk drive is shown on the Configuration screen as 520MB Data Protection The IBM RAID Controller supports the following technology levels The amount of data protection varies with each level Level 0 Does not allow for data redundancy and any drive failure using level 0 will result in loss of data Level 1 Duplicates data across all drives in the array Because the data is duplicated the capacity of the logical
41. FRU Action 000184XX 1 User must reset the Power on password password corrupted 000185XX 1 Run Select Startup Selectable startup sequence corrupted 000186XX Security error Hardware failed Sequence utility Reset user s chosen startup sequence 1 System Board 000187XX Vital Product Data VPD error System serial number information corrupted 1 Select Set system identification from the Reference Diskette System Partition or server image and type the system serial number problem remains suspect the system board 000188XX Vital Product Data VPD error 1 Run Automatic Configuration 000189XX The wrong password was entered 3 times Clear the system error log and restart the system Information only 000191XX 82385 cache test failed 1 Run Advanced 000194XX Diagnostics 1 System Board Memory 2 Memory Riser Card 90 3 Memory Module Kit 000199XX User indicated configuration is invalid 1 Run the Flash Update Utility PS 2 9553 xBx Only 2 System Board 0001XXXX not listed above 000201 XX to 000205XX Reseat System Board Memory 1 System Board Processor Board 90 95 2 486DX33 Upgrade 70 80 3 Any Adapter 4 Bus Adapter 1 System Board Memory 2 System Board t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 38 PS 2 Maintena
42. FRU Action 000253XX 000254XX 1 Processor Cache 90 95 2 Processor Board 000255XX Check memory t 1 System Board Memory 2 System Board 00029000 Unsupported memory combination detected 1 Correct the unsupported combination of ECC and parity memory modules Run Automatic Configuration then rerun Advanced Diagnostics 000291XX 000292XX 000293XX 00029400 Checksum value mismatch 1 Run Automatic Configuration then rerun Advanced Diagnostics 000295XX 000296XX Check memory for an unsupported configuration or modules t 1 System Board Memory 00029800 Checksum value mismatch 1 System Board Memory Run Automatic Configuration then rerun Advanced Diagnostics 0002XX00 1 486DX33 Upgrade not listed above 70 80 000301XX 000302XX 1 Keyboard Cable 2 System Board 000303XX 000304XX 1 System Board 2 Keyboard 3 Keyboard Cable 000305XX 1 Fuse Keyboard voltage error If 2 Keyboard Cable no fuse in system replace system board 000306XX 1 Check for Wrong Keyboard Unsupported Attached Keyboard 000307XX 1 Keyboard 2 Keyboard Cable 000320XX 1 System Board 000401XX to 000405 1 System Board 0005XXXX 1 Display Adapter any type t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 40 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error
43. Symptom to FRU Index AT Bus on page 12 Hardware Maintenance Service 5 Memory Problems 8086 Computers Go to Memory Problems 80286 to 80486 Computers on page 9 for models 25 25 SX 25 286 30 30 286 33 35 and 40 PARITY CHECK 1 indicates that memory on the system board has failed If the system has a total of 512KB memory installed 8525 replace the memory module packages If the system has a total of 640KB memory installed and the address number displayed below PARITY CHECK 1 is less than 20000 replace the optional memory modules 8525 or the system board 8530 Otherwise replace the memory module 8525 or 51 and S2 8530 PARITY CHECK 2 indicates that an adapter memory module has failed Go to Undetermined Problems on page 183 001 Memory errors are displayed as AAAAAA BB CCCC 20X To isolate a memory failure answer the following questions DID YOU RECEIVE A 205 MEMORY ERROR MESSAGE DURING POST OR WHEN RUNNING THE MEMORY TESTS Yes No 002 Go to Step 011 003 IS THE SYSTEM A TYPE 8530 Yes No 004 Go to Step 006 005 Replace the system board 6 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 006 IS CCCC FOUR ZEROS 0000 Yes No 007 For any C in CCCC that is not zero replace the corresponding module as shown 035 U34 U22 016 008 WAS THE SIXTH DIGIT IN AAAAAA 1 3 5 7 9 B
44. This practice ensures correct grounding of the units If an electrical accident occurs Use caution do not become a victim yourself Switch off power Send another person to get medical aid Hardware Maintenance Reference 367 Safety Inspection Guide The intent of this inspection guide is to assist you in identifying potentially unsafe conditions on these products Each machine as it was designed and built had required safety items installed to protect users and service personnel from injury This guide addresses only those items However good judgment should be used to identify potential safety hazards due to attachment of non IBM features or options not covered by this inspection guide If any unsafe conditions are present you must determine how serious the apparent hazard could be and whether you can continue without first correcting the problem Consider these conditions and the safety hazards they present Electrical hazards especially primary power primary voltage on the frame can cause serious or fatal electrical shock Explosive hazards such as a damaged CRT face or bulging capacitor Mechanical hazards such as loose or missing hardware The guide consists of a series of steps presented in a checklist Begin the checks with the power off and the power cord disconnected Checklist 1 Check exterior covers for damage loose broken or sharp edges 2 Power off the computer Disconnect the
45. Use the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the OFL offline drive you want to rebuild then press Enter The progress of the rebuilding process appears on the screen When the rebuilding process completes press Esc to return to the Main Menu The new configuration will be saved automatically Backup the new configuration see Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 170 Select Exit to end the RAID configuration program Remove the diskette and press Ctrl Alt Del to restart the system PS 2 Maintenance Manual Redefining Space in an Array You can redefine space in a disk array in a number of ways For example you can combine a number of small logical drives to create a larger one or you can redefine the existing logical drive into several smaller drives Also you can install additional hard disk drives to create a larger logical drive than was possible with the existing storage capacity One method to redefine space in an array is to change the RAID level assigned to a logical drive For example if you assigned RAID level 1 to a logical drive and then decided you needed the capacity offered with RAID level 5 you can use this procedure to replace the existing logical drive with a logical drive assigned the new RAID level To redefine the space in a disk array first you must delete the array The last disk array defined must be the first deleted Warning In all cases when yo
46. Yes No 003 Follow the instructions on the display 004 Your computer memory is now functioning correctly If you suspect an intermittent problem start an error log using a DOS formatted diskette 005 Note Power off the computer before removing or replacing parts Press F1 to continue Run the memory tests Use the RUN TESTS ONE TIME option If you cannot run the memory test or the test does not find a problem use the following procedure to find the problem 1 Using a known good memory pack exchange each pack one at a time and repeat the memory diagnostic test until you find the defective pack 256KB and 1MB packs are not interchangeable Replace only the defective packs 2 If all memory packs have been exchanged and the problem remains replace the system board Hardware Maintenance Service 9 Memory Problems PC Server 8640 The PC Server 8640 has four 36 bit 72 pin SIMM sockets on the system board The system board can accommodate memory from 8MB up to 128MB 192MB on some models The following are the memory requirements for the PC Server computer At least two SIMM sockets must be filled Start with bank 0 then work your way up The SIMMs must be rated at 70NS or better Recommended that the SIMMs have tin lead contacts Banks 0 and 1 must have the same size memory installed If memory is installed in banks 2 and 3 the memory in banks 2 and 3 must be the same size
47. 0208 Unknown device type 0209 Direct access removable media and or other than 512 byte blocks 0210 Direct access hard disk 512 byte blocks 0211 Sequential access tape 0212 Printer 0213 Processor 0214 Write Once Read Multiple W O R M 0215 Read only CD ROM 0216 Scanner 0217 Optical memory read write optical disk 0218 Changer multiple tray CD ROM 0219 Communications B Codes B Device Type or Information Dual SCSI adapter internal bus Dual SCSI adapter external bus QEET 0000 Codes Refer to this list if the DDD indicates an adapter followed by a QEET of 0000 For example 01120100 0000 PLSC QEET Information 0100 0000 On systems with NVRAM SCSI setup data not located or the checksum did not verify On systems without NVRAM Model 50 for example setup data must be on the 1st hard disk 0200 0000 Configuration error No hard disk found at PUN 6 LUN 0 for 161 162 165 system error path Might be an unsupported configuration 0300 0000 No space available in extended BIOS data area for SCSI data table possibly too many adapters installed 0400 0000 ROM modules not found on adapter IML based systems only Running setup might correct it 0500 0000 ROM checksum error on 2nd 16K portion of 32K ROM 0600 0000 ROM access control port error QEET Errors other than 0000 116 5 2 Maintenance Manual Th
48. 0870498 ed 1 gie 619892 7090579 0554671 70105426 08 Gz 404 1e1depy uoisuedx3 9SS6X06 20 5198 1 gZ S090Sv9 9996 06 08 OZ 104 uoisuedx3 98208 IN8 Z 6090579 0870358 09963558 so 09 XSSS 09 10J uondo uoisuedx3 98208 gIN8 Z 092 429 10 Uy AN 2090979 v298X06 2628 91 8 ed sugg ainpoyy 0955305 LE98XvZ 1779406 S2Z6Y 1 einpow ANL 696 671 5961671 S9 09 XSSSG 09 101 v 1eidepy pepuedx3 8 0 9220391 9g 18POIN 104 93219 1922491 8881460 104 Uy 9 219 9596455 5092459 404 GMT IS 9007901 09 ed 104 AOWaN 87218 4198 24 09 ed GMT IS 48 99 OS 982 08 m ig 8755505 992 6 1 08 SIPON 29226 104 87992 51 JequinN JequinN JequinN VIOWOd uondo nua 94njee4 A10wap 101 suondo owanw PS 2 Maintenance Manual 336 92
49. 118 91 SPIM ISE4 z ISOS 0910426 x 2265958 1550426 89 89 egeo 118 91 SPIMW ISE4 21505 x 0821979 0910426 4 2 1505 151739 31929 ISOS x 6011579 2000458 84289 1 ISOS gt x f 5811579 5900 68 84980 v ieidepy ISOS 7800918 0550 26 404 ejqeo 1505 6807958 0550326 10 jeujeixa3 ISOS 0550426 Lv 18 91 Jedepy 1524 ISOS x 6910879 2910426 YDU G E BAUG jeondo 6000468 1158 pue SBuuds 1 mm 1700378 m 08 pue 09 sIePON 8510379 x 1158 pue jezeg 770038 08 pue 09 slepon zz 8000598 22 ZS 98 1 18289 saea sng 1v JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 356 0910426 104 x 6605958 0692914 OG 0 89 ejqeo uondo ISOS Hod 0 21505 2000498 900498 x evlvoze 4100372 404 og o1 09 eigeo uodo oi ISOS 0910426 x
50. 170MB Hard Disk Drive 245MB Hard Disk Drive 420MB Hard Disk Drive Hard Disk Drive Cable Tray Hard Disk Support Hard Disk Drive Bezel with Keylock Index DASD 25 SX 9 11 1 44MB Diskette Drive Diskette Drive Cable Diskette Drive Bezel 40MB Hard Disk Drive 80MB Hard Disk Drive 170MB Hard Disk Drive 170MB Hard Disk Drive 245MB Hard Disk Drive 420MB Hard Disk Drive Hard Disk Drive Power Cable Hard Disk Drive Signal Cable Hard Disk Drive Mounting Tray Hard Disk Drive Bezel with Cover Lock 2 All 8525 systems below S N 22999 3 All 8525 systems above S N 0100000 226 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 64F0162 00F2112 33F4949 6128285 6128279 92F0269 71G4958 61G3754 71G4930 64F0183 64F4101 64F0185 64F0162 04G1632 00F2112 04G1630 92F0152 95F4728 71G4958 61G3754 71G4930 04G1618 04G1633 96F7344 64F0185 Model 30 8530 Parts Hardware Maintenance Service 227 Index System Unit 30 1 Top Cover 61X8913 2 Rear Cover 61X8916 3 Base Frame Assembly R 61X8897 4 Power Supply 120 220V 61X8905 Sliding Support Bracket 61X8926 Support Bracket 61X8914 5 Power Switch Link 61X8919 6 Drive Cradle 61X8909 7 Keylock Assembly 61X8912 Power Switch 61X8918 9 Front Bezel Logo R 61X8908 10 System Board5 use if S N not in note 61X8907 10 System Board5 use if S N in note 33F8474 System Board Clip 61X8933 Memory Module Package 256KB 61X8906 8087 Math Coprocessor 61X8922 Rubber Feet Qty 4 61X8917 Miscel
51. 1922 097 K quiessy 19114 x x 2156919 eiqeiuweg goe t 904 0162029 IPON LEYE reondo eux GOE t x 5815956 LL 19H90 9962 PIEH LY gor yana 8 zS0EDv6 1 90 492 SAU YSIQ PIEH Z ISOS epiwiseJ YBIH GOL x x 2158004 9990914 ENST GOL X x 5899967 Kjquiessy ue4 X X 5899967 S X X 28995067 quiessy x x 6162929 Aiddng 5 X X 0162099 2 9 41 21 602 L X X 162929 019 099 Zeve enug jeondo 9 41 21 S E z x x 8062929 0182599 7807 reondo 8 00 21 S E 5 X 8557968 21881928 6606 ANGST S ER X x 66789004 1956356 6961 FE saea sng Ly JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 342 9558971 56 1949S 10 JEMOd AQLI 1221618 eau S e 18289 9711618 onsouDeig 0911618
52. 1999009X The actions for these errors are valid only when running the system from the hard disk 1 Restore the System Partition If you need assistance see Restoring the System Partition on page 428 199900X1 199900X2 199900X3 199900X4 199900X6 199900X7 199900X9 The actions for these errors are valid only when running the system from the System Diskettes 1 Restart the computer from the Reference Diskette If the same error code appears try new System Diskettes 199900X5 Reference Diskette recovery prevented 19990301 Boot routine unable to read boot record This is probably a hardware failure 1 Power off the computer toggle the power on password override jumper then power on the computer Cable failure 2 Wrong Termination 3 SCSI Adapter Controller 4 Hard Disk 19990302 No operating system found on the default SCSI hard disk 1 Install an operating system 2 Check for a valid selectable startup sequence 19990303 The IML code did not load from the System Partition 1 Restore the System Partition If you need assistance see Restoring the System Partition on page 428 Hardware Maintenance Service 57 Symptom Error FRU Action 19990304 No startable device found This error is on ASCII consoles only 19990305 No startable device found 1 No operating system installed 2 Selectable startup seq
53. 40 55 Always start with General Checkout AT Bus on page 3 For information on Additional Service help For example voltage checks or 0S 2 Trap errors Go to Related Service Information on page 107 Possible software and hardware mismatch problems not repairable by replacing FRUs Software Hardware Mismatch Problems on page 181 Starting the System Programs Starting System Program Diagnostics on page 425 Erasing Power On Passwords Removing a Power On Password on page 376 Memory Address Conflicts No Beep Symptoms Resolving Memory Address Conflicts on page 408 Symptom Error FRU Action No beep power on indicator does not come on and fan does not run Check voltage selector switch setting 1 Power Supply No beep during POST System Board and computer hangs during POST with a message displayed Check voltage selector 2 Power Supply switch setting 3 Display Assembly 8525 4 Memory Module 8525 5 Any Adapter 6 Bus Adapter No beep fan runs 1 System Board power on indicator is on 2 Power Supply No beep and the computer is otherwise functional 1 Speaker Assembly 12 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Beep Symptoms Symptom Error FRU Action One long and two short 1 System Board beeps during POST 2 Display Adapter More than one beep during System
54. 409 saea ainpayyoy sng Ly JequinN JequinN usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 333 Hardware Maintenance Service 8 x x 827 026 1098599 2607 ININIS Wal Uld 22 Suog ANG sjapou 8912 pue L Sd 10 x 1791926 279 926 0875 Uld 2Z WIS X WL 5107 9 18 9 x x 1121026 9518954 0012 WIIG prepuels 891 5102 8 18 8 x 055 956 126 926 1892 WIS PJEPUEIS 22 SNOZ gIN8 juo swayskS 5 x 029 026 126 926 1792 WIS PJEPUEIS uid Z4 5902 9 18 8 x x 502 956 7568984 8022 5 22 ANG 5 x x 202 956 9098379 6802 Uld ZZ 404 88 8 x x 902 026 9600426 8607 ININIS IN8I Uld ZZ 903 5102 8 18 5 2798 Odlamod 5 x 228 026 525 966 8592 14 891 AGE ININIG ZZ X INL 093 409 AN x 9121956 9200488 0612 19 25 1e1depy uoisuedx3 Howay ODIN ANY 8 x x 0027026 9010426 8807 ININIS IN8I Uld ZZ 404 air x 9224026 0982560 WIOWOd uselJ ANT 5 8912 pue L Sd 10 x 69 926 075 966 6175 ny uld 22 ININIS X WE 401 gir saea
55. 514 938 3022 PS Bulletin Board Montreal 416 492 1823 PS Bulletin Board Toronto 416 946 4255 PS Bulletin Board Toronto 604 664 6466 PS Bulletin Board Vancouver 1 800 661 7768 PS Marketing Support PSMT 1 800 465 1234 Publications Ordering 1 800 661 2131 Skill Dynamics Education 416 443 5835 Warranty Claim Fulfillment Fax 416 443 5778 Warranty Claim Parts Enquiry 1 800 465 2222 Warranty Provider Support Hotline 416 946 1333 Warranty Provider Support Toronto We Want Your Comments Every effort has been made to provide complete and accurate technical information in this manual However if you find missing or inaccurate information please fax any comments corrections or suggestions to 407 982 9825 U S A Thank you Trademark of the IBM Corporation 444 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Notices References in this publication to IBM products programs or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM s product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any of IBM s intellectual property rights or other legally protectable rights may be used instead of the IBM product program or service Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products pr
56. 56 57 M57 60 65 70 76 77 M77 80 85 90 and 95 Before using this General Checkout procedure be sure to read the information under Introduction on page 2 001 Power off the computer and all external devices Check all cables and power cords Make sure there are no diskettes in the drives Set all display controls to the middle position Power on all external devices Power on the computer Notes 1 On some computers two tamper evident switches are installed on the adapter guide located at the lower left front of the system unit frame Both switches must be in the up or on position to supply power to the system Move the blue slider up until it contacts the metal actuator arms of the two switches The switches click when activated If the switches fail to activate they must be adjusted or replaced To adjust the switches remove the adapter guide with the switches from the system unit Form the actuator arms so the switches activate when the slider is moved up half the distance of its travel 2 f you get a POST error code press the pause key while the error code is on the screen Write down any error codes that are displayed then press F1 to continue 3 If the computer hangs with a POST error to Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 4 On some Model 95 computers the customer has the ability to suppress the Press F1 for Setup and
57. 64F3606 92F0138 92F0040 85F0097 92F0014 92F0042 85F0056 41G3877 33F8354 92F0002 92F0109 92F0111 92F0110 92F0113 85F0092 85F0095 85F0094 85F0096 92F0251 85F0091 85F0003 64F4125 85F0008 92F0159 85F0093 85F0098 92F0003 92F0037 92F0136 92F0137 92F0000 92F0015 74F3571 Hardware Maintenance Service 249 Index DASD 57 7 7 7 1 44MB Diskette Drive Tray 2 88MB Diskette Drive Tray 2 88MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive with electronic eject Bezel Bay 1 for 92F0132 Bezel Bay 2 for 92F0132 Diskette Drive Signal Cable 60MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 80MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 104MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 120MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 160MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 212MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 320MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 400MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI Hard Disk Drive Cable 57 SX 57 SLC Hard Disk Drive Cable 57 SLC Hard Disk Slide Cached Processor Option 57 Cached Processor Option with IBM386 SLC P1 label attached near system serial number 486SLC2 Processor Option 85F0050 64F4148 92F0132 92F0146 92F0133 85F0089 6128296 56F8854 95F4748 6128298 56F8851 95F4749 85F0011 85F0012 92F0406 92F0428 92F0036 96F7649 96F7775 92F0078 10G7103 Note When you replace the system board in a system with a Cached Processor Option you must first remove the math coprocessor socket fro
58. 8515 8516 8517 8518 640 x 480 72 37 9 NI 640 x 480 72 37 8 NI 640 x 480 75 39 4 NI 9515 9517 9518 800 x 600 56 35 2 NI 800 x 600 60 37 9 NI 800 x 600 72 48 1 NI 800 x 600 75 50 0 NI 1024 x 768 43 5 35 6 8507 8514 8515 8516 7554 8517 1024 x 768 60 48 4 NI 1024 x 768 70 57 0 NI 8517 1024 x 768 70 56 5 NI 1024 x 768 72 58 1 NI 9517 1024 x 768 75 61 1 NI 9515 1280 x 1024 50 53 4 Note Interlaced NI Non Interlaced Non IBM Displays Supported resolutions see previous table which are not available on IBM displays are available using some non IBM displays These displays range in capability from low cost low function to high cost high function Most of 402 PS 2 Maintenance Manual these displays respond as an IBM 8514 display does when used with the software supplied with the XGA 2 Asa result IBM 8514 resolutions and refresh rates are used as default The software supplied with the XGA 2 Display Adapter A or a computer with the IBM XGA 2 on the system board allows you to override the default screen resolution If you do override with a resolution which does not meet or exceeds the capability of the display attached unpredictable results can occur Warning Some multisync displays might appear to function correctly however damage may occur over time Notes 1 You must only select resolutions which are suitable for the display attached to the XGA 2 subsystem 2 The use of
59. 8595 Parts Server 9595 PS 2 9585 xKx and PS 2 9585 xNx rom oat ade ele a hi Server 9595A Parts Model 3509 Parts Model 3510 Parts Model 3511 Parts Model 3532 Parts OBI DASD Hot Swap Storage Expansion Enclosure Parts Common Parts 486 DX DX2 DLC2 SLC SLC2 System Board Upgrade Parts CD ROM Drives Element Exchange Displays External Diskette Drives 2 Keyboard Mouse Miscellaneous Parts Kis Power Cords Rewritable Optical Drives ServerGuard Adapter Parts SCSI Adapter Terminators Tools and Miscellaneous Wireless LAN Adapter ISA Micro Channel Bus Wireless LAN Adapter PCMCIA Type II Options and Adapters Matrix DER VS VER p eto 222 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 277 280 285 287 289 291 293 295 295 296 297 298 298 300 304 305 306 308 308 309 310 311 Model 25 25 286 25SX 8525 Parts Hardware Maintenance Service 223 Index System Unit 25 25 286 25SX 1 Top Cover 00F2110 2 Audio Card Jack Assembly 25 286 64F0184 Clock Module 25 286 8509237 Clock Battery 25SX 33F8354 Front Bezel Logo 25 R 61X8908 Logo Package 25 R 00F2119 Rear Cover 61X8916 3 Bracket Bus Adapter 25SX only 96F7347 3 Bracket Bus Adapter 64F0220
60. 915 Ly Iecpioe peoueuu3 101 557 926 597 926 6877 91 z Sd peoueuu3 9Y LOL x 757 956 757 956 0622 eis 1v peoueuu3 01 saea 21 sng Ly JequinN JequinN lt uondo nua 94njee4 esnojy ped ey p1eoq e y 331 Hardware Maintenance Service 912 906 557 906 9 91 Jejdepy uoisuedx3 98 0 2204906 8515964 9596458 97219 ainpow 9 219 8992469 ainpow Aowan 9219 8912 pue GGIZ EELZ L Sd 10 x 199 926 099 926 dIZ 91 X 9992 oeprA suoz 87219 x 201 9 I X 87952 x 1224926 18726062 vil 27 87992 x 612 926 0070426 2e aum gxose x 957 966 157 926 5592 euoe 27 87992 X 912 926 260426 6012 aum 27 9 821 E x 1121926 6650426 Hows 27 x 022 026 6ELEDEL elle Howay
61. 9888455 eigeioojes Z 0 Mod v zer Su deiM 06640 0 uod O ZEZ SH dem Uld SZ 882 89 Pig 2813 4007 Juang VN OZ x E v06640v 0 uod LZ X dew 91 x 0066307 eiqeioejes 8 0 uod SE A deu 91 x x 8904 9 zey Sd Mod 8 x x 9192429 a Pag 2 5 8 x 8988491 pig eoeyelu 2919 27 59 uod 8 x x 8788391 deam 1 zez sd 104 8 L x x 2195455 pag eoeueiu q zee su UOd 8 saea ainpayyoy sng Ly JequinN JequinN usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 suondo eumjeeu uoneoiunuiuio 323 Hardware Maintenance Service 0996455 1268355 2092428 196843 6091 49 1559 00 7655400 2201 91 0028X09 S 8S9v0 5685970 66 1360 7968355 5868358 2961460 9922491 2920391 8881460 1922491 9022XS8 101 94 2922491 X 2269901 ano yoy Jeuueu sng 1v 84np28HYDIV 1 JequinN uondo JequinN nud
62. A type ESTDIAG then press Enter Follow the instructions on the screen If you need help press F1 DID THE DIAGNOSTIC TESTS DETECT AN ERROR Yes No 002 The diagnostic tests have completed successfully you suspect a problem go to Step 004 003 Go to Symptom to FRU Index AT Bus on page 12 004 Check the PSTN cable and the DAA cable if installed for continuity IS THE CABLE S GOOD Yes No 005 Replace the defective cable s 006 Have the customer transmit a call WAS THE CALL TRANSMITTED SUCCESSFULLY Yes No 007 If installed replace the external DAA If you do not have an external DAA installed or replacing the external DAA does not correct the problem replace the modem 112 5 2 Maintenance Manual 008 Have the customer receive an incoming call on the modem WAS THE INCOMING CALL RECEIVED Yes No 009 If installed replace the external If you do not have an external DAA installed or replacing the external DAA does not correct the problem replace the modem 010 The diagnostic tests have completed successfully If you still suspect a problem that is not software related replace the External DAA then replace the modem Hardware Maintenance Service 113 How to Use a Symptom to FRU Index Always start with the General Checkout procedure I
63. Check for continuity between pins 4 and 6 switch on 2 2 If the switch is OK short pin 4 to pin 6 on P2 and check the power supply voltages 1 4 1 Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 1 2 4 5 volts Ground 3 75 6 25 3 4 Ground Ground Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 1 2 412 0 volts Ground 9 0 415 0 3 Power Good Ground 24 5 25 4 On Off Signal Ground 1 0 5 12 0 volts Ground 9 0 15 0 6 Ground Ground 7 5 volts Ground 4 75 5 5 3 41 mmm EI P3 Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 1 Ground Ground 2 3 5 volts Ground 3 75 6 25 Hardware Maintenance Service 139 Models 35 40 56 57 76 77 1 Check for continuity between pins 4 and 6 switch on P2 2 If the switch is OK short pin 4 to pin 6 on P2 and check the power supply voltages 1 4 1 Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 4 1 3 75 6 25 7 1 2 Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 6 1 9 0 15 0 3 Power Good 4 On Off Signal 6 5 9 0 15 0 6 Ground 6 7 4 75 5 5 1 4 Drive Connectors 1 Through 4 Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum
64. JequinN JequinN Ajueuem VIOINDd jauueyd uondo ny aunyeay PS 2 Maintenance Manual 320 X OLv6dvZ OLv6dvZ 6v10 1ejdepy jeuueu ODIN Bury uexo X 101609 101609 Burg S X 2 029 Z 9796984 91 VSI uexo X 5170359 5170359 Jejdepy jejseuisng 7 91 519 uexo S x ZOVEEEO c9v E60 2108 Jejdepy WIOWOd II uexo t x 6 19 e6EL DEL 8272 Jejdepy YSI S X x 1557560 0625560 Leer Jejdepy vIOIWOd II 1U 0d 4981 S X 0557560 0855560 0557 Jejdepy vIOINOd II S x 5190909 1820426 9190 235 901 S X s090509 9820426 9090 Jejdepy 3580 S X 5155860 916660 2182 Jejdepy VIOWOd 0222 sng Ly JequinN JequinN paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 suiejs s Buryiomjon uoneoiunuiuo2 321 Hardware Maintenance Service x 0192388 v16 416 pig eoepelu 99 3 O ZEZ SH Mod 8 x 1292455 eiqeo eoenelu 3104 8 x 91054 V PAg S A 1204 9 8910424 dem gl SEA HOd 9 x 1910424 5 0 91980
65. Note For information about ISA PS ValuePoint 10BASE T 10BASE2 Ethernet Adapters see ISA PS ValuePoint 10BASE T 10BASE2 Ethernet Adapters on page 90 Data Rate Switch Settings Switch 12 on the switch block indicates the mega bits per second rate 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps at which the adapter transfers data to the network Set the switches as shown to match the data rate of the LAN segment Switch Block Data Rate 16 Mbps Off 12345678901 12 Off Data Rate On 4 Mbps 1234528678911 1 Note These switch settings apply to AT bus adapters only Micro Channel adapters do not have switches Testing the Token Ring Adapter To test the Token Ring adapter 1 Locate the Token Ring diskette that matches the adapter in the computer you are servicing Note Token Ring Network Adapter A has a plain green dot on the rear of the adapter Token Ring 16 4 Network Adapter A has 16 4 printed on the dot 2 Insert the diskette in the diskette drive then power on the computer The Ring Diagnostic menu appears Note If the computer is already on type A F1DIAG at the DOS command prompt then press Enter to load the Token Ring Setup Diagnostic program 3 Select Option 0 to test the primary Token Ring adapter then press Enter The adapter address will be displayed for a few seconds before the diagnostics are run The f
66. Portuguese 1396910 Spanish 1396911 Swedish Finnish 1396906 Swiss French 1396912 Swiss German 1396913 Turkish 1396921 U K English 1396914 U S English E ME A use only 1397025 U S English 1397050 Yugoslavian 1396920 Hardware Maintenance Service 299 Miscellaneous Parts Kits Miscellaneous Parts Kit 00F2113 3mm 5 x 5 screw w washer 2 3mm 5 x 12 screw w washer 2 3mm 5 x 8 screw 2 3mm 0 x 8 system board screw 8 3mm 0 x 8 CD support screw 2 4mm 0 x 6 drive mounting screw 2 5mm 0 x 10 tilt screw 2 Feature slot bracket 1 Feature card retainer 1 Red poly bag 1 Standoff w washer 2 Top cover screw 2 Front foot pad 2 Front foot clip 2 Tilt leg spring 2 Miscellaneous Parts Kit 07G1409 Front rubber foot 1 Rear rubber foot 1 Cover strap 1 Keyboard support 1 Track bracket 1 Safety cover 1 DC DC cap 1 Miscellaneous Parts Kit 07G1410 Rubber bumper 1 Screw and Spacer Kit 07G1411 3mm L8 screw 2 4mm L4 screw 5 2 5mm L4 screw 5 2 5mm L12 screw 5 2 5mm L18 screw 5 2 5mm L5W screw 5 2 5mm L5B screw 5 2 5mm L5 screw 5 Plastic spacer 1 Plastic spacer B 1 Miscellaneous Parts Kit 07G1743 Diskette drive A bracket 1 Diskette drive B bracket 1 LCD right support bracket 1 LCD left support bracket 1 Hard disk drive bracket 1 300 5 2 Maintenance Manual Screw Kit 07G1835 2mm 5 x 4 black screw 10 2mm 5 x 12 screw 10 1mm 6
67. S N 5505500 to 5605500 41G3985 8007000 to 8999999 9075500 to 9999999 CF5500AA001 to CF5500ZZ999 Models 081 161 20 MHz System Board System Board 41G3985 25 MHz System Board Processor Board Standoffs 4 15F7660 Models A81 A61 A21 A16 80386 System Board Assembly System Board 92F0580 Processor Board 15F7659 Models B81 B61 B21 B16 80486 System Board Assembly System Board 41G3979 Processor Board 64F0123 Processor Board Removal Tool for 64F0123 57F2859 486DX33 Processor Upgrade 92F0436 486DX33 Processor Upgrade Board Coprocessor Compatibility Plug Socket Extender Fuse 3 Amp All System Boards 72X8561 Label Kit 72X8509 Snap Kit 72X8526 Misc Parts Kit System see page 302 72X8525 Misc Parts Kit Options see page 302 72X8562 Shipping Carton 72X8590 DASD 70 Hard Disk Diskette Drive Bus Adapter 90X9287 1 44MB Diskette Drive includes bezel 64F0207 Diskette Drive Slide 72X8507 Note The following hard disk drives include the ESDI hard disk drive controller and slides 60MB Hard Disk Drive DBA 6128294 80MB Hard Disk Drive DBA 56F8894 Terminator for 56F8894 92F0269 120MB Hard Disk Drive DBA 6128291 160MB Hard Disk Drive DBA 56F8895 Hard Disk Drive Slide Kit 90X8628 256 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Models 56 76 9556 9576 Parts 257 Hardware Maintenance Service Index System Unit 9556 9576 1 2 OO WDONOU n 10 11 12 13 14 15 258 Cover Lock A
68. SVGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA2 XGA2 XGA2 XGA2 XGA2 XGA2 XGA2 XGA2 XGA2 SVGA SVGA SVGA SVGA SVGA SVGA SVGA XGA2 XGA2 XGA2 MGA MGA S B 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 4 5 4 44 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 4 4 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8X7 8X7 Memory 5 4M 64M Y 4M 64M Y 4M 64M Y 4M 64M Y 4M 64M Y 4M 64M Y 8M 64M Y 4M 64M Y 8M 64M 8M 64M lt lt 4M 64M lt 8M 64M 8M 64M 8M 64M 8M 64M 4M 64M 4M 64M 8M 64M 8M 64M lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 4M 64M lt 8M 64M 8M 64M 8M 64M 8M 64M 8M 64M 16M 64M 16M 64M 4M 16MB 4M 16MB 4M 16MB 4M 16MB 8M 16M 8M 16M 8M 16M 8M 16M 8M 16M 8M 32M 8M 32M 8M 32M 8M 32M 8M 32M 8M 32M 8M 32M 8M 32M 8M 32M 8M 256M 8M 256M 8M 256M 8M 256M 8M 64M 8M 64M 8M 64M 8M 64M 16M 64M 16M 64M 16M 256M ECC 16M 256M Y ECC Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Hrd Dsk 80M SCSI 160M SCSI 400M SCSI 80M SCSI 160M SCSI 80M SCSI 80M SCSI 160M SCS 160M SCS 400M SCS 320M SCS 320M SCS 400M SCS 160M SCS 400M SCS 160M SCS 400M SCS 160M SCS 400M SCS 160M SCS 160M SCS 400M SCS 320M SCS 160M SCS 400M SCS 400M SCS 1GB SCSI Ethnernet Token Ring 120MB
69. The switches click when activated If the switches fail to activate they must be adjusted or replaced To adjust the switches remove the adapter guide with the switches from the system unit Form the actuator arms so the switches activate when the slider is moved up half the distance of its travel 2 If you received a 00014908 or 00014909 while testing the system with the front bezel installed do the following a Remove the side cover b Install the front bezel c While observing switch 1 attached to the side of the drive support structure operate the keylock d If operating the keylock does not fully operate switch 1 replace the keylock assembly and switch transfer assembly located inside the front bezel Rear Panel Security Option If this option is installed on the system it prevents cables from being removed from the back of the system and prohibits connecting other systems or devices to unused connectors on the back of the system Hardware Maintenance Reference 375 Passwords Any combination of up to 7 alphanumeric characters A Z a z and 0 9 is supported Note If the wrong password is typed three times the System logs an error in the system error log and you cannot continue without restarting the system Removing a Power On Password The method used to erase a power on password varies and so does the location of the password jumper known as the override jumper Make sure you either backup
70. any type t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Maintenance Service 43 Symptom Error FRU Action 00240900 1 Display any type 00241000 1 System Board 003015XX 1 Baseband Adapter Check for missing wrap or terminate plug on the adapter 2 Baseband Cable 0037XXXX This is usually caused by the SCSI controller built into the system board System Board 2 Hard Disk Drive 3 Hard Disk Cable 004611XX 004630XX 1 Multiport 2 Interface Board 2 Multiport 2 Adapter 004612XX 004613XX 004640XX 004641XX 1 Memory Module Package 2 Multiport 2 Adapter 00465000 1 Multiport Interface Cable 0046XXXX not listed above 1 Multiport 2 Adapter 2 Multiport 2 Interface Board 3 Memory Module Package 005600XX 1 Financial System 2 Controller Adapter 0062XXXX 1 1st Store Loop Adapter 2 Adapter Cable 0063XXXX 1 2nd Store Loop Adapter 2 Adapter Cable 0064XXXX See Network Service Procedures on page 74 1 Network Adapter 0071XXXX 1 Voice Adapter 0074XXXX Adapter jumper in the correct position See Display Adapter 8514 A on page 109 1 8514 A Display Adapter 8514 A Memory Module 2 System Board 007509XX Check display T 1 Display Adapter any type 44 2 Display any type 3 System Boar
71. equipment Find the room emergency power off EPO switch disconnecting switch or electrical outlet If an electrical accident occurs you can then operate the switch or unplug the power cord quickly Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has hazardous voltages Disconnect all power before Performing a mechanical inspection Working near power supplies Removing or installing main units Before you start to work on the machine unplug the power cord If you cannot unplug it ask the customer to power off the wall box that supplies power to the machine and to lock the wall box in the off position If you need to work on a machine that has exposed electrical circuits observe the following precautions Ensure that another person familiar with the power off controls is near you Remember Another person must be there to Switch off the power if necessary CAUTION Some hand tools have handles covered with a soft material that does not insulate you when working with live electrical currents Use only approved tools and testers Use only one hand when working with powered on electrical equipment keep the other hand in your pocket or behind your back Remember There must be a complete circuit to cause electrical shock By observing the above rule you may prevent a current from passing through your body When using testers set the controls correctly and use the approved probe le
72. miscellaneous AT 13 no beep AT 12 no beep Micro Channel 27 system configuration changing 408 diskettes 383 error log 25 433 features 380 memory 405 memory errors 433 program diagnostics starting 425 Index 465 system continued programs updating 426 SCSI information 409 system board locations 185 system board SCSI controller 180 system boards SCSI terminators 419 system partition 382 384 backing up 427 complete 386 information 425 option files 386 restoring 428 upgrading version 426 system partition failures 385 system specifications 435 system board memory 405 system to display compatibility 110 system unit power supplies 422 T tamper evident switches 375 terminal configuration ASCII 431 terminator requirements SCSI 418 terminators ASCII 430 function SCSI 414 non removable 419 on SCSI adapters 418 on system boards 419 removable 419 setup and menu selection ASCII 430 terminators SCSI adapter parts 308 terms acronyms and abbreviations 438 test ACPA A advanced diagnostic 108 Ethernet adapter 81 SCSI diagnostic 181 starting advanced diagnostic 384 token ring adapter 74 text messages FLASH 383 the error code format 115 toggle microphone gain 108 466 PS 2 Maintenance Manual token ring adapter testing 74 token ring POST errors 79 tone audio output tone 108 tools and miscellaneous parts 308 misc tools and parts 308 trademarks IBM 445 trademarks other
73. or a different RAID level for an additional logical drive You can have as many as eight logical drives among four disk arrays To return to the Create Delete Array menu press Esc To define more logical drives repeat steps 1 through 5 of this procedure To leave this screen select Exit or press Esc A pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action To save your changes select Yes To maintain the disk array configuration that was in place before you made changes select No If you are using RAID level 1 or RAID level 5 you must select Initialize logical drive for proper operation This sets the drive to a predetermined state Any data existing on the drive is overwritten with zeros and corresponding parity is initialized to the correct value a Select Initialize synchronize array from the Main Menu then select Initialize logical drive b Select the logical drives you want to initialize from the Logical Drive list by pressing the Spacebar the selected drives will appear highlighted To start the initialization press Enter A pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action r Warning If you select Yes in the Confirm pop up window information in the logical drive will be overwritten with zeros C Select Yes to confirm that you want to initialize this logical drive The initialization process begins and you can See its progress in the Pct Int Percent Initialized c
74. or make note of the current configuration before you erase the password After service follow the instructions on the Screen and reset the date time and any customized configuration data You can use Backup Restore to save it or Automatic Configuration after service To erase the power on password do the following Models 25 30 33 35 40 56 57 76 77 85 90 95 Override Jumper The override jumper is located on the system board System Jumper Location Model 25 SX J2 Models 25 30 286 J13 Models 8535 8540 J14 Models 9533 9535 J20 9540 Models 8556 8557 J18 Models 9556 9557 JMP1 9576 9577 9595 Model 90 J10 Server 85 Model 95 J16 Power off the computer and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the system unit cover 3 Move the password jumper to connect the center pin and the pin on the opposite end of the connector 4 Power on the computer The system senses the change in the jumper position and erases the password There is no need to move the jumper back to the previous position 376 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 55 SX 65 SX Override Jumper 1 2 3 Power off the computer and unplug the power cord Remove the system unit cover Locate the speaker cable and the connector that it plugs into Unplug the speaker cable turn it over 180 and plug it back in Power on the computer The system senses the change in the connector position and erase
75. removing power on password 376 replacement strategy FRU 1 replacement strategy hard disk 1 replacing hard disk with a system partition 385 requirements grounding 369 resolution possible 402 resolving memory address conflicts 408 restart automatic 422 restoring system partition 428 rewritable optical drive SCSI ID 414 rewritable optical drives parts 305 ROM 382 ROM address 91 running automatic configuration 150 429 S safety 424 electrical 366 general 365 information 365 inspection guide 368 SCSI adapters terminators 418 adapters type 1 418 adapters type 2 418 controller system board 180 device configurations 418 device default settings 180 diagnostic tests 181 external devices attached to adapter 417 hard disk drives and devices 409 ID numbers understanding 409 ID jumper settings 412 Index 463 SCSI continued ID rewritable optical drive 414 ID selecting 409 ID setting 411 ID switch settings 411 internal devices attached to adapter 417 missing device 24 SCSI and non SCSI devices 25 SCSI ID using ID to isolate failures 181 system information 409 terminator function 414 terminator requirements 418 terminators on system boards 419 SCSI adapter terminators parts 308 security 375 security option rear panel 375 selectable drive startup function 420 selecting SCSI ID 409 selecting network configuration parameters 87 selection console 431 self test display 110 serial port 403 server 85 s
76. sng Ly JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 334 5 x x 12 026 657 926 9012 WIIG prepueis 891 0 NZE 8 x x 902 026 GELEDEL 9607 PJEPUEIS 22 suoz NZE S x x S02 026 9825954 9602 ININIS PJEPUEIS utg zZ 1 507 aWee Sjepoui 8912 pue L Sd 10 x x 979 026 975 026 ny uld 22 ININIS ZE X WE Aiowayy Aiued uoN 5007 ANTE 012 926 QELEDEL ININIS Wal Utd zZ 993 5402 EWE 9252926 21081906 2798 utd 891 ININIG ZZ Wr joue 003 5191 EWNZE 5791906 7751906 5 8912 pue PHILS L Sd 10 uld 22 NINIS ZE X Aiued uoN 5007 aWNgL 706 966 0965909 WIS 5 uid z7 5002 8 4191 6022926 0016596 NINIS Wal Uld zZ 993 404 9 91 2122906 7615984 prepueis 891 502 9 4191 sjepou 2798 Odlamod S x 729 006 929 026 6292 utd 891 AG E ZZ X Wa 903 409 ENGL saea sng 1v JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 335 Hardware Maintenance Service 7090579 9298406
77. sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 346 1680958 Sn G eidepy ISOS 1v eigeo 2921618 LM uondo oi uondo S Sn uondo oi uondo 289v4 ISOS I 811618 enug 4 1 9921 0598974 100 0595 991 m Tx 2120914 jquiassy Aes uonisod 89 s m D 9120914 sseJppv SIG PIEH ISOS 9901 070591 SAU YSIG SPIM ISE4H 1505 991 quassy uonisog S x 5726904 2092 89 Aiquessy PIMASL ISOS 891 S x x 26485202 82470426 8961 2 ISOS 991 4 ul x x 1198904 6269528 6861 ACI 9 1822 X X evvcoOve 2269028 6 9 UQ YSIQ 2 1595 IS 4 ENGTL 4 x x 2669928 L6PE SMUG YSIG 2 1505 1984 EWNOYS g X X 1678904 9070426 2961 9 UQ ISIG ISOS ANOS x X 9878904 8019978 9261 SIG 8 1426 saea ainpayyoy sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN paepueis uondo nu
78. 000162XX Be sure all devices are powered on Check Enable Disable settings Configuration changed If so run Automatic Configuration Any Device 2 Battery 00016300 Date and time error 1 Set Date and time 00016000 00016400 00016500 00016700 00016900 If setting configuration date and time does not solve the problem see Devices List on page 23 1 Set Configuration Features 2 System Board 000166XX 1 Run Advanced Reseat all adapters Diagnostics 000168XX 1 Run Advanced Real time clock error This is not always a hardware failure Also see Real Time Clock Problems on page 150 Diagnostics 000169XX Processor configuration error Run Automatic Configuration then verify that the processor configuration information is correct before replacing FRUs Processor Board 2 System Board 000170XX ASCII console setup conflict error The serial port is disabled 1 From Set Configuration select Change Configuration and enable the port t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 36 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error FRU Action 000171XX 1 Battery 2 Processor Board 90 95 3 System Board 4 Bus Adapter 000172XX 1 System Board 000173XX 1 Set Possibly a weak battery Configuration Features 000174XX 1 Any Device If the c
79. 012 continues 20 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 012 continued DOES THE SYSTEM HAVE A SCSI ADAPTER OR DEVICE INSTALLED OR CONNECTED EXTERNALLY Yes No 013 Go to Step 022 on page 22 014 Go to Step 015 015 IS THE FIRST POST ERROR CODE WITHIN THE RANGE OF 02080000 1901 TO 02470000 1901 Important If your error code is not in the range or is not followed by a 1901 answer No Yes No 016 Go to Step 022 on page 22 017 Start the system programs Note For instructions on starting the system programs see Starting System Program Diagnostics on page 425 Verify the Enable Disable settings are correct If you are not familiar with these settings see SCSI Device Default Settings on page 180 Note If you receive a warning on the screen regarding the Keep Remove settings follow the instructions on the screen before continuing DID YOU HAVE TO CORRECT ANY OF THE ENABLE DISABLE SETTINGS Yes No 018 Go to Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 Before replacing any SCSI devices verify there are no duplicate SCSI ID settings on the same bus 019 Restart the computer power off then on Step 019 continues Hardware Maintenance Service 21 CONTINUED 019 continued DID THE POST ERROR REMAIN Yes No 020 If you suspect another problem or you want to System
80. 11 Hard disk drive connector 12 Diskette drive connector 13 Memory modules packages 1 PH T Boo E Hardware Maintenance Service 189 Model 30 286 System Board Parallel port J3 Serial port J5 Bus adapter connector J6 Pointing device connector J1 Keyboard connector J2 Memory packs J9 Optional memory packs J10 Hard disk drive connector J11 Power supply connector J7 1 Power supply connector J14 11 Display connector J4 12 Password override connector J13 13 80286 Microprocessor connector 14 Clock module connector ZM35 15 Math coprocessor connector ZM1 16 BDiskette drive connector J12 0 OAU b db di idi AB CD amannan boomen 321 BB Bo 190 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 33 System Board Note Some Model 35 and Model 40 computers use this system board Display connector Pointing device connector Keyboard connector Parallel port Serial port Control connector Control Assembly Power supply connector P2 Power supply connector P1 Diskette drive connector 1 80387SX Math coprocessor connector 11 Hard disk drive connector 12 Password override con
81. 2 1 9 0 15 0 2 3 Ground 3 4 3 75 6 25 140 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Models 50 70 1 3 15 2 Power Supply Connector Lead Lead V de Vdc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 1 9 0 15 0 2 3 15 0 15 0 2 15 6 2 6 2 Model 55 PS 2 9553 xBx Power Good Ground 12 Volts 12 Volts Ground Ground Ground Ground 5 Volts 5 Volts 10 5 Volts 11 5 Volts 12 Ground Ground 5 Volts 5 Volts 5 Sense Hardware Maintenance Service 141 Models 60 65 80 Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 9 9 0 15 0 2 3 9 0 15 0 2 1 3 7 6 2 B D 3 7 6 2 Cc A 49 0 15 0 Model 90 Check the voltages with connectors P1 and P2 plugged into the system board ARAA 1 9 Drive P1 P2 Connector Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 1 P1 2 7 P1 4 8 5 25 1 1 8 9 1 11 5 12 6 2 P2 1 2 11 5 12 6 B D 4 8 5 25 11 5 12 6 There are two systems fans one in the power supply and a second fan on the base If the power supply fan does not work replace the power supply If the second fan does not work replace it 142 PS 2 Maintenance Manual PC Server 8640 Note Verify that the voltage se
82. 2 Feature Bezel 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel 5 25 Framing Bezel CD ROM Drive amp II Bezel Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel 3 5 Inch Device Filler Bezel 1 44MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Drive Slide for 64F0162 2 88MB Drive with slide Hard Disk Drive Mounting Tray Diskette Drive Signal Cable Drive Slide for 64F0204 SCSI Signal Cable Hard Disk Drive Power Cable SCSI Internal Cable 8 Bit for 9585 xKx 9585 xNx Multi Drop Power Cable 92F0102 71G6203 71G6204 92F0097 92F0098 96F9100 92F0329 61G3817 61G3841 61G3842 33F8435 33F8441 96F9199 85F0022 92F0406 92F0428 34F0014 92F0167 64F0168 64F4103 33F8459 64F0138 85F0018 64F4149 64F0162 64F0156 64F0204 85F0013 92F0283 64F0156 92F0327 33F8431 61G3593 64F0197 Hardware Maintenance Service 279 Server 9595A Parts 280 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Index System Unit 9595A 1 2 3 NNoos 27 28 Access Cover Rear Bezel 400 Watt Power Supply Power Supply Ground Strap Power Cord Pedestal with plate Tamper Evident Switch Cable Assembly Drive Support Structure Hot Plug Rack 3 bay Hot Plug Rack 1 bay Microswitch Housing for 61G3526 61G3527 Microswitch Assy for 61G3526 61G3527 Microswitch Shaft for 61G3526 61G3527 see DASD Hot Plug Rack Rail Hot Plug Adapter Hot Plug Adapter Terminator 2 88MB Diskette Drive with slide DASD Bezel medium Feature Bezel small Dri
83. 245MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 340MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 600MB CD ROM SCSI Hard Disk Cable Diskette Drive Cable 96F7769 79F3460 65G8863 79F3458 79F7209 85F0097 85F0050 64F4148 92F0132 92F0146 92F0133 73G6067 73G6068 73G6069 92F0159 92F0014 64F4102 85F0041 85F0093 85F0003 79F3450 85F0091 64F4125 56F8866 6128296 56F8854 95F4748 71G6550 95F4749 71G4875 71G6551 92F0406 61G3788 92F0428 92F0084 96F7766 96F7768 Hardware Maintenance Service 259 Models 57 77 M57 M77 9557 9577 Parts 260 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Index System Unit 9557 9577 1 2 our 10 11 12 13 Cover Lock Front Cover Logo R PS 2 77 486 PS 2 77 486DX2 PS 2 M77 486 PS 2 M77 486DX2 PS 2 57 486SLC2 PS 2 M57 486SLC2 Top Cover Assembly without lock Rear Panel Cover Cover Assembly Cable Locking option Rear Panel Cover DV Model Power Supply 197 Watt Frame Assembly R Cover for underside of frame I O Slot Assembly rear of frame see DASD see DASD see DASD Adapter Guide and Tamper Evident Switch Assembly 9557 Adapter Guide 9577 Bus Adapter 9577 with battery Bus Adapter 9557 with battery Battery System Boards no memory 486SLC2 25 50 MHz 9557 486SLC3 33 66 MHz 9557 486SX 33 MHz for non UltiMedia systems only 9577 486SX 33 MHz 9577 486DX2 33 66 MHz for no
84. 33F8459 64F0138 92F0155 71G5001 71G5000 64F4149 64F0162 64F0156 64F0204 64F0156 72X6759 72X6768 15F7993 15F7994 64F4102 85F0041 85F0040 64F4120 92F0283 33F8430 92F0282 33F8436 33F8431 34F0014 Server 9595 PS 2 9585 xKx and PS 2 9585 xNx Parts Hardware Maintenance Service 277 Index System Unit 9595 9585 xKx 9585 xNx 1 23 24 24 24 25 278 Access Cover Access Cover Fan Access Cover Fan Cable Rear Bezel I O Shadowbox Ground Spring with thumbscrews 400 Watt Power Supply 288 Watt Power Supply for 9585 xKx 9585 xNx Power Supply Ground Strap Pedestal with plate Tamper Evident Switch Cable Assembly Drive Support Structure Ground Springs Left Spring Right Spring see DASD see DASD Drive Retainer Tamper Evident Linkage Assembly Front Bezel DASD Bezel Small DASD Bezel Medium Blank Diskette Drive Bezel 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Operator Panel Bezel Operator Panel Bezel for 9585 xKx 9585 xNx Operator Panel Card Assembly Operator Panel Card Assembly for 9585 xKx 9585 xNx see DASD see DASD Base Frame R System Board No Memory System Board 486DX 33 w SCSI No Memory for 9585 xKx System Board 486DX 33 66 w SCSI No Memory for 9585 xNx L2 Cache 128KB for 61G2405 L2 Cache 256KB for 61G2401 SCSI 2 Adapter A SCSI Adapter 16 gt 8 for 9585 xKx 9585 xNx ISO Display Adapter A for 9585
85. 5 Advanced functions To change the way data is written to a drive Also used to save or restore a disk array configuration to or from a diskette Drive information To view information about the system s physical drives Exit To leave the Main Menu Saving Disk Array Configuration to Diskette To back up the array configuration to diskette do the following 1 Insert the RAID Controller Diskette into the primary drive and press Ctrl Alt Del to start the IBM RAID Configuration Program 2 Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu Select Save configuration to diskette 4 Insert a 2MB 3 5 in diskette into drive A and follow the instructions on the screen e The file that contains the configuration is named CONFIG DMC Restoring the Disk Array Configuration To restore the disk array configuration do the following 1 Insert the RAID Controller Diskette into the primary drive and press Ctrl Alt Del to start the IBM RAID Configuration Program 2 Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu 3 Select Restore configuration from diskette then follow the instructions on the screen If the information on the backup diskette is not current the EPROM from the failed controller can be installed on the new controller Hardware Maintenance Reference 399 Recording the Vital Product Data on a New System Board The vital product data serial number etc is stored in the EPROM on the system board On some IBM PS 2 syst
86. 5 12 6 Optional Power Supply Drive Connector Voltages If the voltages are correct and the power supply fan runs the power supply is OK A B C D Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum B D 3 7 6 2 B A 9 0 15 0 If the power supply shuts down or appears to fail at power on you might have one of the following problems Too many devices are set to start instantly See Setting the Motor Start Jumper on page 414 There are too many large capacity devices installed The nominal operating current of the devices installed collectively exceeds the available current of the power supply See the Personal System 2 Installation Planning guide form number G41G 2927 for more information Caution Unplug the power cord and wait two minutes before checking voltages to give the power supply capacitors time to discharge On some models there is an access cover fan to cool the processor If that fan does not work you have one of the following problems Verify the voltage select switch if applicable is set for the correct voltage No power to the fan 12 V 1 4 V dc required at the two fan cable pins on the base Defective J28 cable check cable continuity Defective fan To test the fan use a two wire jumper to connect the fan terminals to the cable pins on the base Defective system board 146 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Server
87. 5 3 volts for the Installed Power module Pentium J41 5 3 volts for Installed Power module ground ground J42 5 3 volts for Installed Power module ground ground Selected Jumper Default Setting Jumper Default Setting J3 Pins 2 3 J4 Pins 1 2 J35 Pins 1 2 Jumper Settings Cache Selection Jumper Configuration Setting J2 Pentium write through cache Installed Pentium write back cache Not installed Default Jumper Settings DACK Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W16 DACK 6 Pins 1 2 DACK 7 Pins 2 3 Hardware Maintenance Service 219 Jumper Settings Keyboard Selection Jumper W17 IRQ Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W6 PS 2 Mouse installed Default Installed PS 2 Mouse not installed Not installed Jumper Settings Clock Selection Jumper Configuration Setting J5 66MHz clock speed Default Installed 50MHz clock speed Not installed Jumper Settings Pentium Clock Selection Jumper Configuration Setting J6 Oscillator for U15 Default Pins 1 2 Clock synthesizer Pins 2 3 Jumper Settings BIOS Mode Jumper Configuration Setting W2 BIOS in boot recovery mode Pins 1 2 BIOS in normal mode Default Pins 2 3 Secondary Cache Selection Configuration J3 J4 J35 No secondary Pins 1 2 Pins 1 2 cache Reserved Pins 1 2 Pins 2 3 256KB secondary Pins 2 3 Pins 1 2 Pins 1 2
88. 72X8522 72X8505 6128287 6128294 90X9571 90X9441 56F8895 90X8628 54G0160 95F4728 92F0403 92F0404 71G2683 71G2684 Model 53 9553 Parts 241 Hardware Maintenance Service Index System Unit 9553 xBx 1 Top Cover 27F4172 2 Rear Cover 27F4670 3 Base Frame 71G2671 Rubber Feet 61X8917 4 Power Supply 27F4166 5 Power Switch Link 27F4168 6 Key Lock 27F4169 Parity Memory Module Kits 2MB 70ns 92F0102 4MB 70ns 92F0105 8MB 70ns 64F3606 7 1 44MB Diskette Drive Assembly 71G2673 Diskette Drive Cable 71G2670 Blank Bezel 82G1791 8 120MB Hard Disk Drive 92F0256 8 250MB Hard Disk Drive 61G3754 Hard Disk Drive Data Cable 71G2664 Hard Disk Drive Power Cable 71G2684 Hard Disk Drive LED 71G2668 Hard Disk Drive LED Holder 71G2672 9 Blank Bezel Bottom 71G2669 10 Front Cover w o Logo 71G2665 PS 2 53 Logo 71G2666 PS 2 53LS Logo 71G2667 11 Speaker 27F4672 12 Speaker Guide 27F4673 13 System Board 71G5955 System Board Clip 61X8933 Real Time Clock Module 06H3013 14 Riser Card 27F4666 15 Riser Card Bracket 27F4674 Ethernet Adapter 92F0046 Token Ring Adapter 74F9415 Miscellaneous Parts Kit 27F4171 Nut 2 Cover screw 2 I O panel screw 2 3 5mm captive screw 2 Fingerstock shield 3 Fingerstock base shield 3 Slide 1 Standoff shaft 2 3mm screw 5 Ground power special bracket 1 242 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 55 8555 SX Parts Hardware Maintenance Service 243 Index System Unit 55 SX
89. Assembly Power Switch Speaker Assembly Power Switch Kit Plate Knob Blank Bezel for bays A and B Blank Bezel for bay D bottom Blank Bezel for bays D top and E Keylock Assembly Option Device Guide SCSI Cable Device Power Cable two devices Device Power Cable three devices 5 25 Inch Device Rail Kit Rail Kit for bays A and B Base Ground Strap Base Ground Bracket Miscellaneous Parts Kit see page 301 I O Bracket Kit System to Device Cable 50 to 60 pin Power Cord PS 2 Maintenance Manual 33F8417 33F8419 33F8427 64F4121 92F0051 92F0267 64F0125 64F0139 64F0215 64F0141 6128296 56F8854 95F4748 6128298 56F8851 95F4749 85F0011 85F0012 92F0406 92F0089 92F0428 92F0440 92F0255 81F7930 64F0138 92F0159 85F0055 46G2320 64F4138 34F0041 59F3907 21F8593 21F8595 64F4135 64F4137 64F0131 64F0143 33F8442 33F8437 64F4136 33F8425 33F8433 33F8441 64F0127 34F0014 64F0197 33F8443 64F0152 33F8418 64F0129 33F8435 64F0196 34F0017 6952300 Model 3532 Parts 0 4 Hardware Maintenance Service 291 Index 3532 SCSI Tape Drive 1 10 11 292 Top Cover with Bezel Logo Cover Screw Cover Wrench Base R Base Foot Pad SCSI Tape Drive 3532 only SCSI Tape Drive internal only Drive Screw Power Supply Power Supply Screw Power Supply Cable Toroid Remote Address Switch Cable Remote Address Switch Board Rear Chassis with Lo
90. BSC Adapter not listed above 2 Bus Adapter 21XX 1 SCSI Device 2 16 Bit AT SCSI Fast Adapter 3 Alternate BSC Adapter 4 Bus Adapter t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Memory Problems 8086 Computers on page 6 16 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error FRU Action 2401 2402 1 Display If screen colors change 2401 2402 1 System Board If screen colors are OK 2 Display 2409 1 Display 2410 1 System Board 2 Display 28XX 1 3278 79 Adapter 2 Coaxial Cable 3 Bus Adapter 3015 3040 1 Network Attached 2 LF Translator 3 Cable Problem 4 PC Network Adapter 5 Bus Adapter 30XX 1 PC Network Adapter 2 LF Translator 3 Cable Problem 4 Bus Adapter 3115 3140 1 Network Attached 2 LF Translator 3 Alternate PC Network Adapter 4 Cable Problem 5 Bus Adapter 31XX 1 Alternate PC Network Adapter 2 LF Translator 3 Cable Problem 4 Bus Adapter 36XX 1 GPIB Adapter 2 Bus Adapter 38XX 1 DAC Adapter 2 Bus Adapter 64XX 1 Ethernet Adapter See Network Service Procedures on page 74 74XX 1 Display Adapter 2 Bus Adapter 80XX 1 PCMCIA Adapter 84XX 1 Speech Adapter 2 Speech Control Assembly 3 Bus Adapter 85XX 1 2MB Exp Memory Adapter 2 Bus Adapter t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go
91. Bracket Center Rib 64F0221 Bracket Base Rear 64F4100 4 Bus Adapter 25 00F2101 Bus Adapter Support 00F2118 4 Bus Adapter 25 286 64F0182 4 Bus Adapter 25SX 04G1631 5 System Board 25 96F7390 Memory Module 64KB ZM1 ZM2 00F2120 Memory Module 64KB 00F2121 U16 U22 U34 U35 Memory Module 256KB 61X8906 8087 Math Coprocessor 61X8922 80287 Math Coprocessor 72X8528 5 System Board 25 286 96F7435 Memory Pack 256KB 1497256 Memory Pack 1MB 74X8637 5 System Board 1MB memory 25SX 42G2802 5 System Board 4MB memory 25SX 42G2803 1MB Memory Module Kit 85ns 90X8624 2MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 92F0102 2MB Memory Module Kit 80ns 92F0103 2MB Memory Module Kit 85ns 92F0104 4MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 92F0105 8MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 64F3606 8MB Memory Module Kit 80ns 64F3607 6 Base Frame Assembly 25 00F2104 6 Base Frame Assembly 25 286 25SX 64F0218 7 Tilt Assembly 00F2105 Foot Assembly 00F2114 8 Retainer Base to Cover 00F2134 I O Panel 25 286 64F0219 I O Panel 25SX 10G3698 Bracket Center Rib 64F0221 9 See DASD 10 Diskette Blank Bezel 00F2117 11 see DASD 12 Cover Front Bezel 00F2111 13 Display Assembly with logo 25SX only 92F0692 115 230 V Northern Hemisphere 13 Color Display Assembly 110 220V 8525 00F2053 U S and Canada 13 Color Display Assembly 8525 00F2056 Northern Hemisphere 13 Color Display Assembly 8525 00F2057 Southern Hemisphere 13 Color Display Assembly 8525 28
92. CFFFF D6000 D7FFF DE000 DFFFF When other options such as a memory expansion adapter require addresses for sections of the workstation memory the ROM address for each option must be set so that no two options in the same workstation use the same ROM address Hardware Maintenance Service 87 Shared Random Access Memory RAM Range The network adapter can have either 8KB or 16KB of RAM Any of the following locations can be used for the hexadecimal base RAM address Table 3 RAM Locations for 8KB Window Check C0000 C1 FFF CC000 CDFFF D8000 D9FFF C2000 C3FFF CE000 CFFFF DA000 DBFFF C4000 C5FFF D0000 D1FFF DC000 DDFFF C6000 C7FFF D2000 D3FFF DE000 DFFFF C8000 C9FFF D4000 D5FFF CA000 CBFFF D6000 D7FFF Table 4 RAM Locations for 16KB Window Check C0000 C3FFF CA000 CDFFF D4000 D7FFF C2000 C5FFF CC000 CFFFF D6000 D9FFF C4000 C7FFF CE000 D1FFF D8000 DBFFF C6000 C9FFF D0000 D3FFF DA000 DDFFF C8000 CBFFF D2000 D5FFF DC000 DFFFF Remote Program Load Option This parameter controls the remote IPL capability of the workstation It must be set to Enabled for the workstation to receive remote IPL images Do not set this parameter to Disabled unless a hard disk drive that contains an operating system and a network program is installed in the workstation or you have installed an additional network adapter in the workstation 88 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Network Configuration
93. Diagnostics prompt If the prompt does not to appear continue with this MAP Check for the following responses 1 One or two short beeps 2 Readable instructions or the Main Menu DID YOU RECEIVE THE CORRECT RESPONSES Yes No 002 Step 002 continues Hardware Maintenance Service 19 CONTINUED 002 continued Find the failure symptom in the Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 003 ARE ANY EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE SYSTEM Yes No 004 Go to Step 007 005 DID THE POWER ON GOOD INDICATOR FOR ALL OF THE EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICES COME ON Yes No 006 Check the voltages Go to Related Service Information on page 107 007 DID YOU RECEIVE A POST ERROR CODE Yes No 008 Note You might have an intermittent failure Go to System Error Log on page 25 to see if any errors are logged If no errors are logged or if the error log is not supported go to Step 022 on page 22 009 IS THE FIRST POST ERROR CODE 0106XXXX 0166XXXX OR 0167XXXX Yes No 010 Go to Step 012 on page 21 011 There is a network communication problem Go to Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 and find the error code If you suspect another type of network problem or you just want to test the network adapter go to Network Service Procedures on page 74 012 Step
94. Drive SCSI 212MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 320MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 400MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 2GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 8 bit 50 pin 2GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 16 bit 68 pin EMC Bezel and Spring Shield for 92F0089 Drive Slide Model 90 Drive Power Cable Drive Power Cable Two connector 127MB Rewritable Optical Drive Rewritable Optical Cartridge Drive Mounting Slide for 92F0167 Tray with Bezel for 92F0167 CD ROM I Drive Bezel CD ROM II Drive Bezel Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel B Bay Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel D Bay Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel Filler Large Ground Shield Upper Bay Small Ground Shield Upper Bay Ground Shield Lower Bay PS 2 Maintenance Manual 64F0162 64F0156 64F0204 64F0156 33F8459 64F4104 33F8361 33F8360 64F4149 33F8362 33F8431 34F0014 64F4127 57F3030 6128296 56F8854 95F4748 6128298 56F8851 95F4749 85F0011 85F0012 92F0406 61G3788 92F0428 92F0440 92F0407 92F0407 85F0035 33F8431 34F0014 92F0167 38F8645 85F0022 85F0021 64F4122 92F0081 92F0157 92F0158 64F4149 85F0006 85F0005 85F0034 PC Server 8640 Parts Hardware Maintenance Service 267 Index System Unit PC Server 268 Cover Access Rear Bezel 3 5 Hard Disk Drive Tray s 1 each Base Frame Assembly Bezel Front Power Button with spring Bezel 5 25 Blank Door DASD with L
95. Enter to continue to the Adapter Configuration Menu Follow the instructions to make specific changes 4 Press F10 to install the configuration changes Note If two adapters are installed in the same computer the default setting on one of the adapters must be changed Ensure that no two adapters installed in the same computer share the same settings Duplicate option settings will result in an error Hardware Maintenance Service 91 PS 2 ServerGuard Adapter The ServerGuard Adapter has the following features Feature Description Microprocessor 16 MHz 80C186XL Flash Memory 512KB SRAM 256KB NVRAM 8KB Gate Array Custom control Expansion Connectors PCMCIA Type II two Slot A upper slot reserved for modem Slot B lower slot reserved Main Battery Pack 7 2V de NiCad Backup Battery SV Lithium Other Features Analog to digital Converter External Power Control Box plugs into the ServerGuard Adapter The ServerGuard Adapter includes a PCMCIA Type II Modem which has the following features The modem is dedicated to the ServerGuard Adapter and is not accessible by computer software Feature Description Data Speed 2400 bits per second bps DAA Country specific DAA to telephone jack cable Country specific Other Features Modem to Data Access Arrangement DAA cable The ServerGuard Adapter is supported in the following systems
96. FRU Action 000601 XX 1 Defective Diskette 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 000602XX 1 Defective Diskette Invalid boot record 000604XX 1 Diskette Drive Unsupported drive or cable Drive must be media sense type System Board 3 Diskette Drive Cable 000605XX Diskette drive error 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 000606XX 000607XX 000610XX 000621XX 000622XX 000623XX 000624XX 000630XX 000631XX 000632XX 000633XX 000640XX 000641XX 000642XX 000643XX 000650XX 000651XX 000652XX 000653XX 000654XX 000656XX 000657 XX 000658XX 000659XX 000660XX Generally these are media errors Try a known good diskette If the error appears again replace the drive 1 Diskette 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 000655XX 1 System Board 000662XX Information only Wrong drive type installed 000663XX Information only Wrong media type in the drive 000668XX 1 Diskette Drive 0006XXXX 1 Diskette Drive not listed above 2 System Board 3 Diskette Drive Cable 0007XXXX 1 Math Coprocessor For a 486 processor erase 2 486DX33 Upgrade COPROC DGS from the backup Reference Diskette then restore the system partition from the corrected backup Reference Diskette Re run Advanced 70 80 3 System Board Diagnostics 00100203 1 System Board t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Mai
97. Failed The read write test failed on the diskette drive 1 Diskette Drive 2 System Board 3 Diskette Drive Cable Pass N Drive Not Ready The diskette drive door is open or defective 1 Ensure diskette drive is ready Diskette Drive System Board Diskette Drive Cable PON Pass N Drive X Write Protected or Unformatted 1 Insert a non write protected formatted diskette into the diskette drive the rerun the test 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable Pass N Unknown Media 1 Diskette Drive X 2 Diskette Drive Diskette Drive Test error 3 System Board The File Allocation Table ID 4 Diskette Drive Cable on the diskette is invalid Place Hi density Media in 1 Diskette Drive 2 Diskette Drive The capacity of the diskette 3 System Board installed in the diskette drive 4 Diskette Drive Cable is less then the capacity of the drive Printer Failed 1 Printer Ensure the printer is 2 Printer Cable powered on and ready 3 System Board Printer Fault 1 Printer Ensure the printer is 2 Printer Cable powered on and ready 3 System Board Printer Not Selected 1 Printer Ensure the printer is 2 Printer Cable powered on and ready 3 System Board Program or File 1 Diagnostic Diskette Not Found 2 Diskette Drive Press Any Key The diagnostics cannot find the USER N COM file 3 System Board Program Too Big To Fit In Memory Too many Terminate and
98. Locking and Non Locking Types 1 288 External Cover non locking type Includes Base Tray Internal Cables Phono Jack Top Cover R locking type Bezel Logo Keylock Assembly Keylock Assembly Base R for 85F0027 Label Base Feet Power Supply for 85F0027 Power Supply for 64F0135 Hard Disk Drive Tray with Bezel Tray Shield Enclosure Kit Hard Disk Drive Cable SCSI Remote Address Switch and Cable Remote ID Switch Cable Audio Card Cable Screws Tray with Bezel for 92F0167 External CD ROM without rails Rail Kit for 81F7930 Drive CD ROM Drive Assembly WT Headphones CD ROM Cleaning Kit CD ROM Disc Kit Test Disc Disc Caddy Disc Caddy 127MB Rewritable Optical Drive Hard Disk Drive 60MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 80MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 104MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 120MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 160MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 212MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 320MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 400MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 1GB Hard Disk Drive 9577 SCSI 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 2GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI SCSI 2 Fast Wide Adapter A Upgrade Kit contains Back Cover Plate Assembly with 16 Bit 68 pin connectors and cable Fan Assembly Miscellaneous Parts Kit see page 303 System to Device Cable 60 to 50 pin Device to Device Cable 50 to 50 pin 50 Pin Terminator Power Cord PS 2 Maintenance Manual 64F0135 85F0027 33F8433 85F0072 85F0051 85F0051 64F4108
99. Math coprocessor 23 Diskette connector J12 UN H GE n JH 721 4 El e Jo Hardware Maintenance Service 185 Model 25 System Board Type 2 Parallel port J3 Serial port J5 Pointing device connector J1 Keyboard connector J2 Earphone connector Keylock connector J10 Bus adapter connector J6 Hard disk drive connector J11 Fan connector J8 1 Power connector J7 11 Display connector J4 12 Memory module package 1 13 512KB memory 49 14 Memory module package 2 15 Optional memory module U35 16 Optional memory module U34 17 Optional memory module U22 18 Optional memory module U16 19 Optional memory module ZM2 2 Optional memory module ZM1 21 8086 Microprocessor 22 Math coprocessor 23 Diskette connector J12 o A40 o 186 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 25 286 System Board PH 11 12 13 14 15 16 Parallel port J3 Serial port J5 Bus adapter connector J6 Pointing device conn
100. PRO PC Server 8640 Setup Utility Symptom to FRU Index QAPlus PRO No Beep Symptoms Beep Symptoms EmorGodes ar Ge SG Error Messages Miscellaneous Error Messages Network Service Procedures Data Rate Switch Settings Testing the Token Ring Adapter Token Ring POST Errors Testing the Ethernet Adapter Ethernet POST Errors Selecting Network Configuration Parameters Network Configuration Errors ISA PS ValuePoint 10BASE T 10BASE2 Ethernet Adapters saks GRE Copyright IBM Corp 1994 ISA PS ValuePoint Ethernet Adapter Features Disketle vad kua nt to an Sas ee ced eee ISA PS ValuePoint Ethernet Adapter Configuration OPTIONS ac at eremo Bs VO Address 90999 IRQ Interrupt Levels ROM Address Changing PS ValuePoint ISA Adapter Configuration PS 2 ServerGuard Adapter Gabling el we el e esie nes External DAA Cabling DAA Cable Check External Power Control Box Cabling ServerGuard Adapter Symptom to FRU Index Wireless Network ISA Bus Switch Settings ISA Mode Operations Parameters Wireless LAN Utilities Diskette Placement of Radio Modules E
101. Panel Power Switch Link and Lever Drive Cradle Cover Lock Assembly see DASD Front Bezel no Logo Front Cover Logo R System Board All Models Memory Pack 256KB Memory Pack 1MB System Board Clip Clock Module Bus Adapter Bus Adapter Support Support Bracket Sliding Support Bracket System Board Video Cable 80287 Math Coprocessor Miscellaneous Parts Kit see page 301 Shipping Carton DASD 30 286 1 44MB Diskette Drive 1 2 Ht LED located above diskette slot Blank Drive Bezel Diskette Drive Bezel 1 2 Ht LED located below diskette slot Drive A Cable 1 2 Ht Drive B Cable 1 2 Ht 1 44MB Diskette Drive 1 3 Ht Diskette Drive Bezel 1 3 Ht Drive A Cable 1 3 Ht Drive B Cable 1 3 Ht Diskette Drive Slide 1 3 Ht 20MB Hard Disk Drive 30MB Hard Disk Drive 170MB Hard Disk Drive 245MB Hard Disk Drive 420MB Hard Disk Drive Terminator for 6128279 45MB Hard Disk Drive Hard Disk Drive Bezel Hard Disk Drive Cable PS 2 Maintenance Manual 27F4172 27F4174 27F4167 27F4166 27F4229 27F4168 27F4170 27F4169 27F4173 27F4249 10G4109 1497256 74X8637 61X8933 8509237 27F4164 27F4165 61X8914 61X8926 27F4163 72X8528 27F4171 83X9431 72X8523 72X7534 27F4175 27F4916 34F0001 64F0162 27F4230 27F4912 34F0000 27F4917 6128285 6128279 71G4958 61G3754 71G4930 92F0269 92F0016 27F4177 27F4178 Model 33 9533 Parts Hardware Maintenance Service 231
102. S puuen 6vL1618 WAY 221618 OLSE 1 40 ISOS 31929 E 0556997 08 pue 09 10 ISOS sng Ly JequinN JequinN usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 345 Hardware Maintenance Service 2922099 eoeyelu VIDNDH 0 99 5165999 29 Iepow ELSE adh ASIA vIOINOd 89 1 29 PH gINZcS 18690208 SIG PIEH c ISOS 1984 gWr9E 88478002 22699028 ANE 1878004 1559014 9 UQ ASI ISOS NOYE 6 6 0269928 ASIC PIEH Z ISOS 1524 8022 2922099 VIDNDd 1155999 PH ANE 6955599 ELSE ed eutuoeyN GNYIE 2109406 8 08 6505906 1exoeJg 801498 oi 2012928 Jezeg Z Sd 10 UONEP E SU 53 X 260 928 2602 JOJSJENG sureiuoo Z Sd JOISIENG ose saea
103. Set Features screen of the system programs Main Menu POST and BIOS in ROM Some systems such as Model 50 and 60 have the POST and BIOS code contained in a read only memory ROM module on the system board POST and BIOS in IML Some systems such as Model 90 and 95 use Initial Machine Load IML to store the power on self test POST and Basic Input Output System BIOS code In an IML system some of this code is stored in ROM and is used for preliminary testing during power on but the balance of the POST and BIOS code called the IML image is stored in a protected area of the default hard disk called the System Partition The IML image is loaded onto the default hard disk when the system is manufactured Note On IML systems if there is a power on password set the system always loads the IML image from the System Partition even if the Reference Diskette is in the drive To load IML from the Reference Diskette erase the power on password POST and BIOS in FLASH Some systems such as Server 85 Server 95 and Server 95A have two electronically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM modules referred to as FLASH memory Depending on the model these EEPROMs are either on the processor board or on the system board The EEPROMs contain the POST and BIOS code These systems always load the POST and BIOS code from the FLASH EEPROMS POST and BIOS code does not reside on the System Partition or on the Reference Di
104. To use the utilities stored on the IBM Wireless LAN Utilities diskette you must add four lines to the CONFIG SYS file on the diskette To do so take the following steps 1 Edit the CONFIG SYS file supplied on the IBM Wireless LAN Utilities diskette 2 Copy the four lines of Card and Socket Services DEVICE statements These statements are determined by the type of ThinkPad and are supplied on the ThinkPad utilities diskette For example in the DOS environment for an IBM ThinkPad 720C computer the four lines to copy might be DEVICE C IBMDSS 2 SYS DEVICE C IBMDOSCS SYS DEVICE C DICRMU 2 SYS DEVICE C ICPMDOS SYS Placement of Radio Modules The IBM Wireless LAN adapter consists of an external unit and a controller card or a PCMCIA Credit Card The external unit is called a radio module The radio module contains the antenna It is connected by cable to the controller card or the PCMCIA Credit Card Considering that each base must be located at the center of the cell it controls cells should be arranged in a manner to cover the site the following guidelines for radio module placement ensure reliable operation of the wireless network Place all radio modules So that they are not hidden by metallic objects Far from moving objects such as fans or metallic doors Away from radiation sources that emit in the 2 4GHz frequency band such as microwave ovens In addition place the base radio modules Above the avera
105. VIOWOd paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 suondo 101 5 5 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 360 0010426 VS6 G6 40 SUDZ 903 90491 VS6 pue 06 SI PON 10 x 9600426 ed 802 203 AN8 x x 109 4v9 suog 14 ENG x X 9095399 5002 VEd 9 18 x x 4666406 9010426 08 pue 69 09 10 9700598 104 114 x 9010526 8002 VEd gv 06 slepow 104 1600426 ed suo aInpoW OWEN 093 0866428 96 06 20 408 AN saea 21 JequinN JequinN JequinN lt uondo nua 94njee4 suondo fiouiejy 403 uieis S 361 Hardware Maintenance Service 362 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Hardware Maintenance Reference Safety Information General Safety Electrical Safety Safety Inspection Guide
106. XV4 eled sday y 5 p S X 2604984 75695 Let VIOWNDA SH v L sdopti y v8r0DTL YSI EE 6 0 m aged B zi 8r09c4 2 Keg sng Ly JequinN JequinN usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 313 Hardware Maintenance Service 8 X 9700426 ured pajsim L z x 9820426 ed pajsim jeydepy 1 3SVa0L YSI 1 5 X 280426 23580 YSI 25 gt 6126926 6126926 8 91980 2952801 x 0557560 0557560 0557 zesegor E EX 0226926 0226926 x Buoj wg ejqeo 1 01 S E 1557560 1557560 Leer 1989 um 1 01 X 1601 979 9000426 v 1eidepy L E ig X 2829402 1904528 m Jejdepy 0929 peoueuu3 S X S9 69c6 7 229926 9623 9192926 X 101979 8000378 v 1eidepy ou sy X 1902091 226298 Jejdepy X OvSLXT6 ESZLXS9 104
107. a higher priority than a system I O request In a heavily loaded system with high rate of system I O requests the high priority rebuild can significantly reduce the disk rebuild time at the expense of degraded handling of I O requests When the rebuild priority is set to low the rebuild I O requests can execute only if there is no pending system I O requests In a moderate to heavily loaded system low rebuild priority will increase the disk rebuild time significantly and provide better system performance Note Rebuild priority can be changed without affecting data in the logical drives Parity placement RA Warning Once a parity placement scheme is chosen and data stored it cannot be changed without destroying data Parity placement defines how parity is placed in the disk array with respect to data The following illustration shows both the Left Symmetric LS and Right Asymmetric RA parity placement in a four drive disk array Here AAA BBB and CCC are the data stripe units and PPO is the corresponding parity Similarly DDD EEE and FFF are the data stripe units and PP1 is the corresponding parity Right Asymmetric RA Left Symmetric LS Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk 1 2 3 4 k 2 3 4 PP AAA BBB ccc AAA BBB CCC PP DDD PP1 EEE FFF EEE FFF PP1 DDD GGG HHH PP2 III III PP2 GGG HHH JJJ KKK LLL PP3 PP3 JJJ KKK LLL 174 PS 2 Maintenance Manual In some situations you
108. a startable diskette If one is present the operating system or program is loaded from the diskette If not the system checks the primary hard disk for an operating system If one is present the operating system is loaded from that hard disk drive If not the system displays either the diskette and F1 prompts or the 19990305 error code If the system is started from a diskette the drive containing the diskette becomes drive A regardless of the defined sequence The user can choose the startup order of up to four drives and also customize the startup sequence by changing the order which the system checks the drives By making this change the user decides which four drives are the first drives to be checked and also the order which the system checks them When the startup sequence is changed the drive letters might also be changed The operating system assigns the drive letters when the system starts The assignment of the subsequent drive names will vary with the operating system or the device drivers used Warning If the startup sequence is changed you must be extremely careful when you do write operations such as copying saving or formatting The customer s data or programs can be overwritten if you select the wrong drive 420 PS 2 Maintenance Manual To Change the Startup Sequence To change the startup sequence do the following 1 Start the system programs from the hard disk 2 Select Set features from the Main Menu
109. adapter If after reseating these boards you get an 80XX error code replace the PCMCIA adapter For any other symptom continue with the steps below If you suspect a problem with the PCMCIA adapter do the following 1 2 3 4 5 Power off the computer Remove all option adapters from the four PCMCIA adapter slots If you have a PCMCIA wrap plug insert it into slot one Insert the PS 2 E Type 9533 Advanced Diagnostics diskette into drive A Power on the computer and follow the instructions on the screen If the PCMCIA adapter diagnostic tests find no problem suspect a PC Card option adapter connected to the PCMCIA adapter To test the PC Card do the following 1 2 3 Power off the computer Insert the suspected PC Card into a rear slot in the PCMCIA adapter Insert the appropriate PC Card diagnostics diskette into drive A Power on the computer and follow the instructions on the screen If the PC Card option adapter diagnostic tests find no problem power off the computer and insert the PC Card into a front slot Power on the computer If the PC Card option adapter diagnostic tests still find no problem replace the PCMCIA adapter If a PC Card option adapter fails in a front slot and it did not fail in a rear slot replace the PCMCIA adapter If a PC Card fails in both a front and a rear slot replace the PC Card Note Before you replace a PC Card be sure its application software and any re
110. adapter If the problem still remains replace the system board RS XXXX Field appears If this field appears in reverse video with a code other than ring error was detected The following is a list of possible error codes where can be any number 2 The adapter has detected a soft error condition Restart the workstation 4XX or 8 Replace the Token Ring adapter If the problem remains replace the system board X1xx The Token Ring adapter has been removed from the ring Ensure that the correct adapter address was added to the network software If the above item is correct and the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter If the problem still remains replace the system board One of the error log counters has incremented past 256 Restart the workstation 4 or 6 Ifthe workstation is the only computer connected to the LAN restart the workstation If other workstations are connected to the LAN run the Diagnostic Diskette see Testing the Token Ring Adapter on page 74 and select Ring Diagnostics from the Main Menu If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter If the problem still remains replace the system board All other error codes run the Diagnostic Diskette see Testing the Token Ring Adapter on page 74 and select Ring Diagnostics from the Main Menu If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter If the problem
111. are attached through a series of cables outside the system The first external device attaches to the SCSI adapter port through a 60 pin to 50 pin cable 3 Additional external SCSI devices link together through a 50 pin to 50 pin cable 4 The last device in the chain requires a 50 pin block terminator 5 in the lower connector Internal External Devices Devices SCSI Adapter Hardware Maintenance Reference 417 Terminators on SCSI Adapters Termination for SCSI adapters varies depending on which type of adapter is installed Note Regardless of the SCSI adapter type used the last external device in the chain requires a 50 pin block terminator Type 1 and Type 2 SCSI Adapters The Type 1 SCSI adapter has a connector 1 on one side for a 20 pin terminator Originally only SCSI adapters without pluggable cache used the 20 pin side terminator The newest level SCSI adapters use the 20 pin side terminator whether they have pluggable cache or not Type 1 adapters do not require any other adapter terminator The Type 2 SCSI adapter does not have a terminator on the side Instead a 50 pin internal terminator 2 anda 60 pin external terminator 3 are used SCSI Device Configurations SCSI Adapter termination varies depending on whether the SCSI devices attached are internal external or both Use the information below to determine terminator T RES requirements and locations NES g
112. beeps any type Check display 2 Video Memory if used 3 System Board 4 Adapter Video Memory 5 Bus Adapter 6 ACPA A Adapter 7 Power Supply One or two beeps and a 1 Display Adapter blank or unreadable display any type or a blinking cursor 2 Video Memory if used Check display 3 System Board 4 Adapter Video Memory 5 Display any type 6 Bus Adapter 7 ACPA A Adapter Continuous beep 1 System Board 2 Power Supply Continuous beep and a 1 Display Adapter blank display 2 Video Memory if used Check display 3 System Board One long and three short 1 Display Adapter beeps 2 Video Memory if used Check display 3 System Board Repeating short beeps Check the keyboard for a stuck key System Board 2 ACPA A Adapter t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Maintenance Service 29 Audio Symptoms Symptom Error FRU Action Front microphone and front headphone inoperative and rear microphone rear headphone and computer beeps are working properly 1 Control Panel Assembly 2 Cable system board to control panel assembly Front microphone front headphone and computer beeps inoperative and rear microphone and rear headphone are working properly 1 Control Panel Assembly 2 Cable system board to control panel assembly Distorted or missing audio from contro
113. bit expansion slot Video slot slot 6 Display connector 1 Serial connector 11 Parallel connector 12 Pointing device connector 13 Keyboard connector Q0 N HG B I EB Bo a 9 E e men 208 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Server 85 486 System Board 1 32 bit expansion slots video extensions J9 J11 Internal SCSI connector External SCSI connector Parallel port Serial port Pointing device connector Keyboard connector Memory module connectors Recovery jumper JMP5 al Power supply connector 11 Optional microprocessor socket 12 Diskette drive cable connector 13 Power on password override connector JMP1 14 ndicator Panel connector 15 Battery HU BAWN H Hardware Maintenance Service 209 PS 2 9585 xKx and 9585 xNx System Board 1 0 0 dH UJ 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 f 32 bit expansion slots video extensions J9 J11 Internal SCSI connector External SCSI connector Parallel port Remote power on jumper Serial port Pointing device co
114. cache 512KB secondary Pins 2 3 Pins 2 3 Pins 2 3 cache Selection Setting Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 5 Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 9 Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 10 Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 11 Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 15 Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 14 Pins 1 2 Pins 3 4 Pins 5 6 Pins 7 8 Pins 9 10 Pins 11 12 220 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Reserved Jumpers Jumper Setting W20 Pins 2 3 J5 Installed J6 Pins 1 2 Hardware Maintenance Service 221 Parts Catalog Warning Follow Handling Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Devices on page 369 before handling any electronic parts Model 25 25 286 25SX 8525 Parts Model 30 8530 Parts Model 30 286 8530 Parts Model 33 9533 Parts Model 35 8535 Parts Model 40 8540 Parts Model 50 8550 Parts Model 53 9553 Parts Model 55 8555 SX Parts Model 56 8556 Parts Model 57 8557 Parts Model 60 8560 65 8565 and 80 8580 Parts Model 70 8570 Parts Models 56 76 9556 9576 Parts Models 57 77 M57 M77 9557 9577 Parts Model 90 8590 Parts PC Server 8640 Parts PC Server 500 Type 86XX Parts Server 85 9585 Model 95 XP 486
115. companies 445 trap errors OS 2 131 type 1 processor boards memory 128 type 1 SCSI adapters 418 type 2 processor boards memory 128 type 2 SCSI adapters 418 type 3 processor boards memory 128 type of processor 90 95 126 type size and speed determining memory 126 types of errors detected 433 U u bolt 375 unattended start mode 378 unattended start mode server mode 378 under voltage protection 422 understanding SCSI ID numbers 409 understanding codes 183 undetermined problems 183 uninterruptible power devices 424 unique memory information 90 95 406 updating FLASH 382 updating system programs 426 upgradable POST and BIOS 400 upgrading FLASH 382 upgrading POST and BIOS 400 upgrading the system partition version 426 V version level determining DOS CSD 108 version level determining OS 2 108 version upgrading system partition 426 VGA compatibility mode 401 video 401 video memory available 401 Index 467 viewing error log 25 433 voltage range operating 422 voltages checking keyboard 123 voltages checking power supply 138 VPD codes understanding 183 W wireless LAN adapter parts FRUs 309 workstations servicing LAN 181 X XGA compatibility mode 401 468 PS 2 Maintenance Manual IBM Part Number 83G8990 Printed in U S A S52G 9971 2
116. connector P2 J20 Power supply connector P1 J18 Diskette drive connector J21 Math coprocessor connector U35 Bus adapter connector J13 Cover lock switch connector J23 Memory module connector 1 MEM 1 Memory module connector 2 MEM 2 Memory module connector 3 MEM 3 Ar nar In EE Hardware Maintenance Service 199 Model 60 System Board Fuse Power supply cable connector Diskette drive cable connector Memory module package connectors Battery speaker assembly connector 80287 Math coprocessor connector Expansion slots Extended video adapter slot Hard disk drive adapter slot 1 Display connector 11 Serial connector 12 Parallel connector 13 Pointing device connector 14 Keyboard connector 0 IHU BRUNE E BB g 200 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 65 System Board PH Fuse Power supply connector Real time clock module connector 2KB CMOS RAM extension connector Diskette drive connector Memory module kit connector 1 Memory
117. create or to deletes an existing array This selection also has choices for defining a logical drive and formatting a drive Hardware Maintenance Service 157 Selection Program Response Initialize synchronize array Select this choice after creating an array to Set the drive to a predetermined value For proper operation of RAID levels 1 and 5 Note Any data existing on the drive is overwritten with zeros and the corresponding parity information is initialized to the correct value Initialize more than one logical drive at a time Interrupt the initialization process at any time by pressing Esc Restart the initialization process by pressing Enter End the process by pressing Esc again Synchronize logical drive Recomputes and rewrites the parity data on the drive You can select this choice to recompute parity data for RAID levels 1 and 5 This selection does not alter data on the drive The synchronization process can be done on multiple logical drives Rebuild device Rebuilds logical drives The rebuild operation is supported only for RAID levels 1 and 5 Advanced functions Changes the write policy the way data is written to the drive to saves your configuration information to a diskette restores it from a diskette or changes RAID parameters This choice also allows you to do a low level format Drive information Displays information about th
118. does not come on fan not running and computer is not functional See Undetermined Problems on page 183 before replacing FRUs Power Supply 2 System Board Operating system does not work or the system starts up in BASIC See IML and IPL Errors on page 55 before replacing FRUs 1 Default Hard Disk Drive Real Time Clock loses time This is not always a hardware failure See Real Time Clock Problems on page 150 1 Default Hard Disk Drive Computer cannot be powered off 1 Control Speaker Assembly 2 System Board 3 Power Supply t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 32 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Numeric Error Codes Symptom Error FRU Action 000101XX 1 Run Advanced Interrupt failure Possibly a Diagnostics bad battery or processor 2 486DX33 Upgrade 70 80 000102XX 1 Run Advanced ROM checksum or timer Diagnostics error Possibly a bad 2 486DX33 Upgrade battery or processor 70 80 If the battery was removed while replacing the 80386 processor in a Model 70 with a 486DX33 Processor Upgrade FRU Number 92F0436 remove the 486DX33 processor and install the 80386 processor then install the battery Configure the system and re install the 486DX33 processor without removing the battery 00010300 1 Processor Board Checksum or timer e
119. ejnpoiw v 1eidepy 7 91 Durg uexo 017637 1550356 7 9 2818X 8 S8L LOPE Jejdepy doo 21015 zx 5 i ag 0 80 x JOABOSUBI poJeJju x 999 H80 8 80 8587 VIOWOd 20 peregu S s 6 H80 JOAIGOSUEJ paesu X SS9EH80 ZELEH80 9587 ODIN 10 jeues B 7 6 H80 JOAIGOSUEJ X 7995 80 9EZEH8O 6587 VSI 104 jenas x 9021091 6609828 Jejdepy 9108 saea 21 sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 uoneoiunuiuo2 319 Hardware Maintenance Service 5 x 109 026 208 026 9622 wepow 51822 x 1888492 E 7550356 104 x 1888492 0816X 8 2 492 101 93597918 91980 IR 5597918 zi quiessy 19247018 1015 VON S X a 9567918 1587 Jeuueu vIOWOd Sseooy 10015 1015 OML 5597918 91980 m S 18 5 EA 5 5597918 1015 YSI sng Ly
120. evScoO9v Sag ede wwg gos 629854 100 9 e ug ede WWE 9901 9 7678904 1050426 9 UQ Z ISOS 19 91 ISOS 802 5678904 0770426 PIEH Z ISOS 19 8 ISOS 802 zi E 748412 ede 159 gt E 1800426 9 8 eno 1ojeuiuue L vvezzgL jeuseM E 9867 65 di pio10 E 0461920 SOS weis 3 ue4 po E E iz 1196997 x saea 21 sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 349 Hardware Maintenance Service B a ox 3 vYVEcCC9L ue4 8 469 pio40 2500426 19 8 SANDY 0261920 1 1998 8696997 ue4 195997 0851618 A ddng 10 2291 ue4 INN 7795997 2626499 ue4 z 174920 5155249 quassy 1004 AC e 1276399 E ue4 E x 9298412 e mm 9 5 n gt 4418 901 18400 m S 2698412 eDpuueo Buiuee 5 a S uz 7158974 1994 515529 saea sng 1v JequinN JequinN JequinN VISINDd 1 prepuejs
121. for additional information and instructions If a unique interrupt level was assigned to the adapter restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter 86 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Selecting Network Configuration Parameters The following configuration parameters are available for the network adapter Interrupt Levels The network adapter can use interrupt levels 3 4 10 or 14 Many application programs used with the network adapter require the adapter to be set at a specific interrupt level When choosing the interrupt level for the network adapter you must consider the interrupt levels allowed and required for each option installed in the workstation and by all programs that will be used by the workstation Unless the options and programs support interrupt sharing no two options in the same workstation can use the same interrupt level Adapter I O Range The network adapter can use any of the following locations for the hexadecimal base I O address Table 1 Hexadecimal Base I O Address Locations 00800 0081F 02800 0281F 04800 0481F 01800 0181F 03800 0381 F 05800 0581F Read Only Memory ROM Address Range The network adapter can use any of the following locations for the hexadecimal base ROM address Table 2 Hexadecimal Base ROM Address Locations C8000 C9FFF D0000 D1FFF D8000 D9FFF CA000 CBFFF D2000 D3FFF DA000 DBFFF CC000 CDFFF D4000 D5FFF DC000 DDFFF CE000
122. image get the option diskettes and use Copy an option to recopy the option files onto the System Partition 2 If the IML image is loaded onto the hard disk but the operating system is not loaded either the Insert Diskette icon an 19990305 or a text message appears on the screen QAPIus PRO Diagnostics The following tools are available to help identify and resolve hardware related problems Power on self test POST POST Beep Codes Test programs Error messages Diagnostics Diskette Power On Self Test POST Each time you power on the system it performs a series of tests that check the operation of the system and some options This series of tests is called the power on self test or POST POST does the following Checks some basic system board operations Checks the memory operation Starts the video operation Verifies that the diskette drives are working Verifies that the hard disk drive is working If the POST finishes without detecting any problems a single beep sounds and the first screen of your operating System or application program appears If the POST detects a problem an error message appears on your screen A single problem can cause several error messages to appear When you correct the cause of the first error message the other error messages probably will not appear on the screen the next time you turn on the System 386 5 2 Maintenance Manual POST Beep Codes The Power On Self Test generates a
123. loads the IML image from the Reference Diskette The next time you power on the computer the IML and the POST load from the EEPROM The Server 85 and Server 95 load the IML from the EEPROM but the POST is in the System Partition a power on password is set and the Reference Diskette is in the diskette drive move the password override jumper then power on the computer The system default is bypassed and the system loads the IML image from the Reference Diskette The next time you power on the computer the IML loads from the EEPROM and the POST loads from the System Partition All other IML systems system load the IML and the POST from the System Partition If a power on password is set and the Reference Diskette is in the diskette drive move the password override jumper then power on the computer The system default is bypassed and the system loads the IML image from the Reference Diskette The next time you power on the computer the IML loads from the System Partition Privileged Access Password Note The privileged access password jumper is always JMP2 This is used with other security features to make the system inoperative after a forced entry until the password is typed It also overrides the power on password if installed and restricts access to the system programs You cannot erase or override the privileged access password The user or the technical support person at the 378 PS 2 Maintenance Manual account sho
124. lost but the system will operate at reduced performance until the defective drive is replaced and rebuilt Example 3 If more than one drive fails all data is lost Therefore it is important that you replace and rebuild a defective drive as soon as possible Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications The status of the hard disk drive determines the status of the logical drives in the array in which the hard disk is grouped A single hard disk drive failure indicated by a DDD status in the Bay Array selection list causes logical drives in that array that are assigned levels 1 and 5 to have a Critical status Data remains in logical drives with a Critical status but you must replace the one defective hard disk drive promptly because if two hard disk drives were to fail all of the data in the array would be lost After you install a new hard disk drive the Replace process changes the drive status from DDD to OFL if there is a Critical logical drive After the Rebuild process the hard disk drive status changes from OFL to ONL A single or multiple hard disk drive failure causes logical drives in that array that are assigned level 0 to have an offline status Data in logical drives with an offline status is lost However with a multiple disk drive failure when the defective drives are part of the same array logical drives in that array will have an offline status This means that data is lost in all the logical drives in
125. module kit connector 2 80387SX Math coprocessor socket Speaker assembly connector 16 bit expansion slot Video slot slot 6 Display connector Serial connector Parallel connector Pointing device connector Keyboard connector ss MC 1508 B ET J15 J16 m E H FE Hardware Maintenance Service 201 Models 60 65 and 80 486DX2 and 486DLC2 System Board Upgrade 1 Expansion slots 32 bit 2 Expansion slot 16 bit 3 Expansion slots video extension 4 Expansion slots 32 bit 5 Video connector 6 Serial connector 7 Memory connectors 8 Parallel connector 9 Pointing device connector 1 Keyboard connector 11 Password override jumper J11 12 Power supply connector 13 Internal SCSI connector 14 Diskette drive cable connector 15 Processor connector 16 Speed jumper J9 17 Speaker connector Ea J10 E 3amHz 25 202 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 70 System Board Reduced Size 16 MHz 20 MHz Battery speaker assembly connector Expansion slot 1 16 bit Expansion slot 2 32 bit Expansion slot 3 32 bit 80387 Math coprocessor connector Hard disk and diskette drive bus adapter connector Memory module connector 1 MEM 1 Memory module connector 2 MEM 2 Memory module co
126. not announced in your country Such references or information must not be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products programming or services in your country Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1992 1994 All rights reserved Note to U S Government users Documentation related to Restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp ii PS 2 Maintenance Manual About This Manual This manual contains service and reference information for IBM Personal System 2 desktop and floor standing computers The service section includes procedures for isolating problems to a FRU Symptom to FRU Indexes AT Bus Micro Channel and QAPlus PRO related service procedures and an illustrated parts catalog The reference section includes safety information product descriptions and general information about system functions and the Advanced Diagnostic tests This manual should be used along with the advanced diagnostic tests to troubleshoot problems effectively m Important This manual is intended for trained servicers who are familiar with PS 2 products Before servicing a PS 2 product be sure to review Safety Information on page 365 Trademark of the IBM Cor
127. not set correctly 2 Display Adapter Hardware Maintenance Service 65 Error Code Symptom FRU Action 3XXX Check for proper installation of SCSI terminators 1 Check SCSI terminators for proper installation 2 SCSI Cable 3 SCSI Terminator 4 SCSI Device 5 SCSI Adapter 4XXX 1 SCSI Cable Ensure that each SCSI 2 SCSI Terminator device is properly installed 3 SCSI Device and powered on 4 SCSI Adapter 6XXX 1 SCSI Device GP COM 1 System Board The serial port test detected an error GP FDU 1 Diskette Drive The diskette drive test 2 System Board detected an error 3 Diskette Drive Cable 4 Diskette GP HDU 1 Hard Disk Drive The hard disk drive test 2 Hard Disk Drive Cable detected an error 3 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board GP KBD The keyboard test detected an error Keyboard 2 System Board GP_MBD The system board test System Board 2 Processor detected an error 3 Real Time Clock Assembly GP_MEM The memory test 1 Memory Module Kit detected an error 2 System Board GP_PDV 1 Mouse The mouse test failed 2 System Board GP_PRT 1 Printer The printer test detected an 2 System Board error 3 Printer Cable GP VID 1 Video Adapter The video test detected an 2 System Board error 3 Color Display GRPCDR 1 CD ROM The CD ROM test detected an error Error Messages Error Messag
128. password is set you have full use of all the features except the system programs If you attempt to use the systems programs from the hard disk or System Diskettes the password prompt is displayed The correct privileged access password must be typed before the system programs will be loaded This prevents anyone who does not know the privileged access password from modifying the selectable drive startup sequence changing the configuration information or using any other part of the system programs Under normal conditions when an error or a change in the hardware is found by POST the system programs are loaded automatically after the error code appears Whena privileged access password is set the POST displays the error code and then displays the password prompt The system programs will not be loaded until the correct privileged access password is typed This prevents someone from making unauthorized modifications to the system Hardware Maintenance Reference 379 Power on Features Some 95 server systems have power on features When the jumper JMP4 on the system board is enabled the system can be turned on or off from a remote location or at a specific time System Features The following are features of PS 2 systems Refer to PS 2 System Specifications on page 435 to determine what is supported on the system you are servicing Microprocessors The microprocessor and math coprocessor are either installed on the sys
129. relevant if you assigned RAID level 1 or 5 to the logical drives in your disk array However the RAID controller can rebuild the data you need provided that certain conditions are met See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 for more details If you have a non disk array model an illuminated drive tray knob means the drive is a good one An unilluminated drive tray knob means the drive is defective or no power is being supplied to the drive To remove a drive from bank C D or E do the following steps 1 Find the drive you plan to remove 178 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 2 If you have a disk array model and a drive has failed ensure that you have selected the correct drive for removal by verifying that the light on the tray s knob is blinking 3 Unlock the drive by turning the knob directly above it 90 degrees 4 Disconnect the drive from the connector on the backplane by grasping the handle on the drive tray and pulling the drive out of the server Store the drive in a safe place Note If you have a disk array model you must reconfigure your disk arrays after removing hard disk drives See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 for details Hardware Maintenance Service 179 SCSI Controller on the System Board On some models with SCSI on the system board slot number 0 or 1 designates the logical position for the SCSI controller Diagnostics might instruct you
130. still remains replace the system board Hardware Maintenance Service 77 Problem Action SF XXXX A number greater than 10 indicates that Field appears the file server has been found but is not and XXXX is responding a value 1 Ensure that the file server is available greater than 10 and fully operational 2 Ensure that the address for the Token Ring adapter installed in the workstation has been properly added to the network software If the above items are correct and the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter If the problem still remains replace the system board 78 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Token Ring POST Errors The following is a list of the Token Ring adapter error messages that might appear in the top left corner of the screen during POST In this table X represents a 6 primary adapter or a 7 alternate adapter Message Action 16X80 Invalid testing mode requested Restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter 16X81 The primary adapter was not found at the specified base I O address Ensure that a unique base I O address was assigned to the adapter If a unique base I O address was assigned to the adapter restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter 16X82 The alternate adapter was not found at the specified base I O address Ensure that a unique base address was assi
131. test OK failure 2 System Board 3 Bus Adapter XXXX ROM Error Any Adapter Some or all of the keys on 1 Keyboard the keyboard do not work 2 System Board 3 Keyboard Cable Real Time Clock loses time 1 Bus Adapter This is not always a 2 Clock Module hardware failure See Real Time Clock Problems on page 150 3 System Board t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Memory Problems 8086 Computers on page 6 14 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Numeric Error Codes 164 Check memory t Symptom Error FRU Action 131XX Information only Cassette wrap failure 161 163 165 1 Set Time and Date 2 Bus Adapter 3 Clock Module 4 Battery 5 System Board 162 1 Run Setup Run Automatic Configuration 2 Clock Module 3 System Board 162 1 Diskette Drive and unable to run 2 System Board advanced diagnostics 3 Diskette Drive Cable Run Setup Run Automatic Configuration 2 System Board Check memory t 199 1 Any Device 1XX 1 System Board 2XX 1 System Board 302 Is the Keylock Locked Keylock Assembly System Board oN 3XX not listed above 5XX Keyboard System Board Keyboard Cable QD System Board Display Adapter 602 System Board Diskette Drive Diskette Drive Cab
132. that array regardless of which RAID level is assigned Replacing a Faulty Drive Note The hard disk drive indicator light will blink when the drive has failed and needs to be replaced DDD state only To replace a faulty drive 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 If the drive failed while the system was powered down a screen appears the next time the system is powered on showing you which drive is defective 2 If the drive is not damaged for example it is not inserted correctly a Power off the system Hardware Maintenance Service 167 3 If the a b 168 b d Correct the problem Remove the diskette or ServerGuide CD from the drive Restart the system drive is defective Press Y Yes to reconfigure the system Press Ctrl Alt Del when instructed to restart the system The Main Menu appears Select Rebuild device At this point the drive status shows DDD Warning Removing the wrong hard disk drive can cause loss of all data in the array Replace the defective drive Refer to Removing a Drive from Bank C D or E on page 178 After you have replaced the drive press Enter The system will reconfigure to include the drive and the drive s status will change to OFL Allow the system to complete the configuration the screen displays a completion message then select Rebuild drive
133. the Token Ring adapter If the problem remains replace the system board If the above items are correct restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter If the problem still remains replace the system board CE 0085 Field appears This field indicates that a data rate configuration error was found during power on self test To correct this error go to Data Rate Switch Settings on page 74 to match the data rate of the LAN segment Refer to Selecting Network Configuration Parameters on page 87 if you need additional information about the configuration parameters If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter If the problem still remains replace the system board Hardware Maintenance Service 75 Problem Action ET 00 00 02 Field stops incrementing If the elapsed time indicator stops incrementing check that 1 All cables and cords are properly attached to the workstation 2 The file server is operational 3 The correct data rate is set for the Token Ring adapter If the above items are correct restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter If the problem still remains replace the system board OP 0000 XX Field appears flashing or is highlighted If a code other than appears Ifthe code is 110r 2D and the field is flashing 1 Ensure that all cables and cords are properly
134. the block of text pressing this key unmarks the text block 5 Press F5 to complete the block marking started with F4 If you did not previously press to start marking a block of text F5 is ignored F6 F7 Press F6 while the cursor is within the active block to move an active marked block of text Move the cursor to the new location where the active block is to be moved then press F6 again If there is no active block of text F6 is ignored To copy an active marked block of text to a new location move the cursor to the new location and then press F7 If there is no active block of text F7 is ignored F8 To delete an active marked block of text move the cursor within the active block and press F8 If there is no active block of text F8 is ignored F10 Press F10 to save all changes and exit the file Hardware Maintenance Reference 395 Notes 1 Always make a backup copy on a self starting diskette of the AUTOEXEC BAT and CONFIG SYS files before making any changes 2 The default text editing mode of the File Editor is the insert mode To toggle between overtype and insert modes press Insert QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Control Keys The following is a list of the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Control Keys when used and a description of the diagnostics response Control When Used Diagnostics Response Keys Ctrl A Main Menu Allows you to select test from th
135. the resolution override should be avoided if the display attached to the XGA 2 subsystem is to be changed frequently with displays of varying characteristics The IBM XGA 2 subsystem along with certain IBM displays computers and some software has been certified to meet the International Standards Organizations ISO standard 9241 3 IBM cannot guarantee that all non IBM displays attached to the XGA 2 subsystem on the system board or an XGA 2 Display Adapter A will provide acceptable front of screen characteristics or meet other health and safety standards Serial Port Note If you experience a problem with a non IBM device when attaching it to either the serial port you might need to go to the Change configuration screen of the system programs and set the port DMA direct memory access arbitration level to Disabled The serial ports are fully programmable and support asynchronous communications The D shell connector provides the signals to drive a device The connected device is identified by the system configuration as SERIAL 1 through SERIAL 8 depending on the model Adapters with serial ports can also be configured this way Conflicts occur with multiple communication lines if two or more lines have the same address Select the Set configuration option from the system programs Select View configuration to verify that no lines are addressed the same Note If a conflict occurs an asterisk appears next to the conflictin
136. to Related Service Information on page 107 t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Memory Problems 8086 Computers on page 6 Hardware Maintenance Service Symptom Error FRU Action 86XX 1 Mouse 2 System Board 89XX 1 PC Music Adapter 2 MIDI Adapter Unit 3 Bus Adapter 106X1 1 Set Configuration 2 Ethernet Adapter 10635 1 Power off the computer wait six seconds then power on the computer 2 Ethernet Adapter 10651 10660 1 Check Cables 2 Ethernet Adapter 106XX 1 Ethernet Adapter not listed above see Network Service Procedures on page 74 129XX 1 Processor Board 2 Cache Kit 3 System Board 166XX 167XX 1 Token Ring Adapter See Network Service 2 System Board Procedures on page 74 3 Bus Adapter if used 243XX 1 System Board 027801XX to 027879XX 1 Personal Dictation System Adapter 2 System Board 027880XX to 027889XX 1 External FRU Speaker Microphone I999XXXX 1 Default Hard Disk There is an optional SCSI 2 SCSI Adapter adapter installed 3 SCSI Cable t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Memory Problems 8086 Computers on page 6 18 PS 2 Maintenance Manual General Checkout Micro Channel This general checkout procedure supports the following PS 2 Models 50 55
137. to replace the SCSI adapter in slot 0 or 1 leading you to believe that a SCSI adapter is missing In that situation replace the system board the SCSI controller is built into the board SCSI Device Default Settings You are here with a 000174XX error or you want to check the settings defective devices can also cause incorrect settings The optional settings are intended to let the user share devices usually external between computers without having to reconfigure the system each time the device is moved The settings apply to SCSI Presence Error Reporting devices such as SCSI tape drives and CD ROM drives and on some computers hard disk drives After a device is in the configuration table the default settings are Enable and Keep The only way to remove the device from the configuration table is to manually remove it by changing the settings Running automatic configuration will not remove it from the configuration Enable and Disable Settings If the user plans to leave the device turned off or share the device periodically between different computers that device should be set to Disabled on the computers that will share the device When disabled the drive will remain in the configuration but POST will not report a configuration error when the device is removed For example before the user temporarily removes a SCSI tape drive the setting should be changed to Disabled When the device is reinstalled and the user no longe
138. using the DOS memory manager EMM386 the following line in the CONFIG SYS file excludes the adapter default memory address DEVICE EMM386 EXE X CA CBFF Switch settings for memory options are listed in the following table MEM 0 MEM 1 Memory Setting Hex Off Off MEM C800 On Off default Off On MEM CE00 On On MEM DE00 Address I O address switches are labeled 10 0 and 10 1 The default I O address range is hex 0140 to 014F 10 0 10 1 Address Setting Hex Off Off 10 140 default On Off 10 150 Off On 10 160 On On 10 170 416 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Internal Devices Attached to an Adapter Internal SCSI devices attach to a SCSI adapter through a flat ribbon cable 1 The system supports multiple internal SCSI devices and uses a cable with multiple connectors If there is only one internal SCSI hard disk drive installed it is connected to the last connector on the cable Because that device is the last device in the SCSI chain it is the only internal SCSI device that requires a terminator 2 Note You might see a single in line cable terminator one or more resistor terminators in various sizes that unplug or slide out of the circuit board or a pin jumper on the circuit board All terminators are labeled T RES Leave any extra terminators with the system External Devices Attached to an Adapter External SCSI devices
139. xKx 9585 xNx SVGA NI Display Adapter A MGA Ultima 2 M H Video Graphics Adapter Processor Boards 80486DX2 33 66 MHz Pentium 60 MHz Pentium 66 MHz Pentium 90 MHz Speaker Keylock Assembly Battery Adapter Guide PS 2 Maintenance Manual 61G3533 61G3827 61G3824 61G3823 92F0099 92F0267 92F2637 33F8418 33F8422 61G3518 92F0280 33F6853 61G3528 61G3516 61G3519 61G3515 33F8425 64F4136 33F8437 33F8426 92F0281 61G3517 92F0259 61G3736 61G3822 92F2623 61G2405 61G2401 61G4098 61G4099 92F0160 61G3594 39G3298 71G4877 06H2928 61G2343 52G9362 92F0120 06H3739 33F8444 61G3825 33F8354 33F8440 Index System Unit 9595 9585 xKx 9585 xNx 26 27 28 System Board Memory Module Kits Parity Memory Module Kits 2MB 70ns 4MB High Reliability Parity SIMM 70ns 8MB High Reliability Parity SIMM 70ns ECC Memory Module Kits 4MB 70ns 8MB 70ns 16MB 70ns see DASD Operator Panel Cable connects to system board Operator Panel Cable connects to processor card Cable Cover Option Cable Cover Lock Plug Option Misc Parts Kit Bracket 1 Cable Clamp 1 Jumper 1 Lock Pawl 1 Standoff 1 Plastic Screws 2 Metal Screws 6 Index DASD 19 19 20 27 29 DASD Guide DASD Ground Spring Drive Mounting Slide for 92F0167 540MB 1 3 Ht Hard Disk Drive 1GB 1 3 Ht Hard Disk Drive Drive Power Cable Two connector 3 5 Inch 127MB Rewritable Optical Drive
140. you can update the system programs upgrade one version of the system partition with another version or backup restore or modify the system partition Starting System Program Diagnostics Start the system programs as follows On 9556 9557 IML systems power on the computer and watch the cursor on the screen When the cursor moves to the upper right corner press Ctrl Alt Ins to access the system programs on the hard disk Note On some systems two tamper evident switches are installed on the adapter guide located at the lower left front of the system unit frame Both switches must be in the up or on position to supply power to the computer Move the blue slider up until it contacts the metal actuator arms of the two switches The switches click when activated If the switches fail to activate they must be adjusted or replaced To adjust the switches remove the adapter guide with the switches from the system unit Form the actuator arms so the switches activate when the slider is moved up half the distance of its travel Hardware Maintenance Reference 425 On Server 95 Server 95A and some Server 85 systems power on the computer and wait for the F1 prompt Press F1 to start the system programs On all other IML systems power on the computer and wait for the C prompt Press Ctrl Alt Del and watch the cursor on the screen When the cursor moves to the upper right corner press Ctrl Alt Ins to access the sy
141. you have a problem check your IP connection To do so type ping xxxxx at the OS 2 prompt where xxxx is the value of an IP address of your network 2 Bind IBM IEEE 802 2 with the device driver of your wireless adapter 3 Bridged configuration LAPS a Select the IBM Wireless Network adapter for Base with bridge from the adapter list Bind with the IBM Wireless LAN Bridge b Bind the IBM Wireless Network adapter with IBM IEEE 802 2 c Select the IBM Token ring Network Adapter from the adapter list Bind with the IBM Wireless LAN Bridge Supervisor Bridge option enabled 103 Hardware Maintenance Service Warning IBM Wireless LAN bridge can not be installed on the same computer as Routexpander 2 Source Routing Bridge LAPS Installation Problem if you cannot run the IBM Wireless LAN because LAPS aborted during installation do not reboot the computer when prompted by the instructions displayed on your screen Go to the OS 2 Install directory and erase the file IBMLANLK LST then restart your installation Problem Resolution Worksheet Before calling your service representative do the following 1 Make a copy of the problem resolution worksheet 2 Collect and fill in the information listed in the problem resolution worksheet 3 Collect the part numbers In the section following the worksheet there is an explanation of how to obtain the data requested You should answer the following que
142. 0 Route to ISA IRQ10 Pin 11 Route to ISA IRQ11 Pin 12 Route to ISA IRQ12 Pin 13 Route to ISA IRQ14 Pin 14 Route to ISA IRQ15 Jumper Settings Cache Selections Jumper Configuration Setting w1 Secondary cache in write through Pins 1 2 mode Pins 2 3 Secondary cache in write back mode Default W4 Internal cache in write through Not installed mode Default Installed Internal cache in write back mode W5 128KB of secondary cache Not installed 256KB of secondary cache Installed Default 216 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Jumper Configuration Setting W21 Secondary cache not installed Installed Secondary cache installed Not installed Default W22 128KB of secondary cache Installed 256KB of secondary cache Not installed Default W23 128KB of secondary cache Not installed 256KB of secondary cache Installed Default Jumper Settings PCI IDE Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W35 PCI IDE uses ISA IRQ 14 nstalled Default Not Installed PCI IDE does not use ISA IRQ 14 W37 PCI IDE uses PCI INTR A nstalled Default Not Installed PCI IDE does not use PCI INTR_A Default W38 PCI uses ISA IRQ 15 nstalled PCI does not use ISA IRQ 15 Not Installed Default Reserved Jumpers Jumper Setting W8 Installed W19 Installed Hardware Maintenance Service 217 PC Server Pentium System Board 1 oO 0 nA FWD 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 218
143. 0 V ac Southern Hemisphere Tilt Swivel Stand 8516 Color Touch Display 110 120 V ac 220 240 V ac Northern Hemisphere 220 240 V ac Southern Hemisphere 39F8087 39F8088 39F8089 6247808 6247843 6247842 6247883 6247840 39F8068 61X8924 61X8928 61X8927 61X8925 68X3088 72X7870 72X7877 68X3061 75X5945 75X5946 75X5947 75X5907 07G4759 34G6628 07G4762 07G4763 38F3909 44F9759 70F9129 70F9132 Hardware Maintenance Service 297 External Diskette Drives 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive 360KB External 4869 001 360KB External 4869 501 1 2MB External 4869 002 1 2MB External 4869 502 5 25 Inch Drive Adapter 5 25 Inch Drive Adapter A 5 25 Inch External Diskette Drive Cable from system board to adapter Keyboard Mouse Keyboard Cable Mouse Mouse Ball and Pop Off Retainer Mouse Ball and Twist Off Retainer Mouse New Style Mouse Retainer Ring Mouse 3 Button Enhanced Keyboards 101 102 Key Arabic Belgian Canadian French Cyrillic Danish Dutch French German Greek Hebrew Italian Latin American Spanish Norwegian Portuguese Russian Cyrillic Spanish Swedish Finnish Swiss Swiss French Swiss German Turkish U K English U S English E ME A use only U S English Yugoslavian 298 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 72X6759 72X6768 15X7993 15X7994 72X6757 15F7996 27F4211 72X8537 61X8923 33F8461 33F8462 33G5420 33G5417 51G9652 1391490 1391414 1392011 1393866
144. 0 to 8006999 9000000 to 9062999 S N 5505500 to 5605500 8007000 to 8999999 9063000 to 9999999 CF5500AA001 to CF5500ZZ999 23HXATM to 23KGVYA 23KGVYK to 23LFGHC 25 MHz 80386 Base Frame Assembly 25 MHz 80486 Base Frame Assembly Power Supply Fan Assembly See System Boards Battery Speaker Assembly with attached cable Blank Drive Bezel Cover Lock Assembly Cover Lock Kit Drive Bezel Kit Front Bezel Logo R Battery 1MB Memory Module Kit 16 or 20 MHz 2MB Memory Module Kit 16 or 20 MHz 2MB Memory Module Kit 25 MHz 80387 Coprocessor 16 MHz 80387 Coprocessor 20 MHz 80387 Coprocessor 25 MHz 80386 only System Boards 70 Model E61 16 MHz System Board S N 1500000 to 1999999 2500000 to 2511499 4000000 to 4499999 7000000 to 7163999 90X9288 90X9289 90X9351 33F6065 90X9408 33F6064 15F8237 64F0134 90X8626 33F5950 72X8531 72X8512 72X8577 15F7571 15F7510 72X8498 90X8624 92F0104 92F0103 72X6673 90X7393 15F7661 96F7309 Hardware Maintenance Service 255 System Unit 70 continued Model E61 16 MHz System Board S N 2511500 to 2650000 41G3984 7144000 to 7999999 DT5500A0001 to DT5500Z9999 F001000 to F249999 AAAAA to ABLTG BBBBB to BCMVH Model E81 16 MHz System Board System Board 41G3984 Models 061 121 20 MHz System Board S N 500000 to 999999 96F7308 3500000 to 3999999 5500000 to 5505499 8000000 to 8006999 9000000 to 9075499 Models 061 121 20 MHz System Board
145. 000132XX DMA extended registers error Run Advanced Diagnostics 000133XX DMA verify function error Logic failed Run Advanced Diagnostics 000134XX DMA arbitration logic error Run Advanced Diagnostics 00014905 1 System Board 2 Processor Board 00014908 00014909 1 System Board Before replacing any FRUs 2 Tamper Evident see Cover Lock and Switches Tamper Evident Switches 3 Keylock Assembly on page 375 000152XX 1 Run Advanced Real time clock error Diagnostics This is not always a hardware failure Also see Real Time Clock Problems on page 150 000156XX 1 Start the system from Security error The covers the Reference Diskette were removed without using or server image and the key The tamper reconfigure the system evident switch was tripped 2 Security Switch Assembly 3 System Board t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Maintenance Service 35 Symptom Error FRU Action 000160XX 1 Run Advanced System Board ID not Diagnostics recognized Possible system board failure 000161XX 1 Battery CAUTION 2 Processor Board 90 95 The lithium battery IBM part number 33F8354 in your computer presents a fire explosion or severe burn risk Use of another battery could result in ignition or explosion of the battery 3 System Board 4 Bus Adapter
146. 00488 06 08 OZ 104 uondo uoisuedx3 Aowa peoueuu3 210979 2199 21 e 08 OZ 10 1299XZZ 404 14 uoisuedx3 Aowa 1950579 1199 24 08 OZ 10J 1ejdepy uoisuedx3 98208 5750579 9068X19 02 99 09 zesgxe4 101 einpojw Howay 7750679 FESSXTL 59 09 06 10 Jejdepy uoisuedx3 A10ua N 98208 6510579 109839 96 96 06 S8 10 suog 1 aInpoW ANS 8600426 56 G6 06 68 20 0 1 223 AN8 0510579 9095399 VS6 96 06 68 9G 20 SUDZ ENG 2600426 vs6 96 06 G8 20 suo Uy 993 ANY 8210979 S010426 vs6 96 06 98 99 10 5102 gir vs6 96 06 98 1166348 1558426 09 599 09 GE 92 10 408 aINPOW 8090579 5010326 56 S6 06 68 OZ GZ 10 08 NZ 2060579 2010426 56 96 06 68 69 9g 20 SUDZ YA ANZ 7090579 010426 9GS6X06 20 Sugg 1 ANT useug 7995488 2092 428 104 Uy 9 0 saea 21 JequinN JequinN JequinN
147. 087 22F9419 34F0041 85F0009 53F3610 Element Exchange Displays 8503 12 Inch Monochrome Display 110 120 V ac 220 240 V ac Northern Hemisphere 220 240 V ac Southern Hemisphere Tilt Swivel Stand 8504 12 Inch Monochrome Display 110 120 or 220 240 V ac Universal Model 220 240 V ac Northern Hemisphere 220 240 V ac Southern Hemisphere Tilt Swivel Stand 68X3045 68X3046 72X7878 68X3061 44F9807 44F9808 44F9809 44F9820 8506 17 Inch Monochrome Display with Tilt Swivel Stand 110 125 V ac US Canada 110 125 or 200 240 V ac Northern Hemisphere 110 125 or 220 240 V ac Southern Hemisphere 8507 19 Inch Monochrome Display 110 120 or 220 240 V ac Universal Model 110 125 or 200 240 V ac Northern Hemisphere 110 125 or 220 240 V ac Southern Hemisphere 8508 19 Inch Monochrome Display 110 125 V ac US Canada 110 125 or 200 240 V ac Northern Hemisphere 110 125 or 220 240 V ac Southern Hemisphere 8512 14 Inch Color Display 110 120 V ac US Canada 220 240 V ac Northern Hemisphere 220 240 V ac Southern Hemisphere Tilt Swivel Stand 8513 12 Inch Color Display 110 120 V ac 220 240 V ac Northern Hemisphere 220 240 V ac Southern Hemisphere Tilt Swivel Stand 8514 16 Inch Color Display 110 120 V ac 220 240 V ac Northern Hemisphere 220 240 V ac Southern Hemisphere Tilt Swivel Stand 8515 14 Inch Color Display 90 137 V ac 220 240 V ac Northern Hemisphere 220 240 V ac Equatorial 220 24
148. 0BASE2 Ethernet Adapters enable you to connect an Industry Standard Architecture ISA AT bus computer family workstation to an Ethernet local area network LAN The 10BASE T Ethernet Adapter has an unshielded twisted pair connector and the 10BASE2 Ethernet Adapter has a bayonet connector BNC Both adapters have a set of light emitting diode LED indicator lights that represent the following conditions POWER TX green blinks during data transmission LINK RX green blinks when data is being received and indicates the link integrity signal from the twisted pair hub is present COLLISION yellow indicates multiple concurrent transmissions on the network JABBER yellow indicates data transmission is interrupted to inhibit an abnormally long output data stream 10BASE2 Ethernet Adapter only ISA PS ValuePoint Ethernet Adapter Features Diskette The IBM PS ValuePoint ISA Ethernet Adapter Features Diskette contains device drivers and a setup diagnostic program for the Ethernet Adapter ISA PS ValuePoint Ethernet Adapter Configuration Options Ensure that the adapter configuration does not conflict with the system configuration or other adapters The I O address the IRQ interrupt levels and the ROM address can be changed For additional information see I O Address IRQ Interrupt Levels on page 91 and ROM Address on page 91 Address The PS ValuePoint Ethernet Adapter can use any of the following loc
149. 107 checks 0S 2 Trap errors or processor board errors PC Server 8640 Setup PC Server 8640 Setup Utility information Utility on page 60 Possible software and Software Hardware Mismatch hardware mismatch Problems on page 181 problems Not repairable by replacing FRUs Memory Address Resolving Memory Address Conflicts Conflicts on page 408 Replacing the system Processor Board Installation board does not correct 90 95 on page 135 the problem removable processor is installed Hardware Maintenance Service 61 No Beep Symptoms No Beep Symptom FRU Action No beep fan runs and 000215XX is displayed Check memory 1 System Board Memory 2 Processor 3 System Board No beep fan runs and 000258XX is displayed Check memory 1 System Board No beep and the computer 1 Speaker Assembly is otherwise functional 2 Processor 3 System Board No beep and the computer 1 System Board is not functional 2 Power Supply See Undetermined Problems on page 183 No beep fan runs power on LED lights memory may or may not count and blinking cursor continuously loops Processor 2 System Board No beep power on indicator 1 Switch Assembly does not come on and fan 2 Power Supply does not run 3 Processor 4 System Board 5 Any Device or Adapter No beep fan runs 1 System Board power on in
150. 108 CSD DOS Version Level Check 108 CSD OS 2 Version Level Check 108 Combined FRUs Diagnostics 108 Display Adapter 8514 A 109 Display Self Test 110 Fax Modem Checkout 112 How to Use a Symptom to FRU Index 2 114 Identifying Adapters 122 Keyboard Voltage Check 123 Memory Module Kit Identification 123 Memory Problems 125 Option Microprocessor Jumper 76 77 130 OS 2 Problems during a New Installation 130 OS 2 Trap Errors 131 PCMCIA Diagnostics PS 2 E Model 33 we 133 PCMCIA Adapter Switch Settings 134 PCMCIA PC Card Lock Override 134 Printer Erforss um as beg Sar aa Bde heed 134 Processor Board Installation 90 95 135 Processor Upgrade Models 50 502 60 486SLC2 Switch Settings 136 Processor Upgrade Models 70 80 486DX33 Switch Settings 136 Processor Upgrade Model 70 80 486DX33 FRU Isolation 136 Processor Px Label Cross reference 137 Power Supply Voltage Check 138 Real Time Clock Problems 150 Remote Power on Jumper 95 150 Running Automatic Configuration 150 ServerGuide CDs Type 86XX 151 Hardware Maintenance Service 107 ACPA A Advanced Diagnostic Tests To access the Advanced Diagnostic mode select F2 The diagnostic program consists of the followin
151. 120MB Hard Disk Drive SCS 160MB Hard Disk Drive SCS 320MB Hard Disk Drive SCS 400MB Hard Disk Drive SCS 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCS 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI Index DASD Cables 60 65 80 16 16 17 17 18 19 1 3 Ht Diskette Drive Cable 1 2 Ht Diskette Drive Cable Drive Cable Retainer 1 2 Ht Drive Power Cable single Power Cable dual Hard Disk Drive Ground Wire see Misc Parts Kit System 1 2MB Internal Cable for 15F6912 Signal Cable Drive C except SCSI Signal Cable Drive D except SCSI Control Cable except SCSI SCSI Signal Cable Two Connector SCSI Signal Cable Three Connector SCSI Signal Cable Four Connector 72X8523 72X8507 64F0162 64F0156 72X8541 72X8540 72X8519 90X7392 90X8745 92F0061 6128296 56F8854 6128298 56F8851 85F0011 85F0012 92F0406 92F0428 34F0036 72X8543 72X8573 72X8521 34F0034 15F6914 72X8545 72X8567 72X8542 64F0154 34F0035 64F0155 Hardware Maintenance Service 253 Model 70 8570 Parts PS 2 Maintenance Manual 254 Index System Unit 70 1 2 3 ou h ww EN Top Cover Support Structure 16 MHz Base Frame Assemblies E61 S N 1500000 to 1999999 2500000 to 2511499 4000000 to 4499999 7000000 to 7143999 S N 2511500 to 2650000 7144000 to 7999999 DT5500A0001 to 07550049999 23HBLTH to 23HXATL 20 MHz Base Frame Assemblies 061 081 121 161 S N 500000 to 999999 3500000 to 3999999 5500000 to 5505499 800000
152. 1391407 1391511 1391402 1391403 1393285 1391408 1393395 1392015 1391409 1391410 1395622 1391405 1391411 1391412 1395881 1395882 1393286 1391406 1396790 1392090 1393669 Optional Enhanced Keyboards 101 102 Key with PS 2 Style Cable 59G7980 with AT Style Cable 59G7981 with 25mm PS 2 Trackball 59G7982 with 25mm Serial Trackball 59G9757 Keybutton Kits 101 102 Key Keybutton Kits R Belgian 1392033 Keybutton Kits R Canadian French 1392032 Keybutton Kits R Danish 1392026 Keybutton Kits R Dutch 1392034 Keybutton Kits R French 6447047 Keybutton Kits R German 6447048 Keybutton Kits R Italian 6447049 Keybutton Kits R Norwegian 1392028 Keybutton Kits R Portuguese 1392029 Keybutton Kits R Spanish 6447050 Keybutton Kits R Spanish Latin 1392035 Keybutton Kits R Swedish 1392030 Keybutton Kits R Swiss French German 1392031 Keybutton Kits R U K English 6447046 Keybutton Kits U S English 6447045 Japanese Keyboard Type 2 106 Key DBCS Support Japanese Keyboard 94X1110 Keyboard Cable 94X1147 Space Saving Keyboards 84 85 Key Canadian French 1396046 Spanish Latin 1396047 U S English 1393290 Cable Assembly External 1393082 Host Connected Keyboards 122 Key Austrian German 1396902 Belgian 1396903 Canadian French 1397051 Cyrillic 1396916 Danish 1396904 Dutch 1396905 French 1396990 Greek 1396917 Icelandic 1396919 Italian 1396908 Latin American Spanish 1397052 Norwegian 1396909
153. 250MB 104M SCS 212M SCS 104M SCS 212M SCS 212M SCS 104M SCS 104M SCS 212M SCS 212M SCS 400M SCS 212M SCS 212M SCS 400M SCS 212M SCS 540MB SCSI 1G SCSI 540MB SCSI 1G SCSI 104M SCS 212M SCS 400M SCS 400M SCS 400M SCS 1GB SCS 540MB SCSI 1GB SCSI Hardware Maintenance Reference 437 Acronyms Abbreviations and Terms Term Information ACPA A Audio Capture and Playback Adapter ADP Automatic Data Processing Alt Alternate ANSI American National Standards Institute ARTIC A Real Time Interface Coprocessor ASCII American National Standard Code for Interface Interchange AT Advanced Technology as in AT Bus ATA AT Attached as in AT Bus AVC Audio Video Connection BIOS Basic Input Output System Controls System Resources bps Bits Per Second BPS Bytes Per Second CCITT The International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee CCS Common Command Set CCSB Common Complete Status Block CD Compact Disc CD ROM CD Read Only Memory stores data audio CE Customer Engineer or Service Representative CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check CRT Cathode Ray Tube CSD Corrective Service Diskette CGA Color Graphics Adapter See EGA VGA XGA CCSB Configuration Control Sub Board CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check CRT Cathode Ray Tube CSA Canadian Standards Association CSD Corrective Service Diskette DASD Direct Access Storage Device hard disk diskette DMA Direct Memory Access DRAM Dynamic Random Acces
154. 25V 144 PS 2 Maintenance Manual PC Server 500 Type 86XX Power Supplies The Type 86XX computers are shipped with a primary power supply An additional or optional power supply can be added to the computer Connectors are used to transfer the primary power supply voltages and signals from the primary power supply to the optional power supply The following illustrations show how the two power supplies are connected Caution When replacing the primary power supply cover plate rotate the plate 180 This will leave an opening for the primary power supply connector cable that connects to the optional power supply Failure to do so will cause the power supply connector cable to be crimped when the plate is replaced Note Tabs are located on the side of each power supply to secure them together Primary Power Supply Voltages If the voltages are correct and the power supply fan runs the power supply is OK 2 35 a _ Al ODO O00000 OGOOOOO gt S 00Q0006 Div MON 1 4 7 Power Supply Connector Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 5 3 3 7 6 2 5 4 9 0 15 0 5 7 9 0 15 0 B D 3 7 6 2 B A 9 0 15 0 Hardware Maintenance Service 145 Connectors P11 P12 and P13 1 Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 1 11
155. 2X1045 53G0382 71G0756 71G0031 7160030 06 2182 Index Cables PC Server 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Cable Power Good with Green LED Cable IDE Hard Disk Drive Activity with Amber LED Cable SCSI Hard Disk Drive Activity with Amber LED Serial Cable Parallel Cable SCSI Cable Assembly for 4 drives SCSI Cable Assembly for 7 drives IDE Hard Disk Drive Cable for 2 Drives Diskette Drive Signal Cable with power Index DASD PC Server Diskette Drives 1 44MB Diskette Drive Assembly 1 2MB 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Assembly Hard Disk Drives 270MB Hard Disk Drive 364MB Hard Disk Drive 527MB Hard Disk Drive IDE 728MB Hard Disk Drive IDE 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 2GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI Enhanced Internal CD ROM II Drive IDE IDE 06H2633 06H2637 06H3379 06H2165 06H2166 82G3626 06H2181 92F0424 92F0423 93F2361 64F4102 82G5926 82G5927 92F0405 82G5929 92F0406 92F0428 92F0407 92F0084 Hardware Maintenance Service 269 PC Server 500 Type 86XX Parts 270 5 2 Maintenance Manual Index System Unit Type 86XX 1 2 3 COON UU AL Base Frame LED Information Display Assembly System Board without Memory and Processor I O Spring bracket on system board Pentium 90MHz Processor Card 16MB ECC Memory SIMM I O Panel Die Cast SCS
156. 3 92F0001 96F7507 92F0241 92F0275 92F0000 92F0015 74F3571 Hardware Maintenance Service 237 Index DASD 40 8 8 8 NN ANNAN lt 238 1 44MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive 2 88MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive 2 88MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive with electronic eject Bezel Bay 1 for 92F0132 Bezel Bay 2 for 92F0132 1 2MB 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Rail Kit for 64F 4102 Diskette Drive Cable 40MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 80MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 104MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 170MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 170MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 212MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 245MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 245MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 340MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 420MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 527MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE Hard Disk Drive Cable Hard Disk Drive Cable Dual Connector Hard Disk Drive Cable Tri Connector Hard Disk Drive Mounting Tray PS 2 Maintenance Manual 85F0050 64F4148 92F0132 92F0146 92F0133 64F4102 85F0041 85F0089 64F4132 92F0152 92F0152 95F4728 71G4958 93F0118 61G3754 92F0403 92F0404 71G4930 92F0405 85F0090 10G3972 85F0090 64F0141 Model 50 8550 Parts 239 Hardware Maintenance Service Index System Unit 50 1 NOOR WOND 10 11 12 12 240 Top Cover Fan Assembly Support Structure Power Supply System Board 031 061 System Base 031 061 R System Base 021 R System Board 021 Fuse 3 Amp System Board 512KB Memor
157. 3 42 6162343 486DX2 33 663 PB 4 0 45 46 92F0120 586DX2 66 PE 4 4 N A 44 6162343 4860 2 33 663 4 opx4 N A 47 9220120 586DX2 66 4 1 Also has a 487SX processor FRU 9220100 Also has a 486 processor FRU 92F0147 3 Has built in Level 2 cache 4 Model 9095A Hardware Maintenance Service 127 Memory Type 1 Processor Boards Only interleaved memory configurations are supported The system memory module kits operate in pairs Each pair must be the same memory size speed and type On the Model 90 the pairs are J1 amp J3 J2 amp J4 on each riser card On the Model 95 the pairs are A1 amp B1 A2 amp B2 A3 amp A4 amp B4 on the system board Only parity 70ns 80ns and 85ns kits are supported Minimum operating requirement is one pair of 1MB kits Total system memory capacity is 64MB Memory Type 2 Processor Boards Interleaved and noninterleaved memory configurations are supported If the kits are installed in pairs of the same memory size speed and type the kits will run in interleaved mode Any other configuration is supported but will run in noninterleaved mode On the Model 90 the pairs are J1 amp J3 J2 amp J4 on each riser card On the Model 95 the pairs are A1 amp B1 A2 amp B2 amp B3 A4 amp B4 on the system board Only parity 70ns and 80ns kits are supported Minimum operating requirement is one 2MB kit Total System memory capacity is 6
158. 3265958 7550 26 104 OG 01 89 19 8 01 19 91 1595 0910426 2000498 900498 zi x 11659568 3550 26 104 uous OG oi OS 81480 ISOS 0 uondo ISOS 0910426 10 uous X 916 92 5770426 OG oi 89 8980 uondo 1595 01 APIMW ISEH Z ISOS 0910426 404 X 9162022 1550 26 uid OG oi 89 81980 uondo 1595 01 APIW ISEH Z ISOS 0910426 404 045 89 0 89 x 7165968 1770326 epi WISeJ Z ISOS 01 PJEO Z ISOS 0910426 103 89 oi 89 x 5165965 9250 26 epi WISeJ z ISOS 01 PJEO 21505 0910426 2000498 5900 58 x 1605558 8095919 104 09 0 OS 118 8 SPIMASE4 z ISOS 0910426 2000 68 5900 58 E x 5 8605955 5005919 E 10J 09 0 08 eigeo 18 8 epiWIseJ z ISOS enjoeliuouy sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 357 Hardware Maintenance Service 8170422 P 2900498 104 euJeiu 1oyeuiuue 2500426 5900 1568 40 jeu1eju L L 2710426 eoeds aunu L L 6501579 797858 2900498 104
159. 3511 Parts Model 3532 Parts OBI DASD Hot Swap Storage Expansion Enclosure Parts Common Parts 486 DX DX2 DLC2 SLC SLC2 System Board Upgrade Parts CD ROM Drives Element Exchange Displays External Diskette Drives 2 Keyboard Mouse Miscellaneous Parts Kis Power Cords Rewritable Optical Drives ServerGuard Adapter Parts SCSI Adapter Terminators Tools and Miscellaneous Wireless LAN Adapter ISA Micro Channel Bus Wireless LAN Adapter PCMCIA Type II Options and Adapters Matrix Hardware Maintenance Reference Safety Information General Safety Electrical Safety Safety Inspection Guide Handling Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Devices Grounding Requirements Drive and Diskette Compatibility Matrix Hard Disk Drive Settings ATA Preparing a Hard Disk for Moving Security vard sy AG Ko tee yr PAS UR axe des Cover Lock and Tamper Evident Switches Rear Panel Security Option Passwords lt riss n de EE ED SG Removing a Power On Password Additional Override Jumper Functions Unattended Start Mode Server Mode Override Jumpers on IML Systems Privileged Acce
160. 3x Message rejected 544x Internal controller error 545x Device was unable to reconnect 547x Interface parity error 548x Initiator detected error 549x Illegal command or command out of sequence error Format in progress not error 5F1x Spinup in progress 601x SCSI bus reset occurred 602x SCSI interface fault 610x Selection timeout error device not available 611x Unexpected bus free 612x Mandatory SCSI message rejected 613x Invalid SCSI phase sequence 620x Short length record error 702x Device not ready removable media devices Hardware Maintenance Service 119 QEET Information 704x Device not ready non removable media devices 728x Media changed error would not clear 731x Medium format corrupted format unit interrupted format must be issued again 7F0x Format in progress prior format unit issued being completed 7F1x Spinup in progress Q Codes All error codes with Q 1 are developed using information returned by either an adapter or device The Q value defines the origin of the EE code that is reported Error codes EE with Q 4 or 5 may be reported that are not listed here or can actually have a definition other than that given depending on the device Information 2 Command error field of command complete status block returned by the adapter SCSI Status field of the command complete status block or command error fi
161. 40Ex Device mismatch source data did not match medium data 500x Check condition on device no sense data returned 501x No index or sector 502x Seek incomplete 503x Write fault 504x Drive not ready 505x Drive not selected 506x No track zero found 507x Multiple drives selected 508x Logical unit communication failure 509x Head positioning error track following error 510x CRC or ECC error on ID field 511x Unrecoverable read error 512x No address mark ID field 513x No address mark data field 118 5 2 Maintenance Manual QEET Information 514x Record not found 515x Seek error 516x Data synchronization error 517x Recoverable read without ECC error 518x ECC recovered read error 519x Defect list error 51Ax Parameter overrun 51Bx Synchronous transfer error 51Cx Primary defect list not found 51Dx Compare error 520x Invalid command 521x Illegal logical block address LBA 522x Illegal function for device type 524x Illegal command block field 525x Invalid LUN 526x Illegal field in parameter list 528x Media changed 529x Power on or bus device reset occurred not an error 52Ax Mode select parameters changed not an error 531x Medium format corrupted 532x Defect spare location unavailable 540x Device RAM failure 541x Data path diagnostic failure 542x Power on diagnostic failure 54
162. 43 ISA IDE uses DMA channel 6 Pins 1 2 ISA IDE uses DMA channel 7 Pins 2 3 ISA IDE uses P10 transfer Not installed Default Jumper Settings Keyboard Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W10 PS 2 Mouse installed Default Installed PS 2 Mouse not installed Not installed Jumper Settings Tag Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W24 7 Bit Tag Not installed 8 Bit Tag Installed 9 Bit Tag Default Installed Illegal Not installed W26 7 Bit Tag Installed 8 Bit Tag Installed 9 Bit Tag Default Not Installed Illegal Not installed Hardware Maintenance Service 215 Jumper Settings BIOS Mode Jumper Configuration Setting W6 BIOS in normal mode Default Pins 2 3 BIOS in boot recovery mode Pins 1 2 Jumper Settings DPU Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W17 DPU generate parity Pins 1 2 CPU generate parity Pins 2 3 W18 DPU forces parity error Pins 1 2 DPU does not force parity error Pins 2 3 Default Jumper Settings PCI Ports Jumper Configuration J20 PCI 1 master slave shared with EISA slot J17 J19 PCI 2 master slave J18 PCI 3 master slave Jumper Settings PCI Compliant IRQ Jumper Header Jumper Setting J101 Open Default Pin 2 Route to ISA IRQ1 Pin 3 Route to ISA IRQ3 Pin 4 Route to ISA IRQ4 Pin 5 Route to ISA IRQ5 Pin 6 Route to ISA IRQ6 Pin 7 Route to ISA IRQ7 Pin 8 Route to ISA IRQ8 Pin 9 Route to ISA IRQ9 Pin 1
163. 44 VIOWOd ENO x 9678904 VIOWOd e ug sia PEH ENO x 69L 90p GLLEDOv LEST PIED ALIS POS VIOWOd x 8915907 7115907 9292 BIS POS VIOWOd 9 10 x 1915907 5 15907 9292 ALIS pilos VIOWOd ENO L x 9915907 1115907 7595 BIS POS VIOINOd ANS 5 2121618 epis x x 6121618 e pueH IN saea sng 1v JequinN JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 344 760 958 878904 9012928 926998 yun dnyoeg jeujeju 9 052 SAUG YSIG ACI gWoZe 0878904 09999 11 ASIC PIEH ISOS 8 1021 0570456 ose 719958 gel SAUA PIEH VIOINDd 6270426 VIOWOd siq 9 4901 6617968 WIOWOd YSIG ANGOL 0058904 7681908 SAUG enexsid ANT 92 9 5996395 06 apon 10J A quiessy epis 0966466 22 pue ZG SISPON 404 6996499 zx LISE pue OLSE S6 08 09 SI POWN 104 B s s E 9711618 az onsouBeigq E E 0911618 2928412
164. 4MB Memory Type 3 Processor Boards Only interleaved memory configurations are supported The system memory module kits operate in pairs Each pair must be the same memory size speed and type On the Model 90 the pairs are J1 amp J3 J2 amp J4 on each riser card On the Model 95 the pairs are A1 amp B1 A2 amp B2 amp B3 A4 amp B4 on the system board Parity 70ns 80ns and 85ns or Error Correcting Code ECC 70ns kits are supported but not a combination of both Minimum operating requirement is one pair of 4MB ECC kits or one pair of 1MB parity kits Total system memory capacity is 64MB 128 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Using the Low Level Format Program Warning The advanced diagnostic format program referred to as a low level format is different from the operating system format program The operating system format program will not erase the System Partition the low level format program will It also will erase the system programs and completely clear the hard disk If the hard disk is working make a backup copy of the System Partition and all the files on the hard disk before you use this program If you do not know how to make a backup copy of the System Partition see Backing up the System Partition on page 427 To backup all of the files see the operating system documentation It might take up to two hours to run the low level format program depending on the disk capacity When t
165. 5 20 VGA 5 4 2M 16M Y 80M 8555 041 386SX 16 VGA 3 2 4M 8M N 40M 8555 061 386SX 16 VGA 3 2 2M 8M N 60M 8555 081 386SX 16 VGA 3 2 4M 8M N 80M 8555 LTO 386SX 16 VGA 3 2 4 8 M less 8555 LEO 386SX 16 VGA 3 2 4M 8M N M less 9533 DB7 486SLC2 25 50 XGA2 4 2 8M 16M N 120M 9533 GB7 486SLC2 25 50 XGA2 4 2 8M 16M N 120M 9533 GBX 486SLC2 25 50 XGA2 4 2 8M 16M N M less 9533 1BX 486SLC2 25 50 XGA2 4 2 8M 16M N M less 9533 2BX 486SLC2 25 50 XGA2 4 2 8M 16M N M less Hardware Maintenance Reference 435 PS 2 Micro Channel Non IML Type Processor 8550 021 80286 10 8550 031 80286 10 8550 061 80286 10 8555 031 386SX 16 8556 14X 386SX 20 8556 24X 386SX 20 8556 043 386SX 20 8556 045 386SX 20 8556 055 386SLC 20 8556 059 386SLC 20 8557 045 386SX 20 8557 049 386SX 20 8557 055 386SLC 20 8557 059 386SLC 20 8557 05F 386SLC 20 M57 255 386SLC 20 8560 041 80286 10 8560 071 80286 10 8565 061 386SX 16 8565 121 386SX 16 8565 321 386SX 16 8570 E6 80386 16 8570 061 80386 20 8570 081 80386 20 8570 121 80386 20 8570 161 80386 20 8570 A6 80386 25 8570 A16 80386 25 8570 A8 80386 25 8570 A2 80386 25 8570 B6 80486 25 8570 B21 80486 25 8570 B81 80486 25 8570 B16 80486 25 8580 041 80386 16 8580 071 80386 16 8580 111 80386 20 8580 311 80386 20 S N below 23B3000 8580 081 80386 20 S N above 23B3000 8580 081 80386 20 8580 121 80386 20 S N below 23VN700 8580 161 80386 20 S N above 23VN700 8580 121 80386 20 S N below 9225000
166. 6 64F0181 110 220V Northern Hemisphere 13 Color Display Assembly 8525 286 64F0186 110 220V Southern Hemisphere 224 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Index 13 13 13 Index 9 11 11 System Unit 25 25 286 25SX Monochrome Display Assembly 110 220V U S and Canada Monochrome Display Assembly Northern Hemisphere Monochrome Display Assembly Southern Hemisphere Miscellaneous Parts Kit see page 300 Shipping Material DASD 25 720KB Diskette Drive 1 3 and 1 2 Ht Kit 2 Kit Includes Cable Converter Models 25 and 30 Diskette Drive Bezel Diskette Drive Shipping Insert Diskette Drive Shipping Insert Note Order both inserts Diskette Drive Bezel 1 2 Ht 2 Diskette Drive Cable 1 2 Ht 2 Diskette Drive Shield 1 2 Ht 2 Diskette Drive Bezel 1 3 Ht 3 Diskette Drive Cable 1 3 Ht 3 Diskette Drive Spacer 1 3 Ht 3 20MB Hard Disk Drive 170MB Hard Disk Drive 245MB Hard Disk Drive 420MB Hard Disk Drive Hard Disk Drive Cable for 61X8929 Hard Disk Drive Bezel Keylock and Switch Assembly Continued on next page 00F2052 00F2054 00F2055 00F2113 00F2115 96F7678 60X5599 60X5600 00F2112 33F4949 33F4904 33F4947 33F4949 33F4948 61X8929 71G4958 61G3754 71G4930 78X9089 78X9088 Hardware Maintenance Service 225 Index DASD 25 286 9 11 1 44MB Diskette Drive Diskette Drive Bezel Diskette Drive Cable 20MB Hard Disk Drive 30MB Hard Disk Drive Terminator for 6128279
167. 6920426 1910426 40 0282429 2000498 404 L 1898482 2910426 10 sue jeondo 6168958 28004326 0910426 2000498 900498 1 09 SANDY 118 8 21525 0910426 5 X 8168926 270426 20 89 SANDY 19 91 epiWISe Z ISOS saea sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis uondo nua aunyea4 asva 5 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 358 2892426 2256 9 96 98 10 ZHIN99 EE 710426 1486 9 96 10 2 109 92 NW 1146378 2826428 10J vg 19 8ZE0Sr9 2622 06 02 1 zHINOZ 10582504409 8208 x 6950679 499X24 02 1 10J 2 9 10559501909 8608 9 9v3 c 0918422 gt 89 99 404 zHIN9I 10559904409 uie 5 28208 9550679 8298 21 09 pue 0g 982 92 104 40559901409 28208 2121091 2268 19 0 pue sjapow 104 JOSS8901d00 1808 1570426 08 10 98 9870 26 s 02 IPPON 10J epeib
168. 71 1MB Memory Kit for 33F8416 System Board 20MHz 8580 081 111 121 161 311 321 2MB Memory Kit for 92F0756 System Board 25MHz 8580 A21 A31 A61 4MB Memory Kit for 8520046 Fuse 3A System Board 8560 8580 Math Coprocessors 16 MHz 041 071 20 MHz 081 111 121 161 311 321 25 MHz A21 A31 A61 486DX33 Processor Upgrade Power Supply All Models System Base 8560 R System Base 8565 R System Base 8580 R Label Kit Misc Parts Kit System see page 302 Misc Parts Kit Options see page 302 Misc Parts Kit Memory see page 302 Misc Parts Kit Hardware Kit see page 302 n Shipping Carto PS 2 Maintenance Manual 15F6801 64F0160 72X8548 72X8557 72X8572 34F0031 72X8559 34F0032 72X8538 61X8906 92F0800 92F0104 92F3337 8509237 64F0722 33F8416 72X6670 10G4148 92F0669 85F0046 92F0106 72X8561 72X6673 90X7393 15F7661 92F0437 57F 1600 72X8593 64F0159 64F0158 72X6674 72X8578 72X8579 72X7037 72X8580 72X8591 Index DASD 60 65 80 3 3 10 1 44MB 1 2 Ht Diskette Drive Diskette Drive Slide for 72X8523 1 44MB 1 3 Ht Diskette Drive Diskette Drive Slide for 64F0162 44MB Hard Disk Drive ST506 8560 041 8580 041 only Fixed Disk Adapter ST506 8560 041 8580 041 only 70MB Hard Disk Drive ESDI 115MB Hard Disk Drive ESD 314MB Hard Disk Drive ESD Fixed Disk Adapter ESDI 60MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 80MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI
169. 80MB ATA Drives with Jumpers HB og OO O OO 120MB ATA Drive with Jumpers 40MB ATA Drive with Switches B oa e we b gt l 2 FB m j E F E E gl Hardware Maintenance Reference 371 80MB and 170MB ATA Drives with Tabs 80MB ATA Drive with Switches E gt E F 85 m mmo gt Ron m a 120MB ATA Drive with Jumpers 372 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 170MB 212MB and 245MB ATA Drives with Jumpers ea 1 F 120MB 170MB 245MB 340MB ATA Drives with Tabs p RD B D 120MB 170MB 245MB and 340 ATA Drives with Tabs Hardware Maintenance Reference 373 170MB 212MB 245MB 340MB and 420MB ATA Drives with Tabs 0000 000 maa T PT E 527MB ATA Drive with Jumpers B 00 00 00 00 CO Prep
170. 81 Problem Action ES XXXX Field appears and remains on the screen This field indicates the network status error messages The following is a list of possible error messages 1 The network adapter stopped the transmission because of excessive collisions 2 The network interface controller cannot gain access to the bus 4 The network adapter transmitted data without deferring 8 The data transmitted from the network adapter collided at least once with another workstation s transmission 1 The carrier sense was lost during transmission 2 The multistation access unit MAU failed to transmit a collision signal after transmitting a packet 4 An out of window 51 2 microsecond collision occurred 1 The receive buffer is full 2 The frame size is too large to receive 4 Packets were received with cyclic redundancy check CRC errors 8 The incoming packet did not end on a byte boundary therefore the CRC did not match the last byte 1 First in first out FIFO is not serviced and is causing an overflow during reception 2 A packet was missed because the receive buffers were full These hexadecimal error messages all reflect soft error conditions Under normal circumstances no action is required When several of these errors occur simultaneously they are ORed For example if errors 1 2 4 and 8 occur simultaneously an error code of F appears If the error c
171. 85 PS 2 9585 xKx PS 2 9585 xNx Model 95 and 3511 Some power supplies have a built in test switch and LED on the side of the power supply there is no need to check voltages On those power supplies disconnect the power supply from the system board and remove all cables except the power cord Power on the power supply and push the test button If the LED lights up and the power supply fan runs the power supply is OK On all other power supplies short pin 1 to pin 2 and read the voltages on the other pins If the voltages are correct and the power supply fan runs the power supply is OK 2 3 5 f gt 0900 ABCD amp Q lt p Drive Connector X N 1 4 7 Power Supply Connector Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 5 3 43 7 62 5 4 49 0 15 0 5 7 9 0 15 0 B D 43 7 62 B A 49 0 415 0 If the power supply shuts down or appears to fail at power on you might have one of the following problems Too many devices are set to start instantly See Setting the Motor Start Jumper on page 414 There are too many large capacity devices installed The nominal operating current of the devices installed collectively exceeds the available current of the power supply See the Personal System 2 Installation Planning guide form number G41G 2927 for more information Caution On Model 95 unplug the power cord and wait two minutes before checki
172. 8580 321 80386 20 S N above 9225000 8580 321 80386 20 8580 A21 80386 25 8580 A16 80386 25 8580 A31 80386 25 436 5 2 Maintenance Manual Video S B VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 2 VGA 3 2 VGA 3 2 VGA 3 2 VGA 3 2 VGA 3 2 VGA 3 2 VGA 5 4 VGA 5 4 VGA 5 4 VGA 5 4 VGA 5 4 VGA 5 4 VGA 8 4 VGA 8 4 VGA 8 6 VGA 8 6 VGA 8 6 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 3 3 VGA 8 4 VGA 8 4 VGA 8 4 VGA 8 4 VGA 8 6 VGA 8 6 VGA 8 6 VGA 8 6 VGA 8 6 VGA 8 6 VGA 8 6 VGA 8 6 VGA 8 6 VGA 8 6 Memory 1M 1M 1M 2M 1M 2M 2M 8M 4M 16M 4M 16M 4M 16M 4M 16M 4M 16M 4M 16M 4M 16M 8M 16M 4M 16M 4M 16M 8M 16M 4M 16M 1M 1M 1M 1M 2M 8M 2M 8M 2M 8M 2M 6M 2M 6M 2M 6M 2M 6M 2M 6M 2M 8M 2M 8M 2M 8M 2M 8M 2M 8M 2M 8M 2M 8M 2M 8M 1M 2M 2M 2M 2M 4M 2M 4M 2M 4M 4M 4M 2M 4M 2M 4M 4M 4M 2M 4M 4M 4M 4M 8M 4M 8M 4M 8M SS zZzzzzZzZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZKKKIKKKKKKK lt lt 2222 2 zz z 2222 Hrd Dsk 20M 30M 60M 30M Miless M less 40M SCSI 80M SCSI 80M SCSI 160M SCS 80M SCSI 160M SCS 80M SCSI 160M SCS 400M SCS 80M SCSI 44M 70M 60M SCSI 120M SCS 320M SCS 60M 60M 80M 120M 160M 60M 160M 80M 120M 60M 120M 80M 160M 44M 70M 115M 314M 80M SCSI 80M SCSI 120M SCS 160M SCS 160M SCS 320M SCS 320M SCS 120M SCS 160M SCS 320M SCS PS 2 Micro Channel IML Type Processo
173. 9195 L og x 2199291 126298 cx 0 X m 5005811 uy Alosseooy X 1298XS4 128X94 Jejdepy 1ejuudeDeg 2 X 0190579 1198391 re Jejdepy emai yooeds x 981061 1268 19 yoseds E X evcOSv9 7619828 Jejdepy jenas x 4160699 0419828 22 age 1e1depy jeues 5 JequinN JequinN JequinN 5 usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 suondo snoeuej eosiN 339 Hardware Maintenance Service X 5 2799914 Jejdepy 5 jeuosieg 17999 14 Jejdepy jeuosieg 6017919 INOH 02 980 90 olpny 91272 19 026 Ajuo 1 1 91zzr zx SL96H90 SN jexyeeds 7195 90 Jexyeeds 9195 90 euoudojJolN S80 H90 eyeq oipny 980 H90 pled olpny 91222 X 829 906 Ajuo 1utogenjeA Jejdepy oipny 91222 X X 99420236 99720736 IAIN a B B 6017919 WOH dO 9221968 1 YSI n x x 597 906 1807 L x 797 966 5988969 0807 Jejdepy OI x X 9v 006 VETLOTG 6207 Jeidepy vS
174. 92F0007 92F0009 64F4107 92F0086 92F0085 85F0021 81F7930 34F0041 34F0021 53F3610 59F3562 22F9419 92F0167 6128296 56F8854 95F4748 6128298 56F8851 95F4749 85F0011 85F0012 92F0406 92F0089 92F0428 92F0440 32G3920 92F0008 92F0010 34F0017 34F0018 92F0057 6952300 Model 3511 Parts Hardware Maintenance Service 289 Index 3511 Storage Enclosure 1 2 3 O o D OO O1 i 10 11 12 13 290 Base Assembly Rear Bezel Cover Assembly Rear Cover Plate 335 Watt Power Supply 400 Watt Power Supply Power Switch Cable Load Distribution Card Pedestal Assembly 3 5 Inch Drive Tray 60MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 80MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 104MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 120MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 160MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 212MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 320MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 400MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 9577 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 2GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI EMC Bezel Spring Shield for 92F0089 Internal CD ROM without rails Drive Bezel for 81F7930 Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel SCSI Tape Drive internal only SCSI Tape Drive 3532 only Framing Bezel for 85F0055 Rail Kit for 85F0055 Media Kit Cleaning Blank Tape Cleaning Tape Blank Tape Qty 5 Drive Retainer Front Bezel Power Switch Bezel
175. ASCII terminal be sure the machine mode matches the actual terminal you are installing For example if you are installing a 3151 ASCII Display Station the Machine Mode on the Setup Menu must be set to IBM3151 When the setup values correctly match the terminal type the machine is considered to be in the native machine mode 430 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Set the Communication values on the terminal as follows Line Speed bps 96 Word Length bits 8 Parity No Stop Bit 1 Notes 1 When using the system programs do not install an emulation cartridge unless it will support native machine mode 2 The terminals designed for countries where English is not the native language must support the ISO 8859 1 2 code page Some of the terminals require a cartridge to support this code page Check the documentation supplied with the terminal to see if the terminal requires a cartridge ASCII Terminal Configuration When using an ASCII terminal you must define the setup values so that the terminal can correctly communicate with the system Console Selection The system has a Set Console utility program that lets you tell the system you are using an ASCII terminal Without the Set Console utility program the system will use the default values shown The ASCII terminal values must match these values Complete the following steps to use an ASCII terminal Before you make these selections in the Set Console utility program make sure t
176. Adapter with battery 9576 Battery Bus Adapter Support PS 2 Maintenance Manual 73G6061 73G6064 73G6065 95F5607 96F7773 92F0244 92F0243 39G6407 81G1658 81G1660 65G8615 39G2668 39G5698 39G2669 39G6086 92F0147 92F2582 92F0102 92F0105 64F3606 10G3975 79F7210 87F4833 33F8354 96F7777 Index System Unit 9556 9576 16 Control Assembly Power Switch Cable Speaker Power Switch Button only Audiovation Adapter Floor Stand Miscellaneous Parts Kit Plastic Screw 1 Steel screws 6 I O brackets 3 Rubber Feet 4 Clip 1 Index DASD 9556 9576 10 11 11 11 Diskette Drive Tray 1 44MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive 2 88MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive 2 88MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive with electronic eject Bezel Bay 1 for 92F0132 Bezel Bay 2 for 92F0132 3 5 inch Bezel Bay 1 for 73G6059 5 25 inch Bezel Bay 1 for 73G6059 5 25 inch Bezel Bay 2 for 73G6059 Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel DASD Guides for Drive Bays 1 2MB 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Rail Kit for 64F4102 left right rails screws 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Bay 1 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Bay 2 5 25 Inch Blank Bezel Bay 1 5 25 Inch Blank Bezel Bay 2 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Bay 2 40MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 60MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 80MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 104MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 170MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 212MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI
177. Board POST 2 Any Adapter Continuous beep 1 System Board Repeated short beeps 1 Keyboard stuck key 2 Keyboard Cable 3 System Board t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Memory Problems 8086 Computers on page 6 Miscellaneous Symptoms Symptom Error FRU Action Blank or unreadable display 1 System Board Check display t 2 Power Supply 3 Display Adapter 4 Display Assembly 5 System Board Video Cable Other display problems 1 System Board Check display t 2 Display Adapter 3 Display 4 System Board Video Cable Insert Diskette Icon 1 Diskette Drive appears or system enters 2 System Board BASIC 3 Diskette Cable 4 Network Adapter Bad Diskette Icon 1 Diskette 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Cable Incorrect memory size 1 System Board during POST or Parity Check 1 Check memory t Parity Check 2 1 Adapter Memory Check memory t 2 Memory Adapter 3 Bus Adapter 4 System Board t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Memory Problems 8086 Computers on page 6 Hardware Maintenance Service 13 Symptom Error FRU Action Serial or Parallel port device 1 Device self
178. Cache 90 95 2 Processor Board 3 System Board t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 48 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error FRU Action 01291200 01291300 1 Run Advanced 01291400 012915XX Diagnostics 012916XX 01291800 01291900 01294040 01294041 Possible processor board error 01291700 1 Processor Board If it is a 20 MHz board and 90 95 the processor is a 487SX the jumper must be in positions 1 and 2 487SX is indicated on the processor 01293000 1 Jumpered Incorrectly 90 95 Processor board 2 Processor Board EEPROM jumper is in the wrong position 01294042 1 Processor Board POST BIOS EEPROM error Update diskette is required 01294400 1 Restart the system A hardware default interrupt then run advanced occurred diagnostics 01295050 01295056 1 Restart the system 01295060 01295061 then run advanced 01295070 01295071 diagnostics 01295072 01295073 01295074 01295075 01295076 01295077 01295078 01295079 01295080 01295081 01295082 01295083 01295085 01295086 01295087 01295088 01295090 01295091 01295094 01295095 01295096 01295097 Processor board errors 0129X300 1 Busmaster Adapter Busmaster arbitration error 90 95 If more than one is installed 2 Processor Board remove them one at a time to isolate the failure 01299000 1 Run Automatic VPD error processor Confi
179. Checkout go to Step 022 021 Go to Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 022 Start the system programs Note For instructions on starting the system programs see Starting System Program Diagnostics on page 425 If you are not at the Main Menu follow the instructions on the screen to advance to the Main Menu then press Ctrl A and run system checkout Go to Related Service Information on page 107 for Undetermined Problems computer hangs Incorrect keyboard responses Incorrect printer responses Incorrect display responses jittering rolling shifting changing colors or out of focus Note If a minimum of 896KB of memory is not active the diagnostic tests cannot be loaded IS THE DEVICES LIST CORRECT Yes No 023 Go to Devices List on page 23 If that does not correct the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 183 024 Run the advanced diagnostic tests DID THE TESTS IDENTIFY A FAILURE Note If the tests start but do not complete and you cannot continue replace the device that was being tested Yes No 025 Note If you noticed an error symptom or if you received any POST error codes when the computer was powered on go to 22 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 You might have an intermittent problem Check for damaged ca
180. D or F Yes No 009 Replace memory module ZM1 010 Replace memory module ZM2 011 IS BB AN 01 Yes No 012 IS CCCC FOUR ZEROS Yes No ARE THE LAST TWO Cs IN CCCC ZEROS 00 Yes No 014 Replace Memory Module Package 1 8525 or S2 8530 015 Replace Memory Module Package 2 8525 or S1 8530 016 Step 016 continues Hardware Maintenance Service 7 CONTINUED 016 continued WAS THE SIXTH DIGIT IN AAAAAA 1 3 5 7 9 B C D OR F Yes No 017 Replace Memory Module Package 1 8525 or 52 8530 018 Replace Memory Module Package 2 8525 or S1 8530 019 The adapter memory failed Go to Undetermined Problems on page 183 8 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Memory Problems 80286 to 80486 Computers 001 1 Power off the computer and wait 5 seconds If your model has a diskette drive insert the Advanced Diagnostics Diskette into the diskette drive If not contact the LAN administrator to load the diagnostic program from the LAN 2 Power on the computer 3 Make a note of any POST errors you receive Disregard the 164 memory size errors DID YOU RECEIVE A XXXXXX XXXX 201 POST ERROR Yes No 002 Press F1 to continue Run the memory tests Use the RUN TESTS ONE TIME option DID THE MEMORY TESTS COMPLETE WITHOUT AN ERROR
181. Diagnostics The General Checkout procedures are General Checkout AT Bus on page 3 General Checkout Micro Channel on page 19 General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 59 The Symptom to FRU Indexes are Symptom to FRU Index AT Bus on page 12 Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 Symptom to FRU Index QAPlus PRO on page 61 Important Before running diagnostics run virus checking program If the computer you are servicing has been infected with a PC virus a virus checking program can find the virus before it causes more damage 2 PS 2 Maintenance Manual General Checkout AT Bus This general checkout procedure supports the following PS 2 Models 25 25 SX 25 286 30 30 286 33 35 40 and 55 Before using this checkout procedure be sure to read the information under Introduction on page 2 001 Power off the computer and all external devices Check all cables and power cords Make sure there are no diskettes in the drives Power on all external devices 5 Power on the computer DID YOU RECEIVE A POST ERROR CODE Yes No 002 Go to Step 014 on page 4 PQ EE 003 IS THE ERROR 162 Yes No 004 Go to Step 014 on page 4 005 IS THE DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM LOADED FROM THE LAN Yes No 006 Insert the Advanced Diagnostics Diskette Go to Step 009 007 Load the d
182. Drive SCSI 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 2GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 8 bit 50 pin 2GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 16 bit 68 pin EMC Bezel and Spring Shield for 92F0089 Drive Power Cable Drive Power Cable Two connector 127MB Rewritable Optical Drive Drive Mounting Slide for 92F0167 Tray with Bezel for 92F0167 Objective Lens Cleaner for 92F0167 Prism Lens Cleaner for 92F0167 DASD Bezel DASD Bezel DASD Bezel 2 Feature Bezel 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel 5 25 Framing Bezel CD ROM Drive I amp II Bezel Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel Diskette Drive Blank Bezel 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel 3 5 Inch Device Filler Bezel 1 44MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Drive Slide for 64F0162 2 88MB Drive with slide not supported on all early type 1 systems Drive Slide for 64F0204 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive 360KB External 4869 001 360KB External 4869 501 1 2MB External 4869 002 1 2MB External 4869 502 1 2MB Internal Drive with rails 1 2MB Rail kit for 64F4102 Slide kit for 64F4102 Power Cable 95 for 64F4115 Diskette Drive Signal Cable 85 Diskette Drive Signal Cable 95 SCSI Signal Cable 85 SCSI Signal Cable 95 Hard Disk Drive Power Cable Hard Disk Drive Power Cable supports two devices PS 2 Maintenance Manual 92F0406 61G3788 92F0089 92F0428 92F0440 92F0407 92F0255 33F8431 34F0014 92F0167 85F0022 85F0021 38F8681 38F8682 64F4136 33F8425 33F8425 64F0168 64F4103
183. EA 80G2726 2 IBM Wireless LAN Controller Card 80G2725 2 IBM Wireless LAN Controller Card No Cipher 80G2736 3 0 4 m Cable 80G2737 310 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Options and Adapters Matrix The following matrices provide listings of PS 2 computers and the options and adapters that they support The options and adapters are listed according to function in the following order Communication Communication Networking Systems Communication Realtime Interface Options Display Audio Options Keyboard Keypad Mouse Memory Memory Options for System Board Memory Miscellaneous Options Multimedia Storage Device Adapter Storage Device DASD Processor Options System Board Memory for Memory Options Locate the option or adapter in the left hand column then refer across the table for the information you need Hardware Maintenance Service 311 S X 5870964 9920 40 A quessy Jejdepy vIOWOd 1015 e 1557560 ko E 62689528 EUJO X3 65966928 Jejdepy VIOWOd 1 x 07 6918 9 vc Jeuieixe NYT paesu viOWOd SAAN I E i 296860 puels J AISOSUEI 7 0868978 m d 5 2868978 Jejdepy oN x 2v169 8 2292 NYT paeau
184. Errors If an error occurs during testing of the network adapter record the error message or number then check to see that the network adapter is configured so that no conflicts exist If a conflict exists an asterisk appears next to the parameter on the Change Configuration panel Complete the following steps to check for conflicts 1 2 3 Make the Starter Diskette or Reference Diskette image available to the workstation Power on the workstation and display Wait for the IBM logo screen to appear then press Enter Select Set configuration from the Main Menu of the Starter Diskette or Reference Diskette image Select Change configuration from the next menu Page down to the configuration information for the network adapter Note Conflicts with interrupt levels might not be indicated Ensure that each device has a unique interrupt level assigned Change the parameters if a conflict exists Refer to Selecting Network Configuration Parameters on page 87 if you need additional information about the configuration parameters If you corrected a conflict run the test programs on the Starter Diskette or Reference Diskette image again If the problem remains replace the network adapter If the problem still remains replace the system board and reinstall the original network adapter Hardware Maintenance Service 89 ISA PS ValuePoint 10BASE T 10BASE2 Ethernet Adapters The IBM PS ValuePoint ISA 10BASE T 1
185. Guide CD It will be automatically invoked from the ServerGuide CD if the disk array has never been partitioned and if there is no user data present However updated configuration information must be written to diskette If you have not yet created the IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide St reaming RAID Adapter A Option Diskette RAID controller diskette go to Using the CD ROM Drive and ServerGuide on page 152 To start the RAID configuration program 1 Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette into the primary drive and power on the server If the server is already on press Ctrl Alt Del If you have more than one RAID adapter you will get an adapter selection screen Otherwise the Main Menu appears RAID Program Keys Key F1 Esc Program Response Selects Help from any menu Return to the previous screen or to the previous work area of a screen Up and Down Arrows Highlights the item to be selected Enter Selects the highlighted item Main Menu Selec tions Note Whenever you make changes to the disk array configuration and select Exit the Confirm pop up window will appear You must select Yes to save and activate the changes Selection Program Response Help Provides additional information View configuration Displays the existing disk array configuration Create delete array Selects the drives defines a hot spare drive for an array you want to
186. I RAID Hard Disk Drive Adapter SCSI Fast Wide Hard Disk Drive Adapter Video Adapter Fan Assembly Fan Mounting Support without Fans I O Flex Plate Right Side Door Right Side Door Hinges Pedestal Wheel with Axle 434 Watt Power Supply Card Guide Processor Card Support Card Guide Support Pedestal Slim Line CD ROM Drive 2 88MB Diskette Drive 1GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive 2GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive DASD Hot Swap Tray Assembly Wide DASD Hot Swap Backplane Assembly DASD Hot Swap Cam Spring Shaft and Knob DASD Mounting Plate CD Storage Tray Front Bezel with Shield Keylock with Keys DASD Door IBM Logo R 5 25 Inch Drive Bezel with Spacer Control Panel Bezel Control Panel Card Assembly Battery Keyboard with Cable Miscellaneous Parts Kit C2 Spring 1 each EMI Ground Clips 4 each Hinge Screws 2 each Lock Pawl 1 each Planar Mounting Boss 2 each Screws 4 each Mouse Power Cord Speaker with Bracket 82G3593 06H3766 92F2623 06H3796 06H3739 96F9100 06H3593 06H3059 92F0160 71G0650 06H3407 82G3618 06H3594 82G3594 82G3600 82G3609 06H3596 82G3604 82G3959 82G3603 82G3608 06H2150 82G1888 06H3371 06H3372 06H3956 71G6291 06H5059 82G3602 06H5060 82G3595 82G3606 82G3596 82G3601 82G3599 06H3595 06H3755 33F8354 71G4646 82G3611 96F9258 62X1045 33F8444 Hardware Maintenance Service 271 Cables Type 86XX Index Cables Type 86XX 1 DASD St
187. IBM Personal System 2 S52G 9971 02 Hardware Maintenance Manual October 1994 We Want Your Comments Please see page 440 IBM Personal System 2 S52G 9971 02 Hardware Maintenance Manual October 1994 We Want Your Comments Please see page 440 IBM Note Before using this information and the product it supports be sure to read the general information under Notices on page 445 Third Edition October 1994 The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this publication at any time It is possible that this publication may contain reference to or information about IBM products machines and programs programming or services that are
188. IBMWLWNC NLM IBMWLWCA NLM IBMWLERL NLM or IBMWLPRX NLM and IBMWL LAN Hardware Maintenance Service 105 For all other environments go to the directory where you have installed your software and refer to the following procedures Ina NetWare environment for DOS and Windows workstations type IBMWLV1 and note the information that you require In an OS 2 environment for DOS and Windows workstations type IBMWLV2 and note the information that you require In an OS 2 environment base and OS 2 workstation type SYSLEVEL and note the information that you require 2 Find the level of IBM Wireless LAN Microcode To do so follow these steps 106 a b Insert the IBM Wireless LAN Utilities diskette in drive A Restart your workstation Select Diagnostic Utilities from the main menu When the first set of instruction panels is displayed press Enter When the second set of instruction panels is displayed access Adapter Vital Product and note the Product Change Level PS 2 Maintenance Manual Related Service Information m Important The service procedures are designed to help you isolate problems to a FRU They are written with the assumption that you have received model specific training on all PS 2 computers or that you are familiar with the computers functions terminology and the reference information provided in this manual ACPA A Advanced Diagnostic Tests
189. If you are using the System Diskettes start the 384 Reference Diskette and press Ctrl A from the Main Menu When you select diagnostics you will be prompted when to insert the Diagnostic Diskette the Diagnostic Diskette itself is not bootable PS 2 Maintenance Manual Starting Advanced Diagnostics on FLASH Based Systems 1 Power on the computer the IBM logo screen appears 2 Press F1 when the F1 prompt appears at the bottom of the screen The System Programs main menu appears Follow the instructions on the screen to select your choice of tests Starting Advanced Diagnostics on LAN Workstations 1 Have the LAN administrator make the Reference and Diagnostic programs available to you through the server 2 Press Ctrl A to select the advanced diagnostic mode The advanced diagnostics menu appears Follow the instructions on the screen to select your choice of tests Replacing Hard Disk Drives That Have a System Partition m Important When troubleshooting a failure involving a hard disk drive with a System Partition commonly referred to as the default hard disk be aware of the following On IML systems if a power on password is set the system always attempts to load the IML image POST and BIOS code from the System Partition The only way to load IML from the Reference Diskette is to first erase the power on password For example if the hard disk is dead and a power on password set and then y
190. Index System Unit 33 1 gt Joss 13 232 Top Cover Key Lock Floor Stand PCMCIA Adapter Riser Card Power Supply Power Cord US Base Frame Assembly System Board Coprocessor Socket Diskette Drive Cable Hard Disk Drive Cable Battery 4MB Memory Module Kit 8MB Memory Module Kit Power Switch Speaker Assembly PC Card Socket Assembly Front or Rear Door Blank Drive Bezel Blank Bezel Blank Bezel PCMCIA Logo R Miscellaneous Parts Kit Token Ring Adapter PC Card DASD 5MB Solid State Hardfile 10MB Solid State Hardfile 15MB Solid State Hardfile 40MB Hard Disk Drive PCMCIA 105MB Hard Disk Drive PCMCIA PCMCIA Hard Disk Drive Carrying Case 120MB 2 5 in Hard Disk Drive IDE 170MB 2 5 Hard Disk Drive IDE 340MB 2 5 Hard Disk Drive IDE 1 44MB 3 5 in Diskette Drive w bezel Keyboard amp Mouse Keyboard w Pointer Num Key Pad Num Key Pad Cable Mouse New Style PS 2 Maintenance Manual 39G6572 39G6577 91F1028 40G1055 39G6435 39G6560 62X1045 39G6573 68G3034 10G3975 39G6570 39G6571 33F8354 92F0105 64F3606 39G6576 71G2883 39G6574 39G6578 39G6580 68G2549 39G6579 39G6575 73G2048 48G9899 48G9900 49G0000 92F0430 92F0429 92F0430 54G0135 84G1193 84G1195 49G2198 61G2901 61G2903 1397482 33G5420 Model 35 8535 Parts 233 Hardware Maintenance Service Index System Unit 35 1
191. Minimum operating requirements vary for each computer For example AT Bus computers require 256KB of memory Micro Channel computers require 1MB of memory IML drive in the drive startup sequence IML systems only If the computer is a workstation no drives a default hard disk drive is not required 3 Power on the computer If the problem remains suspect the system board then the processor board in that order Note If the problem goes away when you remove an adapter from the bus adapter and replacing that adapter does not correct the problem suspect the system board processor board then the bus adapter in that order VPD Codes Information On 90 and 95 each processor board has a unique vital product data VPD code stored in the nonvolatile memory on the system board After you change the processor board run Automatic configuration to store the new processor board VPD code in nonvolatile memory Hardware Maintenance Service 183 On 56 57 76 and 77 each system board has a unique vital product data VPD code stored in the nonvolatile memory After you replace the system board run Automatic Configuration then select Set system identification utility from the Reference Diskette System Partition or server image and input the system serial number when prompted Recording the Vital Product Data on a New System Board The vital product data serial number etc is stored in the EPROM on th
192. Note Top Cover Logo Power Supply Power Supply Bracket System Board no memory System Board Memory Module Kits Parity Memory Module Kits 1MB 85ns Type 1 amp 3 Boards only 2MB 85ns Type 1 amp 3 Boards only 2MB 70ns 2MB 80ns 4MB High Reliability Parity SIMM 70ns 4MB 80ns 8MB High Reliability Parity SIMM 70ns 8MB 80ns ECC Memory Module Kits 4MB 70ns Type 3 Boards only 8MB 70ns Type 3 Boards only Base Frame R Keylock Assembly see DASD see DASD Air Baffle for 57F 1597 Air Baffle for all others Adapter Card Guide Assembly Base Fan Power Switch Speaker assembly Memory Riser Card 33F8350 33F8367 92F0088 64F4131 64F3287 90X8624 92F0104 92F0102 92F0103 71G6203 92F3337 71G6204 64F3607 92F0097 92F0098 64F4116 33F8353 92F0134 64G4130 33F8363 64F4128 33F8352 81F8823 Processor Board With cache option connector 80486 25 MHz 80486 33 MHz 80486DX2 33 66 MHz runs internally at 66MHz 256KB Cache 17ns for 64F0201 64F0198 92F0145 80486 50 MHz 256KB Cache 12ns for 92F0048 64F0201 64F0198 92F0145 64F0199 92F0048 92F0050 Processor Board Without cache option connector 80486SX 20 MHz 80487SX 20 MHz 80486SX 25 MHz With Dual Processor Sockets 92F0049 92F0065 92F0079 See 20 and 25 Mhz Processor Boards on page 284 264 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Index System Unit 90 13 13 14 80487SX Micro
193. OWS 2 spieus jezeg 1710379 198 pue Sg SJEPON 104 L X 9058904 2920 SIG BUIPUEIS 10014 2 54 500468 06 1 104 jezeg x 9200498 06 404 7600498 22 pue ZG Op 5 104 jezeg 1710379 44 pue 6 Op SIepo gt 941 496 LZ pue 92 ZS 99 Op GE 5 104 x x S098904 1920 SAUG z Sd ASIA pJeH Z ISOS 1524 8902 pue 890 AWOvE T 21098004 0629019 2920 BINOZ 10 surejuoo ASIA OLSE Z Sd Lvvzov6 eeveove siequinw YSIG x 87935276 S897H90 OGGE YSIG pred einsojou3 5 0158 IPPON 78 002 2678004 1878004 0878901 YSIG x 84920476 0629019 OGGE 10 AUG YSIG einsojou3 05 0158 IPPON saea sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN VIOWOd usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 355 Hardware Maintenance Service 0910426 126598 1198919 10J 89 89 egeo
194. RUs See parts FRUs before replacing 56 FRUs diagnosing combined 108 function SCSI terminator 414 G gain toggle microphone 108 general safety 365 grounding requirements 369 guide safety inspection 368 454 PS 2 Maintenance Manual H handling electrostatic discharge sensitive devices 369 hard disk drive checking 56 head parking 374 jumper settings ATA 371 preparing for moving 374 replacing default hard disk drive 385 SCSI devices 409 switch settings ATA 371 hard disk replacement strategy 1 hardware maintenance reference 363 head parking hard disk 374 help isolate failures using SCSI ID 181 high speed modem diagnostics 112 hot spare drive 398 array disk 398 hot spare drive replacement 398 how to change startup sequence 421 how to use symptom to FRU index 114 I O address 90 I O base address 87 IBM trademarks 445 ID numbers understanding SCSI 409 ID selecting SCSI 409 ID setting SCSI 411 identifying adapters 122 identifying memory module kits 123 IML and IPL errors 55 IML override jumpers 378 information related service 107 initial machine load IML 382 initial machine load errors 55 initial program load errors 55 input loop microphone 108 inspection guide safety 368 install processor board 90 95 135 installation OS 2 problems 130 Index 455 installed devices list AT 11 installed devices list Micro Channel 23 internal devices attached to adapter SCSI 417 interrupt l
195. SCSI 16 Bit 68 Pin Hard Disk Drive ID Switch Settings To set the ID on the 2GB SCSI 16 Bit 68 Pin Hard Disk Drive do the following 1 Position the drive as shown below Oloooo 412 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 2 Refer to the table below to position the hard disk drive jumpers for IDs 15 to 0 Note The ID selected must be supported by the system you are servicing SCSI Setting SCSI Setting ID i4 327 ID 12 3 4 7 Reserved 15 6 14 5 13 4 12 3 11 2 10 1 9 0 8 5 Motor Start Jumper off Optical Head Lens Cleaning Procedure The LED flashes when the drive is reading data During normal operation the LED flashes one to five times per second A speed of less than one per second indicates a contaminated optical head lens producing slow CD ROM drive operation or drive failure To clean the optical head lens 1 Insert the Cleaning Disk into the CD caddy 2 Insert the CD caddy into the drive 3 Allow the drive to run until the activity indicator stops flashing 4 Press and hold the eject button to remove the CD caddy Hardware Maintenance Reference 413 Setting the Motor Start Jumper The jumper in position 5 illustrated above is the motor start jumper If the jumper is installed all hard disk drive motors start instantly at power on If the jumper is removed POST starts the drives sequential
196. SLC 486 SLC Power Supply System Board 40 SX System Board 40 SLC System Board 40 386 SLC System Board 40 486 SLC Real Time Clock Module 1MB Memory Module Kit 2MB Memory Module Kit 4MB Memory Module Kit 8MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 8MB Memory Module Kit 80ns Rear Panel Assembly Rear Panel Assembly 386 SLC 486 SLC Cable Cover 386 SLC 486 SLC Bottom Cover Assembly 5 25 Inch Bay Drive Guides 2 Base Frame Assembly R Front Adapter Support Guide Air Baffle Hinged Cover Air Baffle Base Bus Adapter Support Bracket Bus Adapter Support Bracket 386 SLC 486 SLC Control Panel Assembly 3 5 Inch Blank Bezel Bay 4 Bezel Insert for 85F0092 5 25 Inch Louvered Bezel Bay 3 Bezel Insert for 85F0094 5 25 Inch Blank Bezel Bay 2 Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Bay 2 3 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Bay 2 3 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Bay 1 Retainer Plate Cover Lock Front Cover Logo 40 SX R Front Cover Logo 40 SLC R Front Cover Logo 40 386 SLC R Front Cover Logo 40 486 SLC R Pedestal Miscellaneous Parts Kit see page 303 Shipping Carton 96F7640 85F0088 92F0240 92F0058 41G3948 96F7506 10G3966 10G3976 8509237 90X8624 92F0104 92F3337 64F3606 64F3607 92F0012 92F0240 92F0248 85F0086 92F0014 92F0011 92F0013 85F0084 85F0087 92F0107 10G3969 92F0002 85F0092 85F0095 85F0094 85F0096 85F0091 92F0159 85F0003 85F0091 85F0093 85F0098 92F000
197. Servicing LAN Stations Workstations Software Hardware Mismatch Problems Undetermined Problems VPD Codes Information Recording the Vital Product Data on a New System Board System Board Locations Model 25 System Board Type 1 Model 25 System Board 2 Contents 130 130 131 133 134 134 134 135 135 135 136 136 136 137 138 138 138 139 140 141 141 142 142 143 145 147 148 148 149 150 150 150 151 180 180 180 180 180 181 181 181 181 183 183 184 185 185 186 vii Model 25 286 System Board Model 25 SX System Board Model 30 System Board Model 30 286 System Board Model 33 System Board Model 35 40 System Board Model 50 System Board Type 1 Model 50 System Board 2 Models 50 50Z 486SLC2 System Board Upgrade Model 53 9553 xBx System Board Model 55 System Board Model 55 486SLC2 System Board Upgrade Model 56 57 8556 8557 System Board Model 56 57 9556 9557 System Board Model 60 System Board Model 65 System Board Models 60 65 and 80 486DX2 and 486DLC2 System Board Upgrade Model 70 System Board Reduced Size 16 MHz 20MH2 Model 70 System Board Full Size 16 MHz 20 tis oat ae orks tetany cn eae Model 70 System Board 25 MHz Model 70 486DX33 a
198. Stay Resident programs in memory while loading diagnostics 1 Reboot the system from the Diagnostic Diskette 70 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Error Message Symptom FRU Action QAPlus PRO Cannot Be Re run Because Of Error In Relocating Program Diagnostics failed to relocate the Diagnostics Test programs so the memory space it resides in was not tested Diagnostic Diskette 2 Memory Module 3 System Board RAM Memory Error in Block n Bad bits n An error was detected in RAM Memory Module 2 System Board RAM Test Failed Test Result Summary message Memory Test failed Memory Module 2 System Board Read error on cylinder n 1 Hard Disk Drive Hard disk drive physical 2 Hard Disk Drive format error Adapter if installed 3 System Board Read Errors 1 Diskette Diskette drive read error 2 Diskette Drive 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable Receive Error 1 Serial Port Cable Serial Port loopback test 2 System Board error Refresh Failure The Diagnostics Test detected an error while testing the DMA controller s RAM refresh cycle Memory Module 2 System Board RTC Interrupt Failure The Diagnostics Test cannot detect the Real Time clock interrupt 1 Real Time Clock Assembly 2 System Board Serial Chip Error 1 Serial Port Cable COM Port error general 2 System Board Serial Compare Error 1 Serial Port Cable COM Port
199. Storage Expansion Enclosure parts FRUs 293 458 PS 2 Maintenance Manual operating voltage range 422 operation ASCII terminal 432 operation no load 422 optical drive SCSI ID 414 optical drives rewritable parts 305 optical lens cleaning 413 option microprocessor jumper 76 77 130 options communication 312 options and adapters matrix 311 OS 2 determining version level 108 installation problems 130 trap errors 131 output tone audio 108 over current protection 422 over voltage protection 422 override jumper 376 override jumper functions 378 override jumper 50 60 70 80 377 override jumper 55 SX 65 SX 377 override jumpers IML systems 378 override PCMCIA pc card lock 134 P parallel port 404 parameters selecting network configuration 87 parking head hard disk 374 partition backing up system 427 restoring system 428 system 425 upgrading system version 426 parts CD ROM drives 296 common 295 displays 297 external diskette drive 298 Japanese keyboards 299 keyboards 298 keybutton kits 299 miscellaneous parts kits 300 model 25 25 286 25SX 8525 223 Index 459 parts continued model 30 8530 227 model 30 286 8530 229 model 33 9533 231 model 35 8535 233 model 3509 285 model 3510 287 model 3511 289 model 3532 291 model 40 8540 236 model 50 8550 239 model 53 9553 241 model 55 SX 8555 243 model 56 8556 246 model 56 9556 257 model 57 8557 248 model 57 amp M57 9557 260 mode
200. System Partition To backup the System Partition 1 Start the system programs See Starting System Program Diagnostics on page 425 if you need assistance Select Backup Restore system programs from the Main Menu Select Backup the System Partition and follow the instructions on the screen After making a backup label the diskettes with the following information Diskette name Reference Diskette and if the system has a second diskette Diagnostic Diskette for the second diskette Model number of the system on the front of the System Type number 1 2 or 3 of the System Programs from the Display Revision Level screen in the system programs type 1 2 or 3 applies to Model 90 95 only Version number of the system programs from the IBM logo screen when the system programs are started In some cases you might receive a message during the backup process informing you that the entire partition will not fit on two diskettes this is for two diskette systems Hardware Maintenance Reference 427 only This happens only if you have copied files from many option diskettes to the System Partition The only files that might be missing from the backup diskettes are those associated with some options If you ever need to restore the System Partition you can do so by using the two backup diskettes Reference and Diagnostic with the Restore the System Partition program then copy the option diskettes using the Cop
201. The customized configuration The SCSI device settings The selectable drive startup sequence 7 Customized configuration A system configuration that users create using the change configuration feature of the system programs For example the user might have changed the serial port default value or changed a token ring address location Hardware Maintenance Reference 429 ASCII Terminals The terminal attaches to the system board serial connector There are physical differences among the ASCII terminals that affect the system setup Notes 1 Not all systems support an ASCII terminal See PS 2 System Specifications on page 435 for more information 2 Not all operating systems will support an ASCII terminal 3 Beginners All Purpose Symbolic Instruction Code BASIC language is not supported when using an ASCII terminal 4 High resolution graphics are not available when using an ASCII terminal ASCII Terminal Setup and Menu Selection Use the setup instructions supplied with the ASCII terminal As you are using those instructions you will need to know the following information Use a null modem cable or a null modem connector with the communication cable when attaching the ASCII terminal to the serial connector on the computer If the ASCII terminal has a test switch next to the keyboard connector make sure it is in the normal position When you use the system programs to define the setup values on the
202. Top Cover Assembly without lock Rear Panel Cover Power Supply 197 Watt System Board 57 SX System Board 57 SLC M57 SLC Processor Options 386SLC 486SLC2 486SLC3 60 20MHz 2MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 4MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 8MB Memory Module Kit 70ns Frame Assembly R Type 1 57 SX 57 SLC Type 2 M57 SLC see DASD see DASD Drive Tray for 3 5 Inch Drive Bays 1 2 3 5 25 Inch Bay Drive Guides 2 Front Adapter Support Guide Bus Adapter with Battery Type 1 mounting tab early 8557 only Type 2 2 mounting holes later 57 amp all M57 Battery 3V Lithium Control Panel Assembly 57 SX 57 SLC with speaker power switch cable Control Panel Assembly M57 SLC Control Panel Assembly with speaker and power switch Cable to System Board Interposer for connector P2 Cable to ACPA A 3 5 Inch Blank Bezel Bay 4 Bezel Insert for 8520092 5 25 Inch Louvered Bezel Bay 3 Bezel Insert for 85F0094 Air Baffle Fixed Disk Drive Bay 4C 5 25 Inch Blank Bezel Bay 2 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Bay 2 3 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Bay 2 3 CD ROM Drive Bezel Bay 2 3 Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Bay 1 Retainer Plate Cover Lock Logo 57 SX R Logo 57 SLC R Logo M57 SLC R Pedestal Miscellaneous Parts Kit see page 303 Shipping Carton 96F7640 92F0035 92F0058 84F7994 85F0298 92F0078 10G7103 61G2099 92F0102 92F0105
203. a 94njee4 asva 5 347 Hardware Maintenance Service B a ox 0851618 A ddng 1072291 INN 7865997 5656495 paeng 17 920 5155249 quassy 1004 1576 99 ueg Z96 99v vec8Or 901 18409 7 28 97 1894 sisseyo 5198971 LM 1eldepy epiwiseJ 2 1505 01 15 5 LEH DTS SN 1e1depy APIM IS84 2 ISOS O Wa ss 1921618 LM 15 1257 15 SN 1 5 jqe9 m 62889v LM uondo paepueis 05 01 9598971 SN uondo prepueis 4 09 01 5 5 0021618 sseappy ISOS eiqeo 1821618 LM Geidepy ISOS Lv saea sng 1v JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 348 1557958 Qeidepy 2 1505 01 5 5 1227 18 uondo 0 wes s 0021618 sseuppy ISOS eiqeo uondo 0 uondo 5428971 ISOS 1650958 ISOS Ly 91980
204. a unique RAM address was assigned to the adapter Refer to Network Configuration Errors on page 89 for additional information and instructions If a unique RAM address was assigned to the adapter restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter 06412 Adapter Test failure Restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter Hardware Maintenance Service 85 Number Action 06418 Transmit Receive Test failure 06419 06418 Loopback first in first out FIFO 06420 error 06421 06422 06419 Loopback packet error 06423 06420 A cyclic redundancy check or CRC character was expected 06424 but not generated 06421 Loopback error 06422 A good CRC was manually appended to the loopback packet but the network interface controller NIC logged a CRC error 06423 A bad CRC was manually appended to the loopback packet but the NIC logged a CRC error 06424 A accepted a packet whose address did not match that of the NIC The data received is not the same as data sent Check to see that 1 The network is terminated correctly 2 The network is connected correctly If the above items are correct restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter 06425 Interrupt not serviced Ensure that a unique interrupt level was assigned to the adapter Refer to Network Configuration Errors on page 89
205. ads and accessories for that tester CAUTION Many customers have near their equipment rubber floor mats that contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic discharges Do not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock 366 5 2 Maintenance Manual Stand on suitable rubber mats obtained locally if necessary to insulate you from grounds such as metal floor strips and machine frames Observe the special safety precautions when you work with very high voltages these instructions are in the safety sections of maintenance information Use extreme care when measuring high voltages Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational condition Do not use worn or broken tools and testers Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit First check that it has been powered off Always look carefully for possible hazards in your work area Examples of these hazards are moist floors nongrounded power extension cables power surges and missing safety grounds Do not touch live electrical circuits with the reflective surface of a plastic dental mirror The surface is conductive such touching can cause personal injury and machine damage Do not service the following parts with the power on when they are removed from their normal operating places in a machine Power supply units Pumps Blowers and fans Motor generators and similar units
206. aintenance Manual ServerGuard Adapter Symptom to FRU Index Error codes and the FRUs that might be responsible for the failure are listed below The most likely failing FRU is listed first Symptom Error FRU Action No beep power on indicator does not come on and fan does not run 1 2 Press Master Override Button on EPCB External Power Control Box Note Bypass External Power Control Box by plugging electrical outlet directly into computer power supply prior to replacing FRU Power Status LED is off during EPCB Diagnostic test 1 2 ServerGuard Adapter External Power Control Box Symptom Error FRU Action 027501XX 027503XX 027506XX 027507XX ServerGuard Adapter System Board 027502XX 027504XX 027510XX 027511XX 027533 XX 027534XX 027536XX 027537XX ServerGuard Adapter 027509XX Remove redundant ServerGuard Adapters run Auto Configuration program then retest 027512XX WMSELF DGS diagnostics file missing WMSELF DGS diagnostics file incorrect 027535XX 3V Lithium Backup Battery ServerGuard Adapter 027554XX Internal Temperature out of range ServerGuard Adapter 027555XX 027556XX 027557XX ServerGuard Adapter System Power Supply 7 2V NiCad Main Battery Pack ServerGuard Adapter 027558XX 027559XX 027560XX 027561XX PCMCIA Type II Modem ServerGuard Adapter Hardware Maintenance Servi
207. al Configuration System Error Log Viewing the Error Log Types of Errors Detected EmorStorage Applicaton Dumping Extended Diagnostic Data Information PS 2 System Specifications PS 2 AT BUS o Fk Be ae e PS 2 Micro Channel Non IML PS 2 Micro Channel IML Acronyms Abbreviations and Terms We Want Your Comments Do You Need Technical References Problem Determination Tips Phone Numbers U S and Canada Notices us SSE 9 RS EU ws Trademarks 364 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Safety Information The following section contains the safety information that you need to be familiar with before servicing a PS 2 product General Safety Follow these rules to ensure general safety Observe good housekeeping in the area of the machines during and after maintenance When lifting any heavy object 1 Ensure you can stand safely without slipping 2 Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet 3 Use a slow lifting force Never move suddenly or twist when you attempt to lift 4 Lift by standing or by pushing up with your leg muscles this action removes the strain from the muscles in your back Do not attempt to lift any objects that weigh more than 16 kg 35 Ib or objects that you think are too heavy
208. any option adapters to see if the problem disappears Display adapter any type System board Bus adapter if display adapter is used Display Aoc 110 5 2 Maintenance Manual Display Considerations If you experience problems with a PS 2 display and the Advanced Diagnostic video test and the display self tests do not indicate a problem consider the location of the display and any surrounding devices Certain fluctuating low frequency magnetic fields can cause the screen to distort jitter or roll These magnetic fields are generally present around transformers small appliances and even nearby florescent lighting fixtures If you experience this problem you might have to move the device or the display Displays that are too close to each other less than 12 inches could cause similar problems Note Because of the differences in the Earth s magnetic fields displays are designed to be used in a specific hemisphere For example if a display marketed for use in the Southern Hemisphere is relocated to the Northern Hemisphere the colors will probably be distorted The parts catalog lists FRU numbers and model numbers for Northern and Southern Hemisphere displays You should avoid moving a color display while it is powered on The movement can result in some screen discolorations If this happens to correct the colors power off the display for twenty minutes the display automatically degausses demagnetizes th
209. arallel keyboard and mouse ports might cause unpredictable problems Diskette Drive Controller The diskette drive controller is on the system board The controller connects to the diskette drives through a cable Signals and voltages are supplied through the diskette drive cable that plugs into the connector Installing the wrong drive might cause intermittent problems Keyboard and Pointing Device Connectors The two 6 pin connectors on the rear of the system board are for a keyboard and a pointing device mouse The keyboard connector on most systems is marked on the back panel of the system unit with a keyboard symbol The pointing device connector on most systems is marked with a mouse symbol 404 PS 2 Maintenance Manual System Memory The following section provides information about basic memory operation To determine the maximum memory supported on the system you are servicing refer to PS 2 System Specifications on page 435 System Board Memory The amount and type of system board memory varies from model to model Memory Expansion Adapters In addition to system board memory many models support additional memory on memory expansion adapters The only 486 system that supports memory expansion adapters is the model 70 A21 If a memory expansion adapter is installed in a system that does not support one the system might work but the memory performance will be degraded Memory expansion adapters can be ins
210. aring a Hard Disk for Moving Before moving a model 25 25 SX 25 286 30 30 286 35 40 or 50 system unit or removing the hard disk drive from these systems for service select Move the computer from the Main Menu on the Starter Diskette or Reference Diskette This parks the heads of the hard disk drive to help prevent damage to the drive Head parking is automatic on all other systems 374 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Security There are several security features to help protect the system the internal hardware and the information stored on the hard disk U Bolt Some systems have two holes at the rear of the system to allow a U bolt to be used with a cable or chain to secure the system to a desk or table Cover Lock and Tamper Evident Switches Some systems have an electro mechanical cover lock In the locked position it mechanically prevents the cover from being removed If the covers are forced open the tamper evident cover switches detect the intrusion The next time the computer is powered on POST displays a message informing the user that the system covers have been tampered with and that you must run Automatic configuration to continue Notes 1 When the cover is removed power is removed from the computer If you want to run the system with the cover off you must move the security switch to the up or on position Move the blue slider up until it contacts the metal actuator arms of the two switches
211. ating a new array you must confirm the deletion of the existing array After you make your selection the Confirm pop up window will disappear and the cursor will be active in the menu If you want a drive defined as a hot spare refer to Defining a Hot Spare Drive on page 159 for Step by step instructions Create a new disk array and define logical drives See Creating a Disk Array on page 161 for instructions on creating a disk array and defining logical drives After you have established the new array and logical drive or drives select Initialize synchronize array from the Main Menu then select Initialize logical drive to prepare the drives in the array to receive data This sets the drive to a predetermined state Any data existing in the drive is overwritten with zeros and corresponding parity is initialized to the proper value Insert a 3 5 inch formatted diskette in the primary drive select Advanced functions from the Main Menu then select Backup config to diskette Follow the instructions on the screen Exit the RAID configuration program by pressing Esc or selecting Exit while on the Main Menu A pop up window will appear asking you to confirm your action Reinstall your operating system and device drivers then restore your data and programs Advanced Functions You can select several utilities from the Advanced Functions menu They include Backup configuration to diskette Restore configuration to dis
212. ation failed 2 System Board 3 Display 3 4 1 1 Video Adapter The screen retrace test 2 System Board detected an error 3 Display 3 4 2 1 Video Adapter POST is searching for video 2 System Board ROM Error Codes Error Code Symptom FRU Action 0000 SCSI Adapter not enabled 1 Be sure the adapter Device and Bus Master fields are enabled in the PCI configuration program Refer to the documentation that was shipped with the computer 002X 1 SCSI Adapter 008X 1 Check SCSI Check for proper installation of SCSI terminators terminators for proper installation SCSI Cable SCSI Terminator SCSI Device SCSI Adapter 0115 Protected mode cannot be enabled 1 System Board 0164 POST detected a base memory or expansion memory size mismatch 1 Run Setup and ensure the memory size is correct 2 Run the Expanded Memory Diagnostic tests 0601 1 Set Configuration Diskette configuration error 0610 1 Diskette Drive Cannot find diskette controller for drive A 0612 Cannot find diskette controller for drive B 2 Diskette Drive Cable 3 Diskette Drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board 1 Diskette Drive 2 Diskette Drive Cable 3 Diskette Drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board 0616 Diskette drive reset failed 1 Diskette Drive Adapter 64 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Error Code Symptom FRU Action
213. ations for the hexadecimal base I O address The default is 300 The I O address must be set at 300 or 320 if the Novell Netware Device Driver is used 800 1800 2800 3800 300 320 90 PS 2 Maintenance Manual IRQ Interrupt Levels The PS ValuePoint Ethernet Adapter can use interrupt levels 3 4 5 9 or 11 The default is 3 The IRQ interrupt level must be set at 3 if the Novell Netware NE2000 Device Driver is used If the adapters and programs do not support interrupt sharing the adapters cannot use the same interrupt level ROM Address The PS ValuePoint Ethernet Adapter has 16KB of read only memory ROM Any of the following locations can be used for the hexadecimal ROM address The default is D0000 D3FFF C8000 CBFFF D0000 D3FFF D8000 DBFFF CA000 CDFFF D2000 D5FFF DA000 DDFFF CC000 CFFFF D4000 D7FFF DC000 DFFFF CE000 D1FFF D6000 D9FFF Changing PS ValuePoint ISA Adapter Configuration To change the PS ValuePoint Ethernet Adapter configuration do the following 1 Insert the Features Diskette in drive A and power on the computer to start the Ethernet Setup Diagnostic program If the computer is already on log off the network If OS 2 is installed shutdown the system and insert the Feature Diskette in drive A Press and hold Ctrl Alt then press Del 2 Select Option1 Set Adapter Configuration from the Main Menu then press Enter The adapter address is displayed 3 Press
214. attached to the workstation and network access point 2 Ensure that the file server is available and fully operational If the code is 2E and the field is highlighted the adapter is configured for a different data rate than the LAN segment To correct this error you must manually change the data rate for the network adapter Refer to Data Rate Switch Settings on page 74 to match the data rate of the LAN segment If the above items are correct and the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter If the problem still remains replace the system board PC 4020 Field appears This field indicates that the adapter is not functioning properly with the workstation In most cases the screen will freeze and this field will be highlighted because the adapter cannot continue Restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter If the problem still remains replace the system board 76 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Problem Action RQ XXXX Field appears and XXXX is a value greater than 10 A number greater than 10 indicates that the file server is not present or is overloaded 1 Ensure that the file server is available and fully operational 2 Ensure that the address for the Token Ring adapter installed in the workstation has been properly added to the network software If the above items are correct and the problem remains replace the Token Ring
215. atus Cable Planar Control Panel Cable System Status Cable 1X4 Diskette Drive Signal Cable with power CD ROM SCSI Cable for 2 drives SCSI Fast Wide Cable for 1 drive Hard Disk Drive Power Cable for 1 drive C2 Cable with Switch LED Display Cable POS ID Select Cable Wide Index Options Type 86XX 272 DASD Hot Swap Tray Assembly Narrow POS ID Select Cable Narrow 220 Watt Power Supply Assembly PS 2 Maintenance Manual 06H5081 06H3406 06H3404 06H3405 06H3751 82G3613 82G3610 82G3612 06H6138 06H3957 71G6292 06H3592 06H3237 Server 85 9585 Model 95 XP 486 8595 Parts Hardware Maintenance Service 273 Index System Unit 85 95 1 own conn o 15 17 18 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 24 24 274 Access Cover Access Cover Fan Rear Bezel 85 Rear Bezel 95 288 Watt Power Supply 85 335 Watt Power Supply 95 Power Supply Ground Strap Pedestal with Plate 85 Pedestal with Plate 95 Drive Support Structure 85 Drive Support Structure 95 Ground spring for 92F0280 33F8421 see DASD see DASD DASD Option Guide Drive Retainer Front Bezel ndicator Panel Bezel 85 nformation Panel Bezel 95 ndicator Panel Assembly 85 see DASD nformation Panel Assembly 95 nformation Panel kit 95 Base Frame R 85 Base Frame R 95 Keylock Assem
216. ay Adapter 002460XX 1 90MHz Processor Upgrade without VRAM 2 System Board 002461XX 1 90MHz Processor Upgrade with 1MB VRAM t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Maintenance Service 53 Ensure that you are using diagnostic files XGAANI DGS and XGAPNI DGS dated 03 06 93 or later before you replace any FRUs Earlier files cause erroneous errors Symptom Error FRU Action 0258XXXX 1 XGA 2 Display Video might have failed Adapter 2 System Board 0259XXXX 1 SVGA Adapter 2 System Board 0260XXXX 1 System Board 2 Any SCSI Device 0270XXXX 1 RAID Adapter Controller 2 System Board 0271XXXX 1 RAID Hard Disk Drive 2 System Board 0273XXXX 1 1Mbps Micro Channel Infrared LAN Adapter 027501XX 027503XX 027506XX 027507XX 1 ServerGuard Adapter 2 System Board 027502XX 027504XX 027510XX 027511XX 027533 XX 027534XX 027536XX 027537XX 1 ServerGuard Adapter 027509XX 1 Remove redundant ServerGuard Adapters run Auto Configuration program then retest 027512XX 1 WMSELF DGS diagnostics file missing 2 WMSELF DGS diagnostics file incorrect 027535XX 1 3V Lithium Backup Battery 2 ServerGuard Adapter 027554XX 1 Internal Temperature out of range 2 ServerGuard Adapter 027555XX 027556XX 1 ServerGuard Adapter 2 System Power Supply
217. because the system gets a completion status message when the data reaches cache memory but before data is actually written to the storage device To change the write policy 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 2 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu 3 Select Change write policy from the Advanced Functions menu The cursor will be active in the Logical Drive list 4 Select the logical drive whose write policy you want to change The Advanced Functions screen appears Note Your information might be different from that shown in this screen The Logical Drive list shows you the logical drive ID the size in megabytes of each logical drive the RAID level you assigned to that logical drive and the date you created it The status of the logical drive is also shown Good means that all is well with the drive Critical means that you must replace the hard disk drive and rebuild the logical drive You will have received a message telling you what has happened to the drive Offline means that the logical drive is unrecoverable the data in that drive is lost 5 Locate the Wrt pol Write Policy field in the Logical Drive list The write policy is shown as either WT write through which is the default setting or WB write back 6 Use the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key to select the logical drive whose write policy you want
218. beeping sound to indicate successful completion of POST or to indicate that the tests detect an error One beep and the appearance of text on the display indicates successful completion of the POST More than one beep indicates that the POST detects an error Test Programs The QAPlus PRO test programs developed by DiagSoft for IBM are the primary method of testing the IBM components of the system and some external devices The amount of time required to test all components depends on the number of components The more optional adapters and devices you have attached to your system the longer the testing takes The test programs on the Diagnostic Diskette include the following features Feature Description Advanced Identifies most problems associated with the Diagnostic following major components Tests System board Hard disk drives Diskette drives CD ROM drives RAM Serial and parallel ports Video adapter Printer Keyboard Mouse Flexible Allows you to Test Run groups of tests in batch Control Specify parameters to use for each test for example video modes disk cylinders port addresses and so on Specify the number of passes you want to run one to continuous Log the test results to a text dBase DBF format file Save all test settings for future use View System Information View the server s configuration information For example you can view the IRQ DMA assignments memory usage device drive
219. bility support is especially important for but not limited to all LAN adapters and RIPL applications Software Failures After a Hardware Change After the initial installation any changes in the hardware configuration addition or changes of adapters or features might result in computer failures and require the reinstallation of the operating system or the software revisions Specific hardware configuration changes such as memory address interrupt level or programmable option select might result in a computer failure if the software has unique operating requirements 182 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Undetermined Problems You are here because the diagnostic tests did not identify the failure the Devices List is incorrect or the system is inoperative Note If you suspect a software mismatch is causing failures solid or intermittent be sure to see Software Hardware Mismatch Problems on page 181 Check the power supply voltages If the voltages are not correct replace the power supply If the voltages are correct return here and do the following 1 Power off the computer 2 Remove or disconnect the following one at a time until you find the failure power on the computer and reconfigure each time Any external devices Surge suppressor device on the computer Modem printer mouse or non IBM devices Each adapter Drives Memory Module Kits Bus adapter Math coprocessor if installed
220. bles or connectors Reseat all adapters drives and modules Check the system fan Go to Power Supply Voltage Check on page 138 to check voltages Start an error log and run the tests multiple times If you did not find a problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 183 Follow the instructions on the screen If that does not correct the problem go to Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel on page 26 Devices List At the start of the diagnostic tests the Devices List is displayed Normally all adapters and devices installed in the computer appear on the list If an adapter or device that appears on the list is not installed in the computer use the procedure in Undetermined Problems on page 183 to find the problem If an adapter or device that 5 installed in the computer does not appear on the list you have one of the following conditions diagnostic DGS files for the missing device are not loaded onto the System Partition run Copy an option diskette using the option diskette The SCSI controller failed on the system board or SCSI adapter unrecognizable adapter is installed The missing device is defective or it requires an additional diagnostic diskette or service manual A defective adapter caused the device to disappear from the list If you are sure that the DGS files are loaded and all the options are supported note which type of device SCSI or no
221. bly also order Parts Kit System Board Without Memory 85 80486DX2 ODP 33 66 MHz Microprocessor 85 System Board Without Memory 95 Battery SCSI Adapter with cache SCSI Adapter Without cache Terminator External for 8520063 Terminator Internal for 85F0063 Terminator Internal for 85F0002 Terminator in line for 320 400MB Display Adapter 85 see Options and Adapters Matrix Adapter Guide 85 Processor Boards 95 With cache option connector 80486 25 MHz 80486 33 MHz 80486DX2 33 66 MHz runs internally at 66MHz 256KB Cache 17ns for 64F0201 64F0198 92F0145 80486 50 MHz 256KB Cache 12ns for 92F0048 Processor Boards Without cache option connector 80486SX 20 MHz 80487SX 20 MHz 80486SX 25 MHz PS 2 Maintenance Manual 33F8427 64F4115 92F0279 33F8419 92F2637 92F0051 33F8418 33F8422 64F0215 92F0280 33F8421 33F6853 33F8441 64F4135 64F4137 92F0281 33F8423 92F0277 33F8434 33F8442 92F0278 33F8417 33F8433 33F8435 92F0270 92F2582 33F5717 33F8354 85F0063 85F0002 33F8464 34F0025 57F2870 92F0142 33F8440 64F0201 64F0198 92F0145 64F0199 92F0048 92F0050 92F0049 92F0065 92F0079 Index System Unit 85 95 Note See 20 and 25 Mhz Processor Boards on page 284 80487SX Microprocessor 92F0100 Extended Math Capability for 92F0079 80486 25 50 MHz Overdrive Processor 92F0147 runs internally at 50 MHz for 92F0079 80486DX2 25 50 MHz 92F0161 run
222. c data information 434 E EEPROM 382 electrical safety 366 electrostatic devices handling 369 enable and disable settings 180 error 96 8N1 console message 95 432 detection 90 95 407 messages ASCII terminal 432 storage 434 error codes format 115 numeric micro channel 33 numeric AT 15 error log system 25 433 error log viewing 433 errors 999XX 56 application program 433 Ethernet POST 85 IML and IPL 55 memory 405 micro channel adapter 433 network configuration 89 OS 2 trap 131 POST 383 printer 134 processor 433 system memory 433 token ring POST 79 types detected 433 Index 453 errors in this manual 444 Ethernet adapter features diskette ISA 90 Ethernet adapter testing 81 Ethernet adapters ISA 10BASE T 10BASE2 90 Ethernet POST errors 85 exploded views extended diagnostic data information dumping 434 extension NVRAM and NVRAM 381 external devices attached to adapter SCSI 417 external diskette drive parts 298 F failed hard disk drive system partition 385 failing memory location determining 125 failing memory finding 125 failures using SCSI ID to isolate 181 fax number for corrections to this manual 444 fax modem diagnostics 112 features power on 380 power supply 422 PS 2 systems 380 features diskette ISA Ethernet adapter 90 finding failing memory 125 FLASH memory 382 FLASH text messages 383 format program low level 129 format error code 115 FRU catalog 222 FRU replacement strategy 1 F
223. cable connector 16 Hard disk drive cable connector 17 Math coprocessor connector 18 48651 2 processor 19 Real time clock module 2 Bus adapter connector Hy m n i m d d 818 818 Eg HE 818 818 818 19896108 818 281 3 sl 128 sla Cz 88 88 28 alo 8 8 8 o o 9 38 8 2 8 8 3e 5 981 88 28 818 8 8 r 3 5 8 981 92 28 x olo H _ E 5 8 0 5 06 ro 1 BE 8 18 81 slej 18 881 88 18 PU 38 68 33 83 2 o o So 18 1 818 8 25 TES olo 98 1 8 881 08 mE 818 8 651 28 818 3 3 3 o o 9 g ee se 3 E 9971 6 01 60 318 8155 318 881 36 pos 8 25 318 881 55 318 881 88 lee 318 8 jes EH 8 55 818 8 23 818 981 88 jesl 818 88 881 85 g8 818 12 ole 90000000006000000000 36999099009900990099 90000000006000000000 36999099009000990099 16 Hardware Maintenance Service 195 Model 55 System Board Display connector Serial port Parallel port Pointing device connector Keyboard connector Fuse Power supply connector P7 Power supply connector P14 M
224. can install up to six drives in bank D and up to six drives in bank E Note The bank letter designations are located on both vertical rails on the front of the server The bay slot numbers are located on the top of bank C and the bottom of bank E Open Bays CD ROM Drive Bay A1 Diskette Drive Bay A2 Bank C Bays 1 6 Bank D Bays 1 6 Open Bays Bank E Bays 1 6 A cover plate sometimes called a bezel or face plate covers the front of bay B2 only If you install a drive that uses removable media diskette optical disc tape you might install and adjust the cover plate after you install the drive in bay B2 Considerations Bay A comes with one SCSI CD ROM drive and one 3 5 inch 2 88MB diskette drive Bay B supports One 5 25 inch full high removable media or non removable media device or One 5 25 inch half high removable media device and one 3 5 inch half high removable media device or Two 3 5 inch or two 5 25 inch slim high or half high removable media devices Note Only one of the devices installed in bay B can be a SCSI device Hardware Maintenance Service 177 You cannot install hot swappable drives in bay B PC Server 500 supports eighteen 3 5 inch slim high hot swappable hard disk drives or nine 3 5 inch half high hard disk drives in the bottom three banks C D and E Banks C D and E can accommodate
225. ce 95 Symptom Error FRU Action 027562XX 1 2 External Power Control Box not connected External Power Control Box ServerGuard Adapter 027563XX 027564XX External Power Control Box ServerGuard Adapter 0275XXXX Update Diagnostic Software 96 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Wireless Network This section provides information on the IBM Wireless LAN For additional help refer to the user s guides for the workstation you are using ISA Bus Switch Settings To install the adapter in a computer with an ISA bus set the dip switches as shown below Table 5 ISA Dip Switch Settings Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Position 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 m Important Refer to the values shown on the ISA adapter DO NOT use the values shown on the switch The settings shown in Table 5 apply to most computer configurations The interrupt level used by the IBM Wireless LAN adapter is determined by the position of switches 5 and 6 The IBM Wireless LAN adapter does not support interrupt level sharing Therefore make sure that no other adapter in the computer uses the same interrupt level If necessary change the interrupt level of the IBM Wireless LAN adapter If you want to use interrupt level 9 for the IBM Wireless LAN adapter make sure that no other adapter in the computer uses interrupt level 2 ISA Mode Operations Parameters The following provides the pos
226. ce Information on page 107 Hardware Maintenance Service 45 Symptom Error FRU Action 010101XX 010102XX 010104XX 010105XX 010106XX 010107XX 010108XX 010109XX 010111XX 010112XX 010113XX 010114XX 010115XX 010116XX 1 Have the customer verify that the correct operating system device drivers are installed and operational 2 Modem 010103XX 010110XX 0101171X 1 System Board 2 Data Fax Modem 010117XX not listed above 1 Check system speaker 2 Check PSTN cable 3 External DAA if installed 4 Modem 010118XX 1 Run System Diagnostics and verify the correct operation of the modem slot 2 Modem 010119XX 1 Diagnostics detected a non IBM modem 2 Modem 010120XX 1 Check PSTN Cable 2 External DAA if installed 3 Modem 010132XX 010133XX 010134XX 010135XX 010136XX 010137XX 010138XX 010139XX 010140XX 010141XX 010142XX 010143XX 010144XX 010145XX 010146XX 010147XX 010148XX 010149XX 010150XX 010151XX 010152XX 1 Modem 010153XX 1 Data Fax Modem 2 System Board 0101XXXX 1 Modem Adapter A not listed above 2 Data Fax Modem 3 System Board 010450XX 010451XX 1 Run Advanced 010490XX 010491XX Diagnostics 010492XX 010499XX 2 Riser Card if installed Read write error 3 Hard Disk Drive 4 System Board 010452XX 1 Run Advanced Seek test error Diagnostics t If this symbol is shown next to an error above g
227. cessor board are System microprocessor System clock Direct memory access DMA controller Memory controller 380 5 2 Maintenance Manual Note Some processor boards have a built in cache and others have a connector for an optional plug in cache The processor boards can be one of three types type 1 2 or 3 The type of processor board determines the following Type of DMA controller installed 16 or 32 bit Type of memory error detection supported ECC or parity Type of memory configurations supported interleaved or noninterleaved The microprocessors used are 32 bit They operate in the real address or virtual address protected mode The amount of memory supported and the clock speed varies with the processor board If the processor board is not seated correctly intermittent errors can occur NVRAM and NVRAM Extension Non volatile random access memory NVRAM provides 64 bytes of storage Fifty bytes are used to store system configuration and security information The real time clock uses the remaining 14 bytes to track the date time and battery level The NVRAM extension stores additional configuration and system status information The data stored in the NVRAM and NVRAM extension is kept active by the battery when the computer is powered off If the stored data is lost because of a depleted or removed battery you can restore the data by using one of the following methods If the user has a customized
228. cessor socket The jumper changes the speed of the option microprocessor if installed Note Operating a microprocessor at a speed greater than it is designed for can cause intermittent problems The jumper settings are Speed Jumper Settings 25MHz Position jumper SPD over the middle and rear pins 33MHz Position jumper SPD over the front and middle pins OS 2 Problems during a New Installation If you have determined that you do not have a hardware failure and you cannot get the operating system to work assist the customer in recopying the OS 2 software to the hard disk If this is not a new installation have the customer order the replacement diskettes If this is a new installation and the customer does not have the diskettes order replacement diskettes by doing the following 1 Write down the machine type and serial number 2 Call 1 800 342 6672 weekdays 9 a m to 9 p m eastern time 3 Identify yourself as an IBM service representative or IBM authorized servicer 4 For OS 2 Version 2 0 request diskette package P N 41G3329 For OS 2 Version 2 00 1 request diskette package P N 52G9973 The IBM telephone operator will supply the correct package part number for later versions of OS 2 Supply the machine information and shipping address for either package After you receive the OS 2 diskettes refer to the pamphlet supplied with the diskettes for OS 2 installation instructions The PS 2 diagnostic test
229. ched to the SCSI port on the system board the terminator is automatically disabled Because of this automatic function you never need to install a terminator on the system board SCSI port even when there are no external SCSI devices attached However you still need a terminator on the last device in a SCSI chain both internal and external This is the same as on any other system with an external SCSI device attached For example if the system has two internal SCSI devices the last one on the cable requires termination Another example is if there are two external SCSI devices attached the last device in that chain requires termination All other SCSI devices must have the terminators removed Hardware Maintenance Reference 419 Selectable Drive Startup Function The selectable drive startup sequence allows the user to control the startup sequence of the drives in the system Each time the computer is powered on it checks the drives as it looks for the operating system The order which the system checks the drives is the drive startup sequence In most cases there is no need to change the default drive startup sequence However if users are working with multiple hard disk drives multiple operating systems different size diskette drives or they are planning to do remote initial program load RIPL from a drive ina network server they might want to change the sequence The default sequence checks the primary diskette drive for
230. configuration that uses settings other than the default run Restore configuration from the system programs If default configuration settings are used run Automatic configuration from the system programs POST Overview The power on self test POST is a series of system tests that verify the correct operation of the base system and most options The POST runs each time the computer is powered on It compares the system configuration information it detects with the configuration stored in the NVRAM The test time varies depending on the options installed The method used to store and control the POST code varies with the system During power on POST performs basic functions such as Checking the basic system board and processor functions Initializing the video function Checking the memory subsystem Checking the ports Hardware Maintenance Reference 381 Verifying that the hard disk drive is functioning Verifying that the code required in the System Partition of the default hard disk is present if System Partition is required Verifying that the default diskette drive is functioning Some adapters have ROM modules that contain extended BIOS routines that work with the system POST Note FLASH systems have a feature the customer can use to automatically run a shorter less extensive POST routine In this mode POST might not detect a problem This feature is called the Fast Startup Mode You can change this setting from the
231. d 4 Video Memory 007510XX 1 XGA Adapter Check display T 2 Video Memory 0076XXXX 1 Page Printer Adapter 0078XXXX 1 High Speed Adapter t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error FRU Action 0079XXXX 1 3117 Adapter 008001XX to 008012XX 1 Pointing Device System Board Upgrade Mouse Model 50 55 Only 2 System Board 00850XXX 00851XXX 1 80286 Memory Option Adapter A 2 System Board 00852XXX 1 Memory Module Package on the 80286 Memory Adapter A 2 Adapter Memory 3 System Board 008601XX 008602XX 1 Pointing Device Mouse 2 System Board 008603XX 008604XX 1 System Board 2 Pointing Device Mouse 0089XXXX 1 Music Adapter 0091 XXXX 1 Optical Drive 2 Adapter 0096XXXX 1 SCSI Adapter This adapter has cache 2 Any SCSI Device 3 System Board 010001XX Information only Multiprotocol Adapter A not found 010002XX 1 Run Advanced Card selected feedback Diagnostics error 010007XX 1 Communications Cable 2 Multiprotocol Adapter A 010008XX 010009XX 1 Multiprotocol Adapter A 2 Any Serial Device 0100XXXX Multiprotocol not listed above Adapter A 1 System Board 2 Bus Adapter 0101102X 0101106X 1 Modem Adapter A 0101108X 0101109X 2 Data Fax Modem 3 Any Serial Device t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Servi
232. d IBM Dealer or Marketing Representative or call the IBM HelpCenter U S and Puerto Rico only at 1 800 772 2227 They will receive free of charge a set of upgrade diskettes for their System PCMCIA Adapter Model 33 The PCMCIA adapter is an extension to the AT bus The PCMCIA card accepts adapters about the size and shape of a credit card These adapters called PC Cards have Trademark of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association 400 PS 2 Maintenance Manual a thickness of 3 3 mm 5 0 mm or 10 5 mm Available PC Cards include Ethernet Token Ring modems 3270 emulator FAX memory solid state hardfiles and hard disk drives Two key elements of PCMCIA technology are Socket Services and Card Services Socket Services identifies how many option slots are in the computer and detects the insertion or removal of a PC card while the computer is powered on When a PC Card is inserted and detected Card Services immediately reconfigures the computer to give the new PC Card access to the system memory interrupts and other computer functions Video The video subsystem is either on the system board or the display adapter The video subsystem operates in two video modes VGA compatibility mode XGA compatibility mode Most display adapters support up to 1MB of video memory When the computer is powered on the graphics array is in the VGA mode In this mode all alphanumeric text and the VGA all points a
233. d J16 8 PCI slots J18 J19 and J20 9 Mouse port J2 1 PCI IDE hard disk drive connector J21 11 Keyboard port J1 12 Serial port COM1 J11 13 Power supply connector P2 J7 14 Power supply connector P1 J6 15 Serial port COM2 J10 16 Parallel port J8 17 Diskette drive connector J9 18 Real time clock socket 19 IDE 2 hard disk drive connector J22 TT TTP IM VU 214 5 2 Maintenance Manual PC Server 486DX2 System Board Jumper Settings A label showing the following jumper locations is located on the top of the base frame assembly inside the system unit Jumper Settings CPU Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W2 486SX Pins 2 3 All other CPUs Default 1 2 amp 3 4 W3 P24T CPU Not installed All others CPUs Default Installed W16 25MHz Not installed 33MHz Default Installed W20 25MHz Installed 33MHz Default Not installed W33 DX4 Pins 1 2 DX4 internal double clock Pins 2 3 468SX DX2 DX and DX4 Not installed internal clock tripler Default Jumper Settings ISA IDE Selection Jumper Configuration Setting W42 ISA IDE uses ISA IRQ 14 Pins 1 2 ISA IDE uses ISA IRQ 15 Pins 2 3 W
234. d the speed must be the same for both memory module kits in the pair but it can vary from pair to pair The kits must be installed in the following order pair J1 4 J3 Model 90 or A1 amp B1 Model 95 then pair J2 amp J4 Model 90 or A2 amp B2 Model 95 and so forth This technique of addressing memory in pairs enhances performance Noninterleaved configurations do not require matched pairs of memory module kits the size and speed does not have to be the same Noninterleaved memory runs less efficiently than interleaved memory but will function with mixed sizes of memory Error Detection 90 95 The systems use either parity or Error Correction Code ECC to detect memory errors but not a combination of both on the same system board Memory that uses parity can detect but not correct memory errors If an error occurs during POST an error code is displayed If an error occurs after POST the system halts Memory that uses ECC can detect and correct memory errors If an error occurs during or after POST the error is corrected without interfering with the system operation This error correcting capability will result in fewer memory related service calls The memory configuration and the type of error detection supported varies depending on which processor board type 1 2 or 3 is installed Model 90 and 95 systems can be upgraded with a different type of processor board than the type indicated from the system ser
235. ddressable APA graphics modes are supported The maximum resolution in VGA compatibility mode is 720 x 400 picture elements PELS in the text mode and 640 x 480 PELS in the graphics mode A maximum of 256 colors or 64 shades of gray are supported in VGA mode Composite video is not supported The graphics array is in the XGA mode only when enabled by the DOS Adapter Interface or other video device drivers example Microsoft Windows OS 2 and Presentation Manager device drivers The XGA and XGA 2 works with monochrome and color analog and direct drive displays The following table shows how the amount of video memory available affects the maximum color and resolution Trademark of the IBM Corporation Trademark of the Microsoft Corporation Hardware Maintenance Reference 401 Video Memory Resolution Colors Four modules 512KB 640 x 480 256 or 1024 x 768 16 Eight modules 1MB 640 x 480 65536 or 1024 x 768 256 The following are examples of the refresh rates supported at the various resolutions that are available with XGA 2 The software supplied with the XGA 2 subsystem automatically sets IBM displays at the best resolution and refresh rate possible with the hardware attached Frame Line Rate Rate IBM Resolution Hz KHz VNI Display Support Model 640 x 480 60 31 6 NI 7544 7554 8503 8504 8507 8512 8513 8514
236. dicator is on 2 Processor and computer hangs during POST See Undetermined Problems on page 183 3 Power Supply 62 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Beep Symptoms Beeps symptoms are short tones or a series of short tones separated by pauses intervals without sound X can be any number Examples Beeps Description 4 Four continuous beeps 1 2 X One beep A pause or break Two beeps A pause or break Any number of beeps Beep Symptom FRU Action 4 1 Video Adapter 2 System Board 1 1 3 1 Run Setup CMOS read write error 2 System Board 1 1 4 1 System Board ROM BIOS check error 1 2 X 1 System Board DMA error 1 3 1 1 System Board RAM refresh verification error 1 3 X 1 Memory Module not listed above 2 System Board The first 64KB RAM module failed 1 4 X 1 Memory Module An error was detected in the 2 System Board first 64KB of RAM 2 1 X 1 Memory Module The first 64KB of RAM 2 System Board failed 2 2 X 1 Memory Module The first 64KB of RAM 2 System Board failed 2 3 X 1 Memory Module The first 64KB of RAM 2 System Board failed 2 4 X 1 Memory Module The first 64KB of RAM 2 System Board failed 3 1 X 1 System Board The DMA register failed 3 2 4 1 System Board The keyboard controller 2 Keyboard failed Hardware Maintenance Service 63 Beep Symptom FRU Action 3 3 4 1 Video Adapter Screen initializ
237. disk drive ground strap 1 Handle screw 2 Baffle cover nut 6 Miscellaneous Parts Kit I O bracket 1 11 5 inch card holder 1 Flat cable clip 1 Miscellaneous Parts Kit Captive fastener washer 1 Knob assembly 4 Captive cover screw 1 Retainer fastener 1 302 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 39G6574 61X8915 72X7037 72X8525 72X8535 72X8562 72X8578 72X8579 72X8580 Miscellaneous Parts Kit AT bracket 3 79F3471 3 5mm hex head screw 9 Rubber foot 4 Christmas clip 1 Miscellaneous Parts Kit Low cost screw 1 79F7209 3 5mm hex head screw 6 MCA bracket 3 Rubber foot 4 Christmas clip 1 Miscellaneous Parts Kit Rubber foot 4 Power knob 1 Breakaway washer 1 Pawl bracket 1 92F0010 Pallet package ground 1 Miscellaneous Parts Kit Thumbscrew 2 Retainer clip 2 Ground clip 3 Bracket 5 3 5mm steel screw 10 I O bracket 5 Rubber foot 4 Finger ground 3 3mm screw 10 PS 2 Screw Kit 6 32 x 1 4 screws 4 Metric 3 x 5 screws 4 Metric 3 x 8 screws 4 Metric 3 x 10 screws 4 Metric 3 x 12 screws 4 Metric 3 5 x 6 screws 4 Metric 4 x 4 screws 4 Metric 4 x 8 screws 4 Metric 4 x 9 screws 4 Metric 4 x 10 screws 4 ID jumper 6 2 position jumper 6 Shunt with tab jumper 6 92F0015 92F0141 2 Hardware Maintenance Service 303 Power Cords Display Power Cord for Colombia U S Venezuela Sy
238. displays a 00017900 error Note If the system configuration is changed the system clears any logged errors associated with the hardware that is changed For example if the memory configuration was changed memory errors are cleared from the error log The conditions under which errors are automatically cleared vary with the type of hardware and the level of microcode installed Application If the system does not display a POST error or if diagnostics run error free but you still suspect a problem look at the error log If errors are detected they are displayed Press the help key and follow the instructions on the screen to help you determine what might be causing the failure Dumping Extended Diagnostic Data Information In cases where the system appears to have an undetectable intermittent failure analyzing the extended data information will help find the cause of the failure The support center might request that you dump this information onto a diskette Dump only the extended data by request of the support center To dump the extended data do the following 1 Format a scratch 2MB diskette 2 Restart the system from the Reference Diskette do not start from the System Partition or you will copy the data to the System Partition 3 From the Main Menu select Set Configuration and choose Change configuration 4 Remove the Reference Diskette from the drive 5 Insert the scratch 2MB diskette into the primary diske
239. drive is reduced by 50 percent Level 5 Duplicates data and parity of data across all drives in the array The capacity of the logical drive is figured by reducing the number of disk drives by one and dividing that figure by the number of drives in the array For example if 3 1GB disk drives configured to 1 array and 1 logical drive 3 minus 1 equals 2 divided by 3 the number of drives equals 2 3 so the Hardware Maintenance Reference 397 capacity of the logical drive all the drives in the array when configured as level 5 is 2GB Hot Spare Drive The hot spare drive is a drive in the system that the customer has defined for automatic use in the event of a drive failure If a drive fails the system automatically switches to the hot spare drive without loss of data If the system does not have a hot spare drive and you replace the failed drive the data on the failed drive is recreated from the rest of the drives in the array This drive must be setup by the customer Note When using the equations for determining the capacity of the drives for level 1 and level 5 arrays the capacity of the hot spare drive is not used Hot Spare Drive Replacement Note It is not necessary to power off the computer when replacing the Hot Spare drive in a Disk Array system To replace the drive do the following 1 Remove the front bezel 2 Insert a small coin into the slot of the small knob located on the left hand side
240. dry 10sse204d EEXAIBY saea 21 JequinN JequinN 5 usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 suondo 10ssoe20Jd 359 Hardware Maintenance Service 6990426 99 0526 101 Wy ge sp1eog 1055990014 x X 010426 I 8dA1 sugg gie X x 2010426 14 ued ANT X x 2010426 8002 1x Aiued ANT sp1eog 10sseoo4g z98X06 9 ed 96 5198 96 08 XSSS Or SE v298X06 55 982 92 SZ 10 5098 aInNpoy LE9BX HL 985 08 XSS7 982 52 Gz 10J ANL 0 99 2 9178358 104 yy EN LIS8XZL S 120 09 1 401 ainpoyy GMT IS E 962 6 982 08 XSse 982 92 SZ 104 oed 87992 08 9068X 19 E 39 09 OE 592 982 92 Gz 104 ainpoyy 87992 xssz 1212400 982 92 SZ 10 sen ZZN ILN einpow owanw gyro 0212400 5 982 92 SZ 10 ZWZ LINZ einpow gyro saea JequinN JequinN JequinN
241. e Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 170 After you configure the disk array you can complete setup by installing an operating system from the ServerGuide compact disc that was shipped with the server or from the diskettes that came with the operating system To install an operating system from the ServerGuide CD go to Using the CD ROM Drive and ServerGuide on page 152 RAID Technology RAID is the technology of grouping several hard disk drives in a server into an array that can be defined as a single logical drive This logical drive then appears to the operating system as a single physical drive This grouping technique greatly enhances logical drive capacity and performance In addition if one of the hard disk drives fails becomes defective the server continues to run with no operator intervention required at reduced performance The defective drive can be replaced without powering off the server hot swap For more information about hot swappable hard disk drives see Installing Internal Drives Type 86XX on page 176 Hard Disk Drive Capacities With a server it is important to understand the implications of hard disk drive capacities and how they influence the way you create disk arrays Drives in the disk array can be of different capacities For example if the model came with two 1GB hard disk drives and you install a 2GB hard disk drive to create a RAID 5 disk array the total capacity of
242. e DBA 85F0049 80MB Hard Disk Drive DBA 56F8892 160MB Hard Disk Drive DBA 56F8893 8 Hard Disk Drive Bezel 30MB 40MB 27F4177 8 Hard Disk Drive Bezel 27F4675 60MB 80MB 160MB Hard Disk Drive Cable 27F4669 80MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 54G0160 170MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 71G4958 170MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 95F4728 245MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 61G3754 245MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 92F0403 340MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 92F0404 420MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 71G4930 Hard Disk Drive Ribbon Cable 71G2662 for 95F4728 92F0403 92F04040 Hard Disk Drive Power Cable 71G2684 for 95F4728 92F0403 92F04040 Original Hard Disk Drive Cable 27F4669 Hardware Maintenance Service 245 Model 56 8556 Parts PS 2 Maintenance Manual 246 Index System Unit 56 1 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 Top Cover Assembly without lock Power Supply Cover Screw Thumbscrew Rear Panel Base Frame Assembly R Control Assembly Bus Adapter Support Speaker Assembly Power Switch Button Adapter Card Guide Cable Shield Control Assembly System Board 20 MHz no memory 56 SX 56 LS 56 SLC 56 SLC LS 2MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 4MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 8MB Memory Module Kit 70ns Processor Options 386SLC 486SLC2 486SLC3 60 20MHz Bus Adapter with battery Battery Retainer Plate 3 5 inch Diskette Drive Bezel 1 3 Ht 5 25 inch Blank Bezel 1 3 Ht 5 25 inch Blank Bezel 1 2 Ht
243. e SCSI devices hard disk CD ROM tape and so on connected to the RAID adapter Exit Leaves the Main Menu 158 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Viewing the RAID Configuration Before creating or changing a disk array you can look at the current configuration by selecting View Configuration from the Main Menu of the RAID configuration program To view the disk array configuration 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 2 Select View configuration The current disk array configuration information appears on the screen 3 Press Enter to see the stripe order in the Bays Occupied Ch Bay field 4 Press any key to continue 5 Press Esc to return to the Main Menu Performing Common Tasks The Create Delete Array menu of the RAID configuration program contains the more common tasks for configuring disk arrays Procedures to complete these tasks are contained in this section as follows Defining a Hot Spare Drive Deleting a Disk Array on page 160 Creating a Disk Array on page 161 Defining Logical Drives on page 162 Defining a Hot Spare Drive To define a drive as a hot spare drive 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 2 Select Create delete array from the Main Menu The Create Delete Array screen appears 3 Select Define hot spare drive The cursor wi
244. e device drivers See the README file on the RAID controller diskette Installing Internal Drives Type 86XX The Type 86XX server supports the following drive types Diskette Hard disk Rewritable optical disc Tape The server has hardware that lets you replace a failed hard disk drive without powering off the server Therefore you have the advantage of continuing to operate your system while a hard disk drive is removed or installed These drives are also known as hot swappable drives Hot swappable drives have a green LED that shines through the knob on the tray containing the drive If the drive has a good electrical connection upon installation the LED illuminates The LED blinks briefly during power up and also blinks if the drive malfunctions Internal drives are installed in bays A diskette drive and a CD ROM drive are preinstalled in bay A in all models A removable CD storage compartment is shipped in bay B1 You can install two drives in bay B You can install hot swappable hard disk drives in banks C D and E only Banks C D and E each contain six bays Bank C supports up to six drives However the total number of SCSI drives that you can install in bay B and bank C is six Novell is a trademark of Novell Inc Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation 176 PS 2 Maintenance Manual The number of preinstalled hard disk drives in bank C varies according to the model you purchased You
245. e 111 Note Before replacing a display check the following 8506 and 8508 displays must be connected to an Image adapter 63XX and 85XX systems support either 63XX or 85XX displays 85XX systems with an XGA 2 adapter support 95XX displays 95XX systems support either 63XX 85XX or 95XX displays If the screen is rolling replace the display assembly If that does not correct the problem replace FRUs in the following order until the problem goes away 1 Display adapter any type 2 System board 3 Bus adapter if used If the screen is not rolling do the following Power off the computer and display Disconnect the display signal cable Power on the display Turn the contrast to its maximum position Turn the brightness control to the center position Pe oo ice a Check for the following conditions You should be able to vary the screen intensity by adjusting the contrast and brightness controls The screen should be white or light gray with a black margin test margin on the screen Note The location of the test margin varies with the type of display The test margin might be on the top bottom or one or both sides If you do not see any test margin on the screen replace the display If there is a test margin on the screen replace the FRUs in the following order until the problem goes away Note Certain adapter failures can cause video problems Before replacing any FRUs remove
246. e Cover Lock Plug Option Index DASD 18 282 2 88MB Diskette Drive with slide Diskette Drive Cable for 64F0204 Diskette Drive Slide 1 3 Ht 540MB 1 3 Ht Hard Disk Drive Assembly Address Cable with tape for 92F0406 540MB 1 3 Ht Hard Disk Drive Assembly with tray cable 1GB 1 3 Ht Hard Disk Drive Address Cable with tape for 92F0428 Blank Tray for 92F0428 1GB 1 3 Ht Hard Disk Drive Assembly with tray cable 3 5 Inch 127MB Rewritable Optical Drive Drive Mounting Slide for 92F0167 2 Feature Bezel 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel 5 25 Framing Bezel CD ROM Drive amp II Bezel Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel PS 2 Maintenance Manual 33F6853 61G3528 92F0099 96F9199 33F8435 61G3841 61G3842 64F0204 92F0283 64F0156 92F0406 61G3833 61G3525 92F0428 61G3834 61G3832 61G3828 92F0167 85F0022 64F0168 64F4103 33F8459 64F0138 85F0018 33F8426 Index Cables 9595A 1 2 3 4 ou SCSI Drive Cable Assembly for 4 drives SCSI Drive Cable Assembly for 3 drives Diskette Drive Signal Cable Operator Panel Cable connects to system board Hard Disk Drive Power Cable for 3 drives Hard Disk Drive Power Cable for 4 drives Operator Panel Cable connects to processor card 61G3524 61G3523 92F0283 92F0239 61G3521 61G3522 61G3817 Hardware Maintenance Service 283 20 and 25 Mhz Processor Boards For SX models you can install an opti
247. e Symptom FRU Action Arithmetic Functions Failed An error was detected during the CPU Test 1 Microprocessor 2 System Board 66 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Error Message Symptom FRU Action Base Memory Test Failed An error was detected in base memory Memory Module 2 System Board Boot Sector Unreadable A boot sector read error was detected on the hard disk drive Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Cable 3 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board Bus Noise Test Failed The RAM Test detected an error in the memory bus Memory Module 2 System Board Butterfly Cylinder Access Test Failed The Hard Disk Drive Test detected mismatch between the data read and the data stored on the drive Hard Disk Drive Hard Disk Drive Cable 3 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 4 System Board Clock Stopped The real time clock has stopped working 1 Real Time Clock Assembly 2 System Board CMOS Clock Test Failed The Time and Date Settings for CMOS and DOS do not Match 1 Real Time Clock Assembly 2 System Board Controller Diagnostic Test Failed An error was detected while testing the Hard Disk Controller Adapter 1 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed Hard Disk Drive 3 System Board Controller does not respond to commands no logical drive installed RAID Adapter 2 System Board
248. e Tests from the next menu 4 Use the up and down arrow keys and to move the highlight bar from one selection to the next 5 Follow the instructions on the screen Note As you scroll down the selection menu the Test Group window to the right changes to correspond to the highlighted Module Running Selected Module Tests To run all selected tests for a test group 1 Use the up and down arrow keys and to move the cursor to your selection 2 Press Enter Note appears next to your selection Running All Selected Modules To run all selected test modules 1 Use the down arrow key to move the cursor to the last choice Run All Selected Modules 2 Press Enter Note appears next to your selection Changing Selected Tests in Test Groups To change selected tests in a Test Group 1 In the Module Tests Menu use the up and down arrow keys and to move the cursor to your selection 2 Press Tab to move into the expanded Test Group window 3 Scroll to the test you want to select or deselect Warning Items indicated by a directly adjacent red text on color screens are destructive tests 4 Press the spacebar at the highlighted test to toggle between select indicated by and deselect 392 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Note Pressing the first letter of a test does not activate the test unlike menu operation 5 Press Enter Running an Individual Test To run an i
249. e computer do the following If you use Card and Socket Services or only Socket services you can edit the CONFIG SYS file and comment out the Card and Socket Services device statements these statements are determined by the type of computer Then press Ctrl Alt Del to restart the computer If the problem persists refer to the following procedure If you use neither Card and Socket Services edit the NET CFG file and add R C to the following statement Enabler c xxxx IBMWLENA EXE where is a memory zone between C000 to in multiples of 100 and xxxx is the directory where the IBM Wireless LAN has been installed for example NWCLIENT Then press Ctrl Alt Del to restart the computer Note If you are using only Socket Services you can edit the CONFIG SYS file and add the Card Services device statement Hardware Maintenance Service 101 Interrupt Level or I O Address Conflicts Note This section applies only to PCMCIA Type II slot wireless workstations Interrupt levels or I O address conflicts may occur after you install the IBM Wireless LAN software on a workstation If this happens you can resolve the conflict by changing the value of the interrupt level or the I O address used by the IBM Wireless LAN adapter To do so refer to the following procedures In a Netware environment for DOS and Windows workstations edit the NET CFG file and specify the following stateme
250. e if prior experience indicates that problems are likely to exist in a 390 PS 2 Maintenance Manual specific area of memory By selecting these limiting parameters you reduce memory testing time Scripting Scripting allows you to select specific groups of tests testing parameters and options Your selection is saved for later use as a test Script To set up a test script first select all the appropriate test groups and specific tests you want to run from the Module Testing section under Diagnostics You should also select appropriate testing parameters and options See Program Navigation on page 389 for instructions to save a test script Changing Logical Unit Numbers In some instances you can have more than one logical unit number LUN for a particular module LUNs represent individual devices within a test group or module For example you might have two diskette drives or two hard disk drives or you might have base extended shadow and cache memory installed in the computer This configuration might result in as many as four or five different LUNs in the Memory Test Group Or you might have base extended shadow and cache memory installed in the system which might result in as many as four or five different LUNs in the Memory Test Group From either the Module Test Menu or the Test Group window you can change to a different LUN where applicable by pressing the plus key next LUN or the minus key prev
251. e into the diskette drive then rerun the test 2 Diskette Drive The Address Exceeds The Size Of Your Memory An invalid memory address was entered The Diagnostics Tests display this message during the Locate Bad Chips option under the interact menu if an invalid memory address was entered at the at the Enter Memory Address Of Bad Chip prompt 3 System Board 4 Diskette Drive Cable Miscellaneous Error Messages Message Symptom FRU Action 1 Enter correct address 2 Memory Module 3 System Board 72 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Message Symptom FRU Action That Number is Out Of Range An invalid bit number was entered The Diagnostics Tests display this message during the Locate Bad Chips option under the interact menu if an invalid bit number was entered at the Enter the Bad Bit prompt Enter correct number 2 Memory Module 3 System Board You Cannot Delete the Motherboard The Remove Board option was selected The Diagnostics Tests display this message during the Locate Bad Chips option under the interact menu if the Remove Board option was selected while the system board was displayed 1 Make the correct selection Memory Module System Board Processor PDS Hardware Maintenance Service 73 Network Service Procedures The following section provides switch settings and testing procedures for the Token Ring and Ethernet network adapters
252. e last array created must be the first deleted r Warning All the data and programs in the array are lost during this procedure Before proceeding back up any data and programs that you want to save To delete a disk array 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 2 Select Create delete array from the Main Menu 3 Select Delete disk array from the Create Delete Array menu The cursor will be active in the Array list 4 Review the Date Created column in the Logical Drive list then press the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the most recently defined array 5 Press Del The Confirm pop up window appears 6 If you do not want to delete the array select No To delete the array select Yes Note To use hard disks from the existing array when creating a new array you must confirm the deletion of the existing array If a defective drive is still in a bay the status shows a blank bay as though there is no drive in that bay When you replace the drive the status will show RDY after you reconfigure and select Yes in the Confirm pop up window 160 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Note In some operating systems deleting an array and associated logical drives might change the drive letters assigned to the existing drives Creating a Disk Array To create a disk array 1 Start the RAID configuratio
253. e of 1 5X the peak input voltage superimposed at the peak of the input voltage applied 100 times at 3 second intervals Power supplies will not be damaged if any of the following occurs A 100 power outage of any duration A brownout A 2 5kV spike is applied to the AC input for example a lightning strike or a lightning simulation test Hardware Maintenance Reference 423 Surge Protection External surge suppressors are not required on PS 2 systems The systems are designed to resist typical power surges More severe surge levels are possible but the probability is quite low A defective external surge suppression device can cause intermittent system failures No design or performance standards have been established for these devices and there is no easy way to test them If the system has undetectable intermittent failures and there is a surge suppressor installed try operating the system without the surge suppressor Safety All PS 2 power supplies are designed to world safety requirements such as UL CSA IEC and Nordic Current Leakage All PS 2 power supplies have an extremely low leakage to ground rating of 500 microamps This is especially important if you are using an outlet that has a defective or missing ground line Reliability PS 2 power supplies have demonstrated field failures approaching 500 000 hours before failure Uninterruptible Power Devices Uninterruptible power devices are designed to supply continuous
254. e screen after it is off for twenty minutes It is possible for a display to cause diskette drive read write errors if the drive and the display are too close Distance between displays and diskette drives should be at least 3 inches r Warning You can damage the display or adapter if you do not power off the display and computer before connecting or disconnecting the display cable This is especially important when using the XGA 2 subsystem because displays of varied refresh rates are supported Reconnect the display cable before powering on the computer because the display type and the appropriate refresh rate is determined during POST After POST any display change is not detected Hardware Maintenance Service 111 Fax Modem Checkout 001 Power off the computer Ensure that the modem is installed correctly Ensure that the public switch telephone network PSTN cable and the data access arrangement DAA cable if installed are connected correctly If you need to correct one of the above conditions do so now then continue Power on the computer Insert the IBM Data FAX Modem diskette into the default diskette drive If you are servicing a High Speed Internal Data Fax Modem Models FC3632 and FC3650 at the DOS prompt for example A type IBMDIAG then press Enter If you are servicing a PCMCIA Data FAX Modem Models FC3634 and FC3635 at the DOS prompt for example
255. e sub menus that are highlighted with red letters CAUTION If selected these test will erase the information stored on the diskette or hard disk drive Up and Main Menu Highlights an item you want to Down Module Test select Arrow Menu Keys Test Group Menu Space Module Test Adds a diamond to the left of Bar Menu the highlighted test The test Test Group will run when Run All Menu Selected is highlighted and the Enter key is pressed Also removes the diamond to the left of the item The test will not run when Run All Selected is highlighted and the Enter key is pressed Tab Main Menu Selects the additional test for Key Module Test the menu you are in Menu Test Group Selects additional test The Keys Menu LUN displayed on the top right Test Group Menu shows which test is selected and how and remain example LUN 1 of 2 Disk Array System The IBM PS 2 Server 95A comes with an IBM RAID Controller installed This controller features the implementation of RAID redundant array of inexpensive disks technology In this manual the word array is used to mean collection of hard disk drives over which data is striped 396 5 2 Maintenance Manual Striping is the process of storing data across all the drives that are installed in the array The IBM PS 2 Server 95A supports up to two different arrays Each array collection of physical drives is recognized as one or more logical drives
256. e system board On some IBM PS 2 system boards the vital product data VPD is rewritable When replacing a system board that has rewritable VPD the system unit serial number must be recorded on the new system board Use the following procedure to record the system unit serial number on the new system board 1 Power on the computer 2 During POST press F1 3 When the cursor moves to the lower left hand corner press F1 Select item 8 More Utilities Select item 4 Set System Identification Select item 1 Set System Identification Type the system unit serial number in the entry field then press Enter The system unit serial number will be stored in the EPROM on the system board To verify that the serial number is properly stored in the EPROM select View System Configuration 184 PS 2 Maintenance Manual System Board Locations Model 25 System Board Type 1 Parallel port J3 Serial port J5 Pointing device connector J1 Keyboard connector J2 Earphone connector Keylock connector J10 Bus adapter connector J6 Hard disk drive connector J11 Fan connector J8 1 Power connector J7 11 Display connector J4 12 Memory module package 1 13 512KB memory 49 14 Memory module package 2 15 Optional memory module ZM2 16 Optional memory module U34 17 Optional memory module 035 18 Optional memory module U22 19 Optional memory module U16 2 Optional memory module ZM1 21 8086 Microprocessor 22
257. ect Connect 25 pin ports 0 1 Wrap Plug for Multiport Interface Cable Direct Connect 25 pin ports 2 7 308 5 2 Maintenance Manual 33F8464 34F0025 57F2870 61X1769 61X8936 85F0036 84F8207 85F0037 38F 4684 64F4126 6110464 6138013 42G2565 95F3598 92F0142 92F0143 72X8547 61X1769 75X5893 07F2518 91F9161 72X8546 4178459 6165899 16F2478 6425494 09F1799 Wireless LAN Adapter ISA Micro Channel Bus Index Wireless LAN ISA Micro Channel Bus 1 d nana Radio Module Australia Radio Module EMEA Non Europe Radio Module ETSI Countries Radio Module Hong Kong Radio Module Israel Radio Module Japan Radio Module Korea New Zealand Radio Module Mexico Radio Module Singapore Radio Module US Canada Non EMEA IBM Wireless LAN Control Card IBM Wireless LAN Control Card No Cipher 1 5 m cable 4 m cable 80G2708 80G2714 80G2702 80G2707 80G2710 80G2703 80G2704 80G2705 80G2709 80G2701 80G2700 80G2711 80G2713 54G2016 Hardware Maintenance Service 309 Wireless LAN Adapter PCMCIA Type Index Wireless LAN PCMCIA Type II 1 Radio Module Australia 80G2733 1 Radio Module EMEA Non Europe 80G2731 1 Radio Module ETSI Countries 80G2727 1 Radio Module Hong Kong 80G2732 1 Radio Module Japan 80G2728 1 Radio Module Korea New Zealand 80G2729 1 Radio Module Mexico 80G2730 1 Radio Module Singapore 80G2734 1 Radio Module US Canada Non EM
258. ector J1 Keyboard connector J2 Memory packs J9 Optional memory packs J10 Hard disk drive connector J11 Power supply connector J7 Power supply connector J14 Display connector J4 Password override connector J13 80286 Microprocessor connector Clock module connector ZM35 Math coprocessor connector ZM1 Diskette drive connector J12 E rtm db ET ERE o o E E E F 14 EEN 321 Hardware Maintenance Service 187 Model 25 SX System Board Parallel port Pointing device connector Keyboard connector Serial port External display port not on Hard disk power connector Power supply connector J12 amp J13 Diskette drive connector Internal display connector 1 Hard disk drive connector 11 Memory module connector 12 Math coprocessor socket 13 Password override connector J2 14 socket 15 Bus adapter connector Q0 5 0 A f Ea en Ed C J T bg dl age EH 10 188 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 30 System Board Display connector Serial port Bus adapter connector Parallel port Pointing device connector Keyboard connector Power supply connector 8086 Microprocessor connector Math coprocessor connector 1 Keylock connector
259. ee Error Code Format on page 115 Servicing LAN Stations Workstations Before you attempt to run the diagnostic tests on computers with no diskette drive have the LAN administrator make the Diagnostic Diskette image available and bootable from the server Software Hardware Mismatch Problems If a failure appears to be the result of a defective FRU but the diagnostic tests run error free there might be a software and hardware mismatch These problems might be intermittent and they can be difficult to diagnose If you are experiencing this type of problem and the operating system is of the direct driver variety which bypasses the BIOS interface such as AIX Netware SCO XENIX Some windowing interfaces Other Unix based software the most likely cause of the problem is a mismatch between the software and the hardware Applications that use the Multiprotocol Adapter A magnetic tape drives and some SCSI devices such as CD ROM require direct software drivers There is no BIOS interface for these devices in PS 2 products Netware is a trademark of Novell Inc SCO is a trademark of Santa Cruz Operations Inc XENIX is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation Hardware Maintenance Service 181 The following information is provided to help you resolve these problems Software Hardware Compatibility Direct driver software is sensitive to variations in hardware design The resulting incompatibili
260. efining Logical Drives on page 162 Create another array now by repeating steps 2 through 5 in this procedure then define logical drives for both arrays Hardware Maintenance Service 161 Note You must define at least one logical drive for each created array before you can exit the configuration program Continue with Defining Logical Drives Adding Drives to Create an Additional Array To add storage capacity to your server without disturbing existing data 1 2 3 Install the additional hard disk drive or drives See Installing Internal Drives Type 86XX on page 176 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 Create a new disk array and define logical drives see Creating a Disk Array on page 161 for additional information Defining Logical Drives After you have created an array you must define a logical drive You cannot leave the RAID configuration program until you define the logical drives for any created arrays To define a logical drive 15 162 Select Define Logical drive from the Create Delete Array menu The Create Delete Array menu screen appears the cursor is active in the Array list Use the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the array you want to define then press Enter The Select RAID Level pop up window appears and the cursor is active in the window Note The sy
261. eidepy 4 a X 0 92 6 OvS2xr6 X x 9811579 9700 26 118d peysim jeidepy saea ainpayyoy sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN paepueis usnpul uondo nua 94njee4 315 Hardware Maintenance Service 8 6 8 8076048 MN epeued Sn LO98HOL VIDNDd SSE6HOL xeJ ejeq VIOWOd 2001979 7000498 ny 28929026 Jejdepy Ov ASLL 9892926 Je geu3 615 906 Jejqeu3 298 1497 7610495 7 2768426 1768526 Jejdepy x x x 9595928 Jejdepy NASI x 268420 9 uondo NASI 9768420 uondo NASI x m 824Zdvv 052 457 Z Z 10S58901d00 NASI x 804 4 vvaldby Z JOPOW Z 10S58001d00 NASI 5 x 660 954 5525954 274 YSI x z vE6SHYO egeo saea sng Ly JequinN JequinN JequinN
262. eld values indicating software problems lt 20H Sense key value returned by a device Additional sense byte byte 12 of sense information from device Device error code field of command complete status block Device errors not normally considered an error but considered an error based on when the code was returned medium corrupted error on device with non removable media Test Status Codes Information Not applicable for error code Adapter initialization error Adapter reset Adapter register test Adapter buffer test phase 1 on cached adapters Adapter buffer test phase 2 on cached adapters Adapter buffer test phase 3 on cached adapters Adapter buffer test phase 4 on cached adapters gt Adapter buffer enable buffer size retry enable Device assignment sequence c Device not ready initial unit attention clearing 120 PS 2 Maintenance Manual T Information K Device reset L Device starting phase M Device in process of starting N Device block size determination Device self test P Device single block read LBA Q Device double block read LBA 5 Error occurred after device testing completed Hardware Maintenance Service 121 Identifying Adapters Adapters can usually be identified by examining the adapter and looking for special chi
263. em boards the vital product data VPD is rewritable When replacing a system board that has rewritable VPD the system unit serial number must be recorded on the new system board Use the following procedure to record the system unit serial number on the new system board 1 Power on the computer 2 During POST press F1 3 When the cursor moves to the lower left hand corner press F1 Select item 8 More Utilities Select item 4 Set System Identification Select item 1 Set System Identification Type the system unit serial number in the entry field then press Enter Loos The system unit serial number will be stored in the EPROM on the system board To verify that the serial number is properly stored in the EPROM select View System Configuration Upgradable POST and BIOS Server 85 and Server 95 and 95A have electronically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM modules sometimes referred to as Flash memory on the system board These modules contain the power on self test POST routines and the Basic Input Output System BIOS instructions The customer can upgrade the POST and BIOS code by loading a POST BIOS Update Diskette The customer should follow the instructions included with the diskette to copy the new information to the flash EEPROMs on the System board Note If the customer installs an option that requires an upgrade to the POST and BIOS information have the customer contact their Authorize
264. ement 83G7917 S83G 7917 PS 2 HMM Supplement 83G8084 S83G 8084 PS 2 OBI Supplement 83G8092 S83G 8092 PS 2 OBI Supplement 83G8983 S83G 8983 Trademark of the IBM Corporation PS 2 Maintenance Manual Contents Related Publications Obsolete Publications Hardware Maintenance Service FRU Replacement Strategy Hard Disk Drive Replacement Strategy Introduction sats Lar bredte BAN Re ee General Checkout AT Bus Memory Problems 8086 Computers Memory Problems 80286 to 80486 Computers Memory Problems PC Server 8640 Installed Devices List Symptom to FRU Index Bus No Beep Symptoms Beep Symptoms Miscellaneous Symptoms Numeric Error Codes General Checkout Micro Channel Devices List Missing Non SCSI Device Missing SCSI Device Missing SCSI and Non SCSI Devices System Error Log Viewing the System Error Log Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel No Beep Symptoms Beep Symptoms Audio Symptoms Miscellaneous Symptoms Numeric Error Codes IML IPL Errors Checking Startup Sequence and Hard Disk Drive General Checkout QAPIus
265. emory module connector 1 Memory module connector 2 Diskette drive connector 80387SX Math coprocessor connector Real time clock module connector 2KB CMOS RAM extension connector 81 Bus adapter connector b db db d 0000000 000000 5 000000000000000000000000000060000000 09000000000000000000000000000p000000 0000000000000000000000000000 09000000000000000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000d0000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 HIR ARAM 1 May not be present on all system boards 196 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 55 486SLC2 System Board Upgrade Power supply connector P7 Password override jumper J11 Power supply connector P14 Hard disk drive power connector Memory module connectors AT IDE hard disk drive connector Diskette drive cable connector Video memory connectors Pointing device connector Eu d b d e sees n i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Coprocessor connector 9 Processor connector 1 Bus adapter connector 11 12 CD ROM connector 13 Video connector 14 Serial connector 15 Parallel connector 16 Keyboard connector 17 1 eb El Et
266. emory module kit connectors J4 to J1 on the Model 90 memory riser cards The riser cards plug into system board connectors J11 and J14 The system supports up to 64MB of memory but the amount of memory accessed might be limited by the operating system J4 J3 J2 J1 Model 95 Memory The figure below shows the location of the memory module kit connectors B1 to A4 on the Model 95 System board The system board has eight connectors for system board memory module kits The system supports up to 64MB of memory on the system board but the amount of memory accessed might be limited by the operating system I I I I I I I 1 B3 B4 A1 A2 A4 406 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Whenever memory is added to or removed from the system run Automatic configuration from the Main Menu of the system programs Note If memory fails and the customer runs diagnostics the defective memory is disabled When you run diagnostics the system will indicate the amount of memory that is enabled After the defective memory is replaced run the advanced diagnostic memory test to enable the replacement memory Memory Configurations 90 95 Interleaved configurations require matched pairs of memory module kits The size an
267. en the computer is powered off for 8 seconds or more and then powered on the power supply generates a power good signal that resets system logic The presence of the power good signal turns on the green power on light on the front of the system indicating that the power supply is functioning correctly Power Supply Features Most PS 2 power supplies support the following features Operating Voltage Range PS 2 power supplies can be operated continuously over the following ranges 100V Range 90 to 137 VAC and 200V Range 180 to 265 VAC with a sine wave input with maximum 5 total harmonic distortion On some models the power supply automatically switches to the required voltage and on others there is a manual switch No Load Operation All PS 2 power supplies are designed to operate at No Output Load Over Current Protection All PS 2 power supplies have output over current protection If more than a safe current is pulled from any output on the power supply the power supply shuts down until the on off switch is recycled Short Circuit Protection All PS 2 power supplies have protection from shorts being placed between an output and ground or between two outputs This prevents damage to the power supply if a fault occurs in the system The power supply shuts down until the on off switch is recycled Over Voltage Protection All PS 2 power supplies have protection from output over voltage Before any voltage exceed
268. ens Bezel 3 5 Blank Keylock Pawl and Rod Keylock Assembly with keys Speaker Fan Assembly with Connector Card Guide Shield 3 5 EMC Pedestal Drive Cage 3 5 Diskette Drive see DASD Hard Disk Drive see DASD Power Supply 300W with Switch System Board Pentium without Memory and Processor Processor Chip Pentium 60MHz System Board 486 without Memory and Processor Processor Chip 486DX2 66 4MB Memory SIMM Parity 8MB Memory SIMM Parity 16MB Memory SIMM Parity 32MB Memory SIMM Parity L2 Cache Memory 486 Real Time Clock with Battery Pentium Real Time Clock with Battery 486 Heat Sink with Clip Pentium Heat Sink with Clip Keyboard with Cable Power Cord SCSI 2 Fast PCI Bus Adapter Spring I O EMC SVGA Card AP and EMEA only VGA Card Miscellaneous Parts Kit EMC Gasket Keyboard Mouse 1 each EMC Ground Contacts 4 each I O Blank 1 each Nut Screws 4 40 2 each Power Switch Bracket 1 each Screws 6X32X5 16 6 each Screws 3x8mm Plastite 3 each Screws 3mm Diskette Drive 2 each Screws 6 32 Hard Disk Drive 2 each System Board Edge Support 1 each PS 2 Maintenance Manual 71G0764 06H2652 71G0032 71G0765 06H2191 71G0771 71G0767 71G0770 71G0769 33F8433 06H2649 06H2647 71G0757 71G0758 71G0763 71G0768 71G0044 71G0747 06H2680 71G0033 06H2679 73G3233 73G3234 60G2950 73G3235 92G7431 06H3397 06H3398 06H2179 06H2180 71G4646 6
269. error information 2 System Board transmitted is not the same as information received Serial Time out Error COM Port error time interval is too long between transmitted and received data Serial Port Cable 2 System Board Serious Memory Error Diags Cannot Continue Memory Test error Memory Module 2 System Board Sorry You Need A Mouse The mouse or mouse driver was not detected Mouse 2 System Board Hardware Maintenance Service 71 Error Message Symptom FRU Action System Hangs 1 Any device See Undetermined 2 Any adapter Problems on page 183 3 System Board Too Many Errors Test Aborted Too many errors the Diagnostics Test cannot continue Microprocessor System Board Transmit Error Internal or external serial port loopback test failure Serial Port Cable 2 System Board Video Adapter Failed Test Result Summary displayed if Fail was at the Quit Fail Pass menu of any video test Video Adapter 2 System Board 3 Display Write error on cylinder n Hard disk drive write error Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed Write Errors Diskette drive write error Diskette Diskette Drive System Board Diskette Drive Cable PER Write Protected or Unformatted The diskette is Write Protected or not formatted 1 Insert a non write protected formatted diskett
270. ese are specific QEET error codes preceded by a DDD indicating an adapter Note A number in slot S indicates an error on the adapter or device attached to the adapter in slot S If S is 0 suspect the system board QEET Information 001x 8032 80188 80C186 ROM test failure 002x Local RAM test failure 003x Bad fuse or bad termination or local RAM address failure SCSI adapter if RDDD is 0112 004x Internal peripheral test failure 005x Buffer control chip test failure or LTB failed or system board SCSI failed if RDDD is 0037 006x Undefined error condition or buffer RAM test failure on SCSI adapter if RDDD is 0096 007x System interface control chip test failure 008x SCSI internal interface test failed 00 SCSI external interface test failed 107x Adapter hardware failure 10Cx Command failed 10Ex Command error invalid command or parameter 10Fx Sequencing error 110x Adapter internal error log contains entries Reported if no other errors on adapter exist 180x Time out 181x Adapter busy error 182x Unexpected interrupt presented by adapter 183x Adapter register test failure 184x Adapter reset failure 185x Adapter buffer test failure on cached adapters 186x Adapter reset count expired 187x Adapter registers not cleared on reset 188x Card ID in adapter microcode did not match ID in POS registers
271. ettes that you need to complete the installation procedure T e Get the 1MB and 2MB 3 5 inch diskettes that you will use to create diskettes from the diskette images on the main ServerGuide CD Select Utility Programs Select Diskette Factory Select IBM SVGA Support Diskettes and follow the instructions on the screen to create both video device drivers diskettes The remaining steps depend on whether or not the Server is a disk array model If the server is not a disk array model continue with Diskette Factory and select IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide Support Diskette Follow the instructions on the screen to create a SCSI 2 device drivers diskette When you are finished go to Non Disk Array Models Only If the server is a disk array model continue with Disk Array Models Only Disk Array Models Only Continue with Diskette Factory 1 Select IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide Streaming RAID Adapter A Option Diskette Follow the instructions on the screen and create the IBM RAID controller diskette Press the CD ROM tray release button to release the tray from the server Remove the CD from the CD ROM tray and push the tray back into the server Go to Configuring the Disk Array Type 86XX on page 154 and become familiar with that information then do the following a Follow the instructions to configure the disk array see Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 b Follow the instructions to back up the disk array c
272. evels IRQ 91 introduction checkout procedures 2 IRQ interrupt levels 91 ISA PS ValuePoint 10BASE T 10BASE2 Ethernet adapters 90 ISA PS ValuePoint Ethernet adapter features diskette 90 isolate failures using SCSI ID 181 J Japanese keyboards parts 299 jumper password override 376 jumpers option microprocessor 76 77 130 override functions 378 remote power on 95 150 setting motor start 414 settings hard disk drive ATA 371 K keep remove enabled disabled settings 180 keyboard keyboard connector 404 keyboard connector and pointing device connector 404 keyboard voltages checking 123 keyboards parts 298 keybutton kits parts 299 L LAN workstations servicing 181 leakage current 424 LEDs processor boards with diagnostic 135 LEDs processor boards without diagnostic 135 lens cleaning procedure 413 level determining DOS CSD version 108 level determining OS 2 version 108 levels IRQ interrupt 91 456 5 2 Maintenance Manual list installed devices AT 11 list installed devices Micro Channel 23 location determining failing memory 125 locations system board 185 lock cover 375 lock PCMCIA pc card override 134 log system error 25 433 loop microphone input 108 low level format program using 129 MAPs AT bus 3 memory problems 80286 to 80486 9 memory problems 8086 6 Micro Channel 19 matrix drive and diskette compatibility 370 options and adapters 311 memory address conf
273. faction Center TDD ASCIl IBM Dealer Referral typewriters printers IBM Direct supplies education IBM Field Television Network IBM Information Referral Service IBM Service IBM Technical Manuals Multimedia Information Center Multimedia Support Multivendor Consulting OS 2 Information Line OS 2 Support Center OS 2 Support Line Parts Information Prodigy Service link problems Prodigy User Questions PS 2 Trade In Program PS 2 Loan for Learning PS 2 Lease from IBM Credit Trademark of the IBM Corporation Trademark of the Prodigy Services Company Hardware Maintenance Reference 443 Number Information 1 800 742 2943 Solution Validation Lab 1 800 547 1283 Technical Coordinator Program SystemXtra for Personal Systems LAN Automated Distribution 2 OS 2 Bulletin Board OS 2 Application Assistance Center 1 800 426 2622 Technical Services Boca Raton fee 1 606 323 3000 Technical Support typewriters printers 1 800 551 2832 Technical Solutions Magazine IBM Canada Customer and Servicer Support Number Information 1 800 465 6600 Customer Relations 416 474 6666 Customer Relations Toronto 1 800 465 6666 Customer Service Dispatch 1 800 263 2769 Customer Service Parts 1 800 465 2222 Customer Support Centre ISC 416 443 5701 Customer Service Repair Centre 1 800 465 1234 Helpcentre 1 800 465 7999 HelpClub Registration 1 800 465 7999 IBM Direct 1 800 263 2769 Parts Orders Exchange or Emergency
274. for definition TAP Tape drive installed UFM Unformatted The drive requires a low level format before it can be used in an array Blank Status Any of the following circumstances can cause the status area to be blank No hard disk drive is installed in that bay The bay contains a hard disk drive but the drive is not inserted correctly An array was deleted and a defective drive is still in the bay A new drive was installed and the configuration program has not been restarted The status will change to RDY when the RAID configuration program is restarted Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure Depending on the circumstances there can be several possible results from a drive failure Example 1 Only one hard disk drive fails A hot spare drive is defined that is the same or greater size than the failed drive The logical drives in the array are assigned RAID level 1 level 5 or a combination of these two levels Then the hot spare will take over immediately Note Data for logical drives assigned RAID levels 1 and 5 is maintained however system performance will be reduced Hot spare drive capability does not apply to logical drives assigned RAID level 0 Example 2 Only one hard disk drive fails A hot spare drive is not defined The logical drives in the array are assigned RAID levels 1 5 or a combination of these two levels 166 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Then no data will be
275. for you Do not perform any action that causes hazards to the customer or that makes the equipment unsafe Before you start the machine ensure that other service representatives and the customer s personnel are not in a hazardous position Place removed covers and other parts in a safe place away from all personnel while you are servicing the machine Keep your tool case away from walk areas so that other people will not trip over it Do not wear loose clothing that can be trapped in the moving parts of a machine Ensure that your sleeves are fastened or rolled up above your elbows If your hair is long fasten it Insert the ends of your necktie or scarf inside clothing or fasten it with a nonconductive clip approximately 8 centimeters 3 inches from the end Do not wear jewelry chains metal frame eyeglasses or metal fasteners for your clothing Remember Metal objects are excellent conductors Wear safety glasses when you are Hammering Drilling Soldering Cutting wire Attaching springs Using solvents Working in any other conditions that might be hazardous to your eyes Hardware Maintenance Reference 365 After service reinstall all safety shields guards labels and ground wires Replace any safety device that is worn or defective Reinstall all covers correctly before returning the machine to the customer Electrical Safety Observe the following rules when working on electrical
276. g Audio Output Tone Tone Select this item from the Main Menu to test the right and left audio output channels of the control panel assembly The test allows you to choose the frequency and amplitude of the tone To start the oscillator select Oscillator Start or press Alt O To change the frequency and amplitude of the tone select Change Oscillator Values or press Alt V Microphone Input Loop Loop Select this item from the Main Menu to test the microphone input from the audio adapter and control panel assembly To start the test select Mic into R and L Out or press Alt Z Microphone Gain Toggle Toggle Select this item to toggle between the high and low gain settings on the audio adapter To toggle between the settings select Mic Gain or press Alt M CSD DOS Version Level Check Many problems with DOS are fixed by Corrective Service Diskettes CSD If you think that the problem you are experiencing has been fixed by a CSD check the CSD version level To determine the CSD level on the computer you are servicing type VER at the DOS prompt then press Enter CSD OS 2 Version Level Check To determine the OS 2 level on the computer you are servicing type SYSLEVEL at the OS 2 prompt then press Enter Combined FRUs Diagnostics If an adapter or device consists of more than one FRU for example a card plugged into an adapter an error code might be caused by either FRU Before you replace a multi FRU adapter or dev
277. g address Hardware Maintenance Reference 403 Parallel Port Note If you experience a problem with a non IBM device when attaching it to either the parallel port you might need to go to the Change configuration screen of the system programs and set the port DMA direct memory access arbitration level to Disabled The parallel ports allow the attachment of devices that accept 8 bits of parallel data at standard transistor transistor logic TTL levels The port has a D shell connector and is designed primarily for printers However the port can be used as an input output port for any device or application that matches the input output capabilities of the port When adapters with additional parallel ports are installed the system supports multiple devices each addressed separately as PARALLEL 1 PARALLEL 2 PARALLEL 3 or PARALLEL 4 depending on the model Conflicts occur when using multiple devices if two or more devices are addressed the same Select the Set configuration option from the system programs Select View configuration to verify that no lines are addressed the same Note If a conflict occurs an asterisk appears next to the conflicting address Supported Cables Only IBM manufactured cables in the lengths supplied by IBM are tested and supported on PS 2 systems The performance of non IBM and locally fabricated cables are the customer s or supplier s responsibility Using non IBM cables on displays serial p
278. g hard disk drive 56 checking keyboard voltages 123 checking power supply voltages 138 checking startup sequence 56 checkout fax modem 112 checkout procedures AT bus 3 introduction 2 Micro Channel 19 cleaning CD ROM optical lens 413 450 5 2 Maintenance Manual clock problems real time 150 code format error 115 codes CP 383 codes numeric error micro channel 33 codes numeric error AT 15 codes understanding VPD 183 combined FRUs diagnosing 108 comments about this manual 444 common parts 295 communication menu 431 communication options 312 compatibility matrix drive and diskette 370 compatibility mode VGA 401 compatibility mode XGA 401 complete system partition 386 configuration ASCII terminal 431 changing software 408 changing system 408 memory 90 95 407 network 89 recording customized 429 running automatic 150 429 SCSI device 418 configuration options adapter 90 configuration changing PS ValuePoint ISA adapter 91 conflicts memory address 408 connector keyboard 404 keyboard voltages 123 mouse 404 pointing device 404 considerations display 111 console selection 431 controller on system board SCSI 180 controller diskette drive 404 corrections to this manual 444 cover lock 375 cover lock switches 375 CP codes 383 CSD version level determining DOS 108 current leakage 424 Index 451 customized configuration recording 429 D data rate switch settings 74 data fax modem diagnost
279. ge furniture height at least 1 5m above the floor Above dividing panels shelves and so on At the center of the ceiling of a large room or corridor or at the intersection of two corridors Modern buildings having metallic partitions are very common IBM suggests that you install the base radio modules in the ceiling of corridors Radio waves used by the IBM Wireless LAN are reflected along these partitions and enter into offices through the doors or glass parts Hardware Maintenance Service 99 Error Management Overview The IBM Wireless LAN software processes the events occurring in each base such as Hardware errors on wireless LAN controller cards Software errors during data transfer Significant events such as adapter load completion These events are logged in two files IBMWLERL LOG which contains the most recent events IBMWLERL BAK which contains older events In an OS 2 environment there is an additional file LANTRAN LOG All these events are listed in the manual Installing and Operating Your Network delivered with the product The most critical events are reported to the network management system through simple network management protocol SNMP traps and can be displayed on the network management station Using a network management system such as NetView 6000 or NetWare Management system NMS allows you to manage your network from a single point Running Adapter Diagnostics To run the adapter dia
280. ged or deleted in this manual 3 What is your service experience level Novice Average Advanced 4 Which PS 2 systems do you service most Thanks in advance for your response 440 5 2 Maintenance Manual Do You Need Technical References We have a wide range of hardware technical references that provide in depth information about IBM personal computer products Our Technical Reference Library includes information about Micro Channel Setup and Subsystem Control Block architectures Common interfaces including microprocessors system timers parallel and serial port controllers keyboards and keystrokes SCSI DMA video and more Specific Personal System 2 systems including system board connectors jumpers memory subsystems I O subsystems programming interfaces and registers and error codes Basic input output system BIOS Options and adapters For a free catalog of our current offerings please photocopy this form complete it and then fax it to Hardware Technical References at 407 982 9825 USA I d like a catalog of the IBM PC Company Hardware Technical Reference library Name Address City State Zip Hardware Maintenance Reference 441 Problem Determination Tips Due to the variety of hardware and software combinations that can be encountered use the following information to assist you in problem determination If possible have this information available when re
281. gned to the adapter If a unique base I O address was assigned to the adapter restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter 16X85 The adapter was not found at the specified base I O address Ensure that a unique base address was assigned to the adapter If a unique base I O address was assigned to the adapter restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter 16X90 Adapter Card Test failure Restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter 16X91 Open Phase Test failure Restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter 16X92 Computer problem Run Advanced Diagnostics Hardware Maintenance Service 79 Message Action 16X93 Transmit Receive Test failure The data received is not the same as the data sent Check to see that 1 The network is terminated correctly 2 The network is connected correctly If the above items are correct restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter 16X99 General error Restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter 80 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Testing the Ethernet Adapter To test the Ethernet adapter 1 Insert the feature diskette in the diskette drive then power on the computer The Ethernet Setup Diagnostic program will automa
282. gnostics do the following 1 Insert the IBM Wireless LAN Utilities diskette in drive A Note If the workstation has a PCMCIA Type II slot make sure that you have correctly set up the IBM Wireless LAN Utilities diskette see section Wireless LAN Utilities Diskette on page 99 2 Restart the workstation as follows For an ISA computer power off the computer then power on the computer or For Micro Channel or computers with the PCMCIA Type II slot press Ctrl Alt Del 3 Select Diagnostics Utilities from the main menu 4 Wait for the diagnostics to complete and follow the recommended action FRU numbers are available in Wireless LAN Adapter ISA Micro Channel Bus on page 309 and Wireless LAN Adapter PCMCIA Type 11 on page 310 100 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Note If a hardware problem is not identified see the Installing and Operating Your Network manual part number 54G2072 for further information on troubleshooting If the problem persists 1 Note the resulting diagnostic message and code 2 Go to Problem Resolution Worksheet on page 104 and fill in the information on the worksheet 3 Then call your IBM service representative or your dealer PCMCIA Credit Card Problems Note This section applies only to PCMCIA Type II slot DOS and Windows wireless workstations in a Netware environment If the PCMCIA Credit Card is not detected when you start th
283. go Rear Chassis Screw SCSI Cable SCSI Cable Screw Drive Tray Cover Drive Tray Cover Screw Foam Spacer Drive Fan Assembly Drive Fan Screw Drive Tray Base Flat Washer Base Star Washer Drive Tray Screw System to Device Cable 60 to 50 pin 3532 only Device to Device Cable 50 to 50 pin 3532 only Device to Device Cable 50 to 50 pin 50 Pin Terminator Power Cord Media Kit Cleaning Blank Tape Cleaning Tape Blank Tape Qty 5 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 00G0988 42F6707 31F4220 42F6874 02G7413 46G2320 85F0055 0055726 00G2960 1621171 59F4585 42F7299 53F3872 02G7398 42F6707 53F3861 0251970 42F7270 1621170 71F0734 42F7300 0438553 53F3113 1091414 0060646 1621171 31F4221 31F4222 34F0018 92F0057 6952300 59F3907 21F8593 21F8595 OBI DASD Hot Swap Storage Expansion Enclosure Parts Hardware Maintenance Service 293 Index Hot Swap Storage Expansion Enclosure 1 RON NO 294 200 Watt Power Supply Hot Swap Rack 1 bay 3 Tray Adapter Top 3 Tray Adapter Bottom Cover Assembly Keylock Assembly Pedestal Adapter Card Assembly not Terminated Adapter Card Assembly Terminated bottom card for 71G0209 Microswitch Shaft for 71G0208 7190209 61G3527 Microswitch Housing for 71G0208 71G0209 Hot Swap Rack Rail Microswitch Cable Assembly SCSI Cable Assembly Drive Power Cable Assembly Power good Cable 68 Position Tray Assembly 1GB SCSI Fast Wide Hard Disk Dri
284. guration board replaced Processor board serial number detected does not match serial number stored 0136XXXX 1 ISDN Primary Rate Adapter 2 System Board t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Maintenance Service 49 Symptom Error FRU Action 0137XXXX 1 System Board 0141XXXX 1 Realtime Interface Coprocessor Portmaster Adapter A 0143XXXX 1 Japanese Display Adapter 2 System Board 01471000 014711XX 1 System Board Display Adapter any type 2 Adapter Video Memory 0148XX00 1 Display Adapter any type 014901XX 014902XX 1 Display Adapter 01491XXX 014922XX any type 2 System Board 3 Display any type 014932XX 1 External Display any type 2 Display Adapter any type 0152XXXX 1 XGA Display Adapter A 2 System Board 0161XXXX 1 FaxConcentrator Adapter 0164XXXX 1 120MB Internal Tape Drive 2 Diskette Cable 3 System Board 016500XX 1 6157 Tape Attachment Adapter 016520XX 016540XX 1 6157 Streaming Tape Drive 2 6157 Tape Attachment Adapter 0166XXXX 0167XXXX 1 Token Ring Network See Network Service Adapter A Procedures on page 74 2 System Board 3 Bus Adapter 018001XX 1 Wizard Adapter 18001 to 18029 2 Wizard Adapter Memory 018031XX 1 Wizard Adapter Cable 18031 to 18039 018441XX Information only Unsupported memory module on 80386 adapter t If th
285. hat you have an ASCII terminal attached to the system 1 Start the system programs Note If you start the system programs from an ASCII terminal power on the terminal then the system Press and hold Ctrl Then press and release C A D When the cursor moves to the top right corner of the screen press Ctrl 1 2 Select Set features on the system programs Main Menu 3 Select Set console on the Set Features Menu 4 Select ASCII terminal on the Set Console Menu The values must be Baud rate 96 Bits per character 8 Parity None Stop bits T Hardware Maintenance Reference 431 Note These instructions assume that you have already set the terminal to the same values described in ASCII Terminal Setup and Menu Selection on page 430 Any time you change the ASCII terminal values you also must update the system values to match it The baud rate should always be 9600 or above If you set the baud rate below 9600 system performance will be slow Operation Some of the ASCII terminal operations are listed below Communication When using an ASCII terminal the communication parameters will appear on the information panel for example 96 8N1 This information is not an error message Configuration When you run the system programs or diagnostic programs from the ASCII terminal the terminal values might change Check the terminal values If they have changed reset them Utilities To start the system programs when u
286. he software vendor s support 000E See note 7 Application software error contact the software vendor s support 0010 Hardware of software error Run diagnostics to check math coprocessor If diagnostics find no problem see note 7 contact the software vendor s support Notes 1 Memory intensive operating systems such as OS 2 AIX or UNIX based operating systems are capable of revealing highly intermittent errors not detected by diagnostics 2 Highly intermittent errors might go undetected by diagnostics tests If no error occurs during the test multiple replacements of memory might be required to resolve the problem Trademark of the IBM Corporation Trademark of UNIX System Laboratories Inc Hardware Maintenance Service 131 Install all software updates This applies to applications and operating systems The enhanced memory adapter FRU 34F2825 might experience Trap 0002 errors if it does not have diagonal resistors across U21 U24 See ECA042 The enhanced memory adapter has been redesigned without resistors so this note might not apply to the computer you are servicing Intermittent errors can be caused by outside sources of static noise or power Trap 0002 can be caused by a memory or adapter failure Read the message details It might be the system board system board memory or adapter Trap 000D errors are software errors The customer should contact the software vendor for possible patches
287. he failure does occur again replace the system board and reinstall the original processor upgrade If the failure occurs again after replacing the system board replace the processor upgrade also PoON gt Note Use the 80386 processor only to diagnose the problem If it came from the customer be sure you return it to them If the processor came from a new system board that you brought with you and the system board is not the problem reinstall the processor on the new system board before you return it to stock If the system board is the problem return the 80386 processor with the bad system board 136 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Processor Px Label Cross reference Upgraded systems should have a Px label placed on the front cover of the system unit to the right of the serial number at the time the system was upgraded The following matrix cross references the Px label a description of the upgrade and the upgrade FRU number Px Description FRU Label Number P2 Models 50 50Z 486SLC2 System Board 61G3502 P1 Model 50Z 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade 71G2633 Card P1 Models 50 60 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade 71G2625 Card P2 Model 55 486SLC2 System Board 71G2602 P3 Models 60 65 and 80 486DLC2 System 71G2610 Board P2 Models 60 65 and 80 486DX2 System 71G2643 Board P1 Model 70 486DX33 Processor Upgrade Card 92F0436 P3 Model 70 486DLC2 System Board 71G2606 P2 Model 70 486DX33 Sy
288. he problem still exists replace the other board also reinstall the first board Processor Boards without Diagnostic LEDs If the processor board does not have LEDs you might not always be able to differentiate between processor board and system board failures If you are instructed to replace one of the boards and the problem still exists replace the other board also reinstall the first board Hardware Maintenance Service 135 Processor Upgrade Models 50 502 60 486SLC2 Switch Settings Use these switch settings for the Models 50 50Z and 60 only Funn Processor Upgrade Models 70 80 486DX33 Switch Settings Use these switch settings for the Model 70 and Model 80 only QUO non se unea Processor Upgrade Model 70 80 486DX33 FRU Isolation Note Before running diagnostic tests check that the processor upgrade card is fully seated in the system board and that the 80486 processor is fully seated in the upgrade card Power off the computer Insert the 70 80 Reference Diskette in drive A Power on the computer Follow the instructions on the screen to test the processor upgrade If the tests cannot find a problem replace the processor upgrade with an 80386 processor from a new system board or the original 80386 processor if available If the failure does not occur again replace the processor upgrade with a new one If t
289. hed some SCSI adapters have both an internal and an external terminator Notes a Some system boards with SCSI have terminators built in and do not require a terminator b For more information see Terminator Function on page 414 3 Power on the computer and run Automatic Configuration If the SCSI adapter or the SCSI controller on the system board is not on the Devices List in Advanced Diagnostics it is defective If the SCSI adapter or the SCSI controller on the system board is on the list run the SCSI adapter or SCSI controller Advanced Diagnostic test 4 If the SCSI adapter or the SCSI controller on the system board fails the test replace it If it passes the test a different adapter or device might be causing the problem if this is the case continue with the next step 24 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 5 Disconnect SCSI default drive 6 then re run Advanced Diagnostics If the SCSI adapter or the system board fails replace the FRU If the problem is not found continue with the next step 6 Reconnect all the devices then put all terminators back in the same positions they were in before service 7 Use the procedure in Undetermined Problems on page 183 to find the problem Missing SCSI and Non SCSI Devices If both types of devices are missing see Related Service Information on page 107 to find the problem System Error Log If you are not familiar with the error log refer to Syste
290. i4 x 1 96 06 v6282 19 104 120 Iepow Jeldepy x 0L476X06 190 120 1e1depy 4 X GOS8xzZ ZZS8XZZ 10 Ajuo 120 Iepow ysIq pexiJ 2800426 1eduinp iojeuiuue 1700 95 0155 6898 0100426 14 snoeuej eostA 2557415 e 01955558 5 sauoydpeaH 1061019 6176422 ppeo 1500468 A ddng 1200498 JOAOD 6000426 1980 3980 9800426 uoi 5 sng 1v JequinN JequinN JequinN VIOWOd paepueis uondo nua 94njee4 asva 5 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 352 SOSH90 aiqed 8687988 SAUG NOY AD 9896976 d WOu d9 1595 69 8566 vv6ZH90 aiqed 2919 90 NOY AD 6188907 Wou qo5 xe 1979028 einso ou3 6017919 9 ug VSI d a 9117919 S gt X 20989502 m LOZ IPPON 6098 ed L YSI B ul 0117919 Jejdepy
291. iagnostic program from the server DID THE PROGRAM LOAD SUCCESSFULLY Yes No 008 If the problem occurred during the Remote Initial Program Load RIPL replace the Network Adapter If it did not occur during RIPL go to Symptom to FRU Index AT Bus on page 12 Step 009 continues Hardware Maintenance Service CONTINUED 009 continued Press Ctrl Alt Del and check for the following responses 1 One or two short beeps 2 IBM logo screen appears DID YOU RECEIVE THE RESPONSES LISTED ABOVE Yes No 010 Go to Symptom to FRU Index Bus page 12 If that does not correct the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 183 011 Press Enter HAS THE CONFIGURATION BEEN INTENTIONALLY CHANGED Yes No 012 Type N then go to Step 020 on page 5 013 Type Y to run Automatic Configuration and verify the error is no longer present If you return to this point again go to Step 011 and type N 014 IS THE DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM LOADED FROM THE LAN Yes No 015 Insert the Advanced Diagnostics Diskette Go to Step 018 on page 5 016 Load the diagnostic program from the server DID THE PROGRAM LOAD SUCCESSFULLY Yes No 017 If the problem occurred during the Remote Initial Program Load RIPL replace the Network Adapter If it did not occur during RIPL go to S
292. ial and model number label To verify which board is installed in the system you are servicing refer to Processor Board Matrix 90 95 on page 126 Hardware Maintenance Reference 407 Resolving Memory Address Conflicts The automatic configuration program might change the memory address space used by some hardware and software options The new address might conflict with addresses defined for use through the expanded memory specification EMS EMS memory is used only in the DOS environment If a memory conflict exists one or more of the following could occur The system cannot load the operating system The system is disabled An application does not operate or it returns an error Screen messages indicate that a memory address conflict exists You can resolve these conflicts in one of the following ways Change the software configuration primary method Change the system configuration alternative method Changing the Software Configuration The best method of resolving memory address conflicts is to change the software configuration by changing the addresses defined by the EMS driver For conflicts caused by XMA2EMS DOS 4 0 or EMM386 DOS 5 0 in the CONFIG SYS file refer to the DOS documentation For conflicts caused by an expanded memory manager other than the one supplied with DOS refer to the memory manager documentation Note To view the addresses used by the installed hardware and software options go
293. ice try removing or exchanging each FRU one by one to help you determine the problem 108 5 2 Maintenance Manual Display Adapter 8514 A Use this illustration to determine the correct placement of the jumper on the adapter F Jumper Link 1 pi A O J Extra 2 18 O memory 3 O T installed 4 1 20 B 0 Extra 21 m n 22 installed 0 0 o Error Module Error Module 7 23 007440XX 31 007460 16 8 24 007441XX 30 007461 27 9 25 007442XX 29 007462xx 26 10 I 26 007443XX 28 007463xx 25 007444XX 22 007464 24 11 27 007445XX 21 007465 23 0 007446XX 18 007466xx 20 mg 007447XX 17 007467 19 12 28 007448XX 32 007468xx 15 18 29 007449XX 14 007469 11 007450XX 13 007470xx 10 14 pp 30 007451xx 12 007471xx 9 007452XX 6 007472xx 8 15 31 007453XX 5 007473 7 16 32 007454xx 2 007474xx 4 o 007455XX 1 007475 3 Hardware Maintenance Service 109 Display Self Test Before performing this test be sure you are familiar with the information under Display Considerations on pag
294. ics 112 default settings SCSI device 180 description systems 435 determining DOS CSD version level 108 determining failing memory location 125 determining OS 2 version level 108 determining processor type 90 95 126 device configurations SCSI 418 device default settings SCSI 180 device missing non scsi 24 devices list AT 11 devices list Micro Channel 23 devices handling discharge sensitive 369 devices SCSI hard disk drives 409 devices uninterruptible power 424 diagnosing combined FRUs 108 diagnostic LEDs processor boards with 135 LEDs processor boards without 135 PCMCIA model 33 133 procedures network 74 tests ACPA A advanced 108 tests SCSI 181 tests starting advanced 384 diagnostics starting system program 425 disable and enable settings 180 discharge sensitive devices handling 369 disk array system 396 array disk 396 diskette and drive compatibility matrix 370 diskette drives external parts 298 diskette drive controller 404 diskettes system 383 display adapter 8514 A 109 considerations 111 self test 110 display to system compatibility 110 452 PS 2 Maintenance Manual displays non IBM 402 displays parts 297 displays repairable 297 disturbances power line 423 DOS CSD version level determining 108 drive and diskette compatibility matrix 370 drive startup function selectable 420 drives and devices SCSI hard disk 409 drives external diskette parts 298 dumping extended diagnosti
295. ious LUN Test Group Specifications In the upper right hand portion of the testing screen or just the upper portion if you switched to an individual test group screen are the specifications for the related test group Note In the Hard Disk Test Group specification area if a software program was to compress your drive the indicated size is the compressed size of the logical drive Starting the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Diskette 1 Insert the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Diskette into drive A 2 Power on the computer 3 When the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Main Menu is displayed press Ctrl A 4 Select Diagnostics then press Enter 5 Follow the instructions that appear on your screen If an error is displayed go to Symptom to FRU Index QAPlus PRO on page 61 Hardware Maintenance Reference 391 Module Testing Mode If the test programs do not find a problem or you want to perform in depth testing the Module Testing mode provides a method to run individual tests on a single module For example you can run an individual test for the diskette drive or you can run groups of tests for several modules In the Module Testing mode you can define how many times each test should run and how the test program should log the errors To start the Module Testing mode 1 Start the diagnostics diskette See Starting the QAPIus PRO Diagnostics Diskette on page 391 2 Select Diagnostic from the Main Menu 3 Select Modul
296. is automatically ejected from the drive 1 Tape Cassette 2 Drive t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 52 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error FRU Action SCSI ID on the rotary switch 1 Rotary Switch Circuit does not match the SCSI ID Board set in configuration Verify 2 Circuit Board Cable the drive switches inside the 3 Tape Drive cover are set to zero Tape sticks breaks in the 1 Tape Cassette drive Verify that the tapes used meet ANSI standard X3B5 0212XXXX 1 SCSI Printer 2 Printer Cable 0213XXXX 1 SCSI Processor 0214XXXX 1 WORM Drive 0215XXXC 1 CD ROM Drive I 0215XXXD CD ROM Drive II 0215XXXE Enhanced CD ROM 0215XXXU Drive II If it is an external device Any CD ROM Drive and the power on LED is 2 SCSI Cable off check external voltages 3 SCSI Adapter or the t SCSI controller built into the system board 0216XXXX 1 Scanner 0217XXXX 1 Rewritable Optical If it is an external device Drive and the power on LED is 2 SCSI Adapter or the off check external voltages SCSI controller built into the system board 3 SCSI Cable 0218XXXX 1 Changer Check for multi CD tray or juke box 0219XXXX 1 SCSI Communications Device 024201Y0 024210Y0 1 ISDN 2 Adapter Be sure the wrap plug is 2 ISDN 2 Wrap Plug not missing 3 ISDN 2 Communications Cable 0243XXXX 1 XGA 2 Displ
297. is displayed help screens guide you through the actions to take Types of Errors Detected The error log can contain many different types of hardware or application program related errors The most probable cause of the failure is always indicated on the help screen Listed below are some common errors and causes that might be displayed Application Program Errors Watchdog timeout DMA programming some models Processor Errors System parity Cache Voltage on processor boards Processor board was changed 90 95 System Memory Errors Parity memory ECC memory multi bit 90 95 Type 3 processor boards ECC memory single bit trigger level 90 95 Type 3 processor boards POST detected memory Micro Channel Adapter Errors I O Channel check DMA timeout On DMA timeout errors note the arbitration level displayed on the screen Go to the View configuration screen and see which device has that same arbitration level Suspect that device is defective Hardware Maintenance Reference 433 Error Storage The error log stores up to three unique errors for example three parity errors at three different addresses The multiple log counter on the screen displays the number of additional times each unique error occurred You can page forward or backward to view the stored error logs The date and time of the most recent occurrence also is displayed If POST finds that the error log has stored three unique errors POST
298. is is done with an update diskette This diskette copies the new code to the FLASH EEPROMs Instructions are included with an update diskette If the customer installs an option that requires an upgrade to the POST and BIOS information have the customer contact their Authorized IBM Dealer or Marketing Representative or call the IBM HelpCenter U S and Puerto Rico only at 1 800 772 2227 They will receive free of charge a set of upgrade diskettes for their system Reference and Diagnostic Diskettes These diskettes commonly referred to as the System Diskettes contain the utility programs and the diagnostic programs customer and advanced FLASH and IML systems also have the exact same programs stored in the System Partition The preferred method of operation is to run the programs from the System Partition however if the default hard disk drive is not working you can run the programs from the System Diskettes Hardware Maintenance Reference 383 Notes 1 The Reference Diskette contains the system programs and the Diagnostic Diskette contains the testing programs Some earlier Model 90 and Model 95 systems used more than one type of Diagnostic Diskette depending on the type 1 2 or 3 of processor board installed in the system The latest release of Model 90 95 System Diskettes provides one combined Diagnostic Diskette and separate Reference Diskettes one for each type of processor board Server 95A is a disk ar
299. is symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 50 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error FRU Action 018451XX Need to reconfigure Module changed on on 80386 adapter Information only 0184XXXX 1 Enhanced 80386 Memory Adapter A 0185XXXX 1 DBCS Japanese Display Adapter A 2 System Board 0194XXXX 1 Memory Module package on the 2 8MB 80286 Memory Adapter 2 Memory adapter 3 System Board 020001 XX to 1 Image Adapter A 020003XX Image I Adapter A 2 Memory Module DRAM VRAM 020004XX 1 Memory Module DRAM VRAM 2 Image Adapter A Adapter A 020005XX to 1 Image Adapter A 020010XX Image I Adapter A 2 Memory Module DRAM VRAM 0200XXXX 1 Image Adapter A not listed above Image I Adapter A 2 Memory Module DRAM VRAM 3 System Board 020101XX to 020103XX 020104XX 1 Printer Scanner Option 2 Image Adapter A 3 Memory Module DRAM VRAM 1 Memory Module DRAM VRAM 2 Printer Scanner Option 3 Image Adapter A 020105XX to 020110XX 1 Printer Scanner Option 2 Image Adapter A 3 Memory Module DRAM VRAM Image Adapter A Memory Test failure indicated by graphic representation of adapter 1 Replace memory module shown in graphic t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Main
300. izontal vertical both 1 side or 2 sides 3 The speed suffix shown on the individual chips 7 70ns 8 80ns 85 85ns 4 The module ID resistors R1 85ns R2 80ns Memory Module Kit 1A and 1B Kit 1A and 1B show 10 or more chips mounted horizontally vertically or a mixed pattern If there are chips on one side of the board it is 1MB If there are chips on both sides it is 2MB A small number of 8MB kits were also manufactured in this configuration The suffix on the chip for example 8 85 is important FE FE FER 1A Sm hh SEs Ea ES TM Em Hardware Maintenance Service 123 Memory Module Kit 2L and 2R Kit 2L shows 10 wide chips with resistors across the top but not on the end If there are chips on one side it is 4MB two sides it is 8MB Kit 2R shows 9 or 10 chips per side all mounted vertically If there are two resistor locations on the right end labeled R1 and R2 it is 2MB R1 85ns R2 80ns R1 R2 100ns There will either be 9 or 10 chips 2L Memory Module Kit 3 Kit 3 has 6 chips per side spaced evenly If all the chips are the same size 3R it is 1MB If the two center chips are smaller than the 4 outer chips 3L itis 4MB These could be any speed 1 Memory Module Kit 4A and 4B 3R Kit 4A and 4B are both 4MB 4A has 6 closely spaced chips on each side There are no resistors and it is 85ns there might be a tiny FRU number on
301. kets on the full length daughter card an XGA adapter single card with no sockets except for the 8 memory modules or an Image Adapter two sets of memory sockets and connectors for daughter cards 25 pin Male connectors indicate some type of serial adapter It could be a multiprotocol adapter or a scanner adapter Many 25 pin connectors do not use all of the pins Some of the pins might be omitted on both adapters and system board ports 25 pin Female connectors indicate a parallel adapter Trademark of the IBM Corporation 122 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Keyboard Voltage Check Note If a mouse or other pointing device is attached remove it and see if the error symptom goes away If the symptom goes away suspect that the mouse or pointing device is defective Check the connector voltages at the keyboard end of the cable all voltages are plus or minus 5 Standard Connector Pin Voltage Vdc 5 0 0 Not Used Ground 5 0 5 0 0 Not Used OIA 245316 If the voltages are correct replace the keyboard If the voltages are not correct suspect the keyboard cable then the system board Memory Module Kit Identification Some early memory module kits are not labeled with a FRU number The following information provides methods of identification There are four key identifiers 1 The chip size narrow or wide 2 The chip placement hor
302. kette Change the write policy Change the RAID parameters Format a drive Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration The RAID adapter maintains a record of the disk array configuration information in its EEPROM electronically erasable programmable read only memory module The disk array configuration is vital information To protect this 170 PS 2 Maintenance Manual information back up the information to diskette as soon as you have completed your tasks You need a blank formatted 3 5 inch diskette To back up the disk array configuration information to diskette 1 Label the blank diskette Disk Array Configuration Backup and date it 2 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 3 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu 4 Select Backup config to diskette 5 Remove the RAID controller diskette from the drive and insert the blank diskette 6 Follow the instructions on the screen Restoring the Disk Array Configuration To restore the disk array configuration information in the RAID adapter EEPROM module use the RAID controller diskette and an up to date Disk Array Configuration Backup diskette Note Because dynamic changes in the configuration of your disk array occur due to hot spare drive replacement or other drive maintenance activity the configuration backup information on the diskette might be different from that in the adapter It i
303. l 60 8560 251 model 65 8565 251 model 70 8570 254 model 76 9576 257 model 77 amp M77 9577 260 model 80 8580 251 model 85 9585 server 273 model 90 8590 263 model 95 8595 273 model 95 9595 server 277 model 95A server 280 mouse 298 OBI DASD Hot Swap Storage Expansion Enclosure 293 PC Server 8640 267 PC Server 500 86XX 270 power cords 304 rewritable optical drives 305 SCSI adapter terminators 308 serverguard adapter 306 space saving keyboards 299 system board upgrades 295 tools and miscellaneous 308 wireless LAN adapter 309 parts catalog 222 password 460 PS 2 Maintenance Manual password override jumper 376 passwords privileged access 378 removing power on 376 unattended start mode server mode 378 PC cards 400 PC Server 8640 parts FRUs 267 PC Server 500 86XX parts FRUs 270 PCMCIA adapter features 400 adapter switch settings 134 diagnostics 133 pc card lock override 134 PC cards 400 phone numbers 1 800 443 pointing device connector 404 port parallel 404 port serial 403 portables POST beep codes 387 errors 383 upgrading 400 POST and BIOS in FLASH 382 POST and BIOS IML 382 POST and BIOS in ROM 382 POST and BIOS upgrading 400 POST errors 383 POST errors Ethernet 85 POST errors token ring 79 POST overview 381 POST fast startup mode 382 power cords parts 304 power devices uninterruptible 424 power supplies system unit 422 power supply voltage check 138 power
304. l location of the hard disk drives 4 The Array list shows you the array ID and the size in megabytes of the array Note The capacity size is shown in binary equivalent When a drive is being rebuilt this area along with the Logical Drive list area shows the progression of the rebuilding process 5 The Logical Drive list identifies the logical drive for example A1 the size of the logical drive the RAID level assigned to the logical drive the date it was created and the write policy The status of the logical drive also is shown Good means that all is well with the drive Critical means that you must replace the drive or do a rebuild operation You will have received a message telling you the drive is in a Critical state Offline means that the logical drive is unrecoverable the data in that drive is lost When a drive is being rebuilt this area along with the Array list area shows the progression of the rebuilding process Note The capacity size is shown in binary equivalent During an initialization process the Write Policy area displays the percent initialized during a synchronization process it displays the percent synchronized 6 The information area tells you the action you can perform on this screen or pop up 156 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Starting the RAID Configuration Program You can run the IBM RAID configuration program from diskette or from the Server
305. l panel assembly line outputs or headphone jack 1 ACPA A Adapter Front microphone inoperative and rear microphone works properly 1 Control Panel Assembly 2 ACPA A Adapter 3 Cable ACPA A to control panel assembly Rear microphone inoperative Audio from CD ROM does not play to the front speaker but plays to Line Output 1 ACPA A Adapter 2 Microphone 1 Control Panel Assembly 2 ACPA A Adapter 3 Cable ACPA A to control panel assembly Audio from CD ROM does not play to the front speaker or to Line Output CD ROM 2 Cable CD ROM to ACPA A Adapter Miscellaneous Symptoms Symptom Error FRU Action Drive letters changed unexpectedly after installing OS 2 or a SCSI adapter 1 This is a normal condition Use the configuration program to change the drive letters back to the desired settings Intermittent failures See Undetermined Problems on page 183 before replacing FRUs t Diskette drive LED stays on Power Supply 2 Power Supply Fans 3 Any Device or Adapter 1 Diskette Drive t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 30 5 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error FRU Action Hard disk LED stays on Hard Disk Drive 2 System Board Hard disk LED not working but computer is completely 1 Control Speaker Assembly func
306. laneous Parts Kit see page 302 61X8915 11 Bus Adapter 61X8910 12 Bus Adapter Support 61X8911 Shipping Carton 72X7541 Index DASD 30 720KB Diskette Drive 1 3 and 1 2 Ht Kit 6 96 7678 Kit Includes Cable Converter Models 25 and 30 Diskette Drive Bezel Diskette Drive Cable 1 2 Ht 61X8900 8 Diskette Drive Bezel 1 2 Ht 90X9299 Diskette Drive Cable 1 3 Ht 6 34F0002 8 Diskette Drive Bezel 1 3 Ht 6 27F4230 20MB Hard Disk Drive4 6128285 20MB Hard Disk Drive All others 61X8929 30MB Hard Disk Drive 6128279 170MB Hard Disk Drive 71G4958 245MB Hard Disk Drive 61G3754 420MB Hard Disk Drive 71G4930 Terminator for 6128279 92F0269 8 Hard Disk Drive Bezel 61X8904 Hard Disk Drive Cable 8530 001 27F4178 Hard Disk Drive Cable 8530 021 61X8903 4 All 8530 001 systems and 8530 021 systems with S N 2500000 to 2999999 and S N 55AA001 to 55ZZ999 5 All 8530 001 systems 8530 002 systems with S N 55A0001 to 5579999 and S N 7000000 to 7499999 8530 021 with S N 2500000 to 2999999 and S N 55AA001 to 5522999 6 All 8530 001 systems 8530 002 systems with S N 55A0001 to 5579999 and S N 7000000 to 7499999 8530 021 with S N 2500000 to 2999999 and S N 55AA001 to 5577999 228 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 30 286 8530 Parts Hardware Maintenance Service 229 Index 1 RON 0 11 12 Index 230 System Unit 30 286 Top Cover Rear Cover Base Frame Assembly R Power Supply 120 230V Back Panel I O
307. le gm 604 662 Wrong Diskette Drive Type 663 Wrong Media Type 6XX not listed above Diskette Drive External Drive Adapter System Board Power Supply Display Assembly 8525 6 Diskette Drive Cable t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Memory Problems 8086 Computers on page 6 Hardware Maintenance Service Symptom Error FRU Action 7XX 1 Math Coprocessor 2 System Board t 1 Printer 2 System Board 1002 1 Alternate Parallel Adapter Jumpers 2 Alternate Parallel Adapter 1047 1 16 Bit AT SCSI Fast Adapter 10XX 1 Alternate Parallel not listed above Adapter 2 Bus Adapter 11XX 1 System Board 1202 1 Alternate Serial Adapter Jumpers 2 Alternate Serial Adapter 3 Bus Adapter 12XX 1 Alternate Serial Adapter 2 Bus Adapter 13XX 1 Game Control Adapter 2 Bus Adapter 14xx 1 1 Printer 15XX 1 SDLC Adapter 2 Bus Adapter 16XXXX 1 36 38 Workstation Adapter 17XX 1 Hard Disk Drive Model 9533 systems may 2 System Board produce false 1702 and 3 Hard Disk Cable 1713 error If no other 4 Power Supply symptoms are detected 5 Display Assembly ignore these errors 8525 209X 1 Diskette Drive 2 Diskette Drive Cable 3 16 Bit AT SCSI Fast Adapter 20XX 1
308. lect switch if applicable is set for the correct voltage If the power on indicator is not on and if the power supply fan is not running check the power cord for proper installation and continuity If the power cord is OK either the power supply is defective or a defective device is causing the power supply to shut off Check the power supply voltages If the voltages are incorrect replace the power supply the voltages are correct and the Symptom to FRU index does not solve the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 183 Connector P1 1 6 EI Lead Lead V de V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 5 6 1 Power Good 5 6 2 4 8V 5 25V 5 6 3 11 52V 12 60V 5 6 4 10 8V 13 2V Connector P2 1 6 mmmmmm Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 1 2 3 4 5V 5 5V 1 2 4 4 8V 5 25V 1 2 5 4 8V 5 25V 1 2 6 4 8V 5 25V Continued on the next page Hardware Maintenance Service 143 PC Server 8640 continued Connector P3 1 6 HEHEHE TT Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 8V 5 25V Connectors P4 and P6 1 4 mmmum LC Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 3 1 4 8V 5 25V 2 3 4 411 52V 412 6V Connectors P5 P7 and P8 1 4 Lead Lead V dc V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum 2 3 1 411 52V 412 6V 2 3 4 4 8V 5
309. led 1 Microprocessor The CPU Logic Test has 2 System Board detected an error Loopback Error 1 System Board An error occurred during the 2 Wrap Plug COM Port Test or Parallel Port Test A wrap plug must be installed to successfully complete these tests Main Components Failed 1 System Board A component failure was 2 Processor detected on the system board Memory test cannot run at 1 Memory Module this location in memory 2 System Board Not enough free memory available to start the memory test Missing QAPlus PRO 1 Diagnostic Diskette Files s One or more Diagnostic support files are missing NO LOOP BACK PLUG 1 Install wrap plug on Skipping External the serial port rerun loopback test test No wrap plug installed 2 System Board Not ready 1 Ready Printer Printer not on line or not 2 Printer ready 3 Printer Cable 4 System Board No type amatic repeat 1 Keyboard At least one repeat key 2 System Board must be tested during this test or an error will occur The Type amatic test detected an error Not used by any standard device The IRQ is not currently being used by a non standard device System Board Hardware Maintenance Service 69 Error Message Symptom FRU Action Numeric Proc Failed The NPU TEST detected an error Microprocessor 2 System Board Parallel Ports Failed Test Report Summary message 1 System Board Pass N Errors Drive X
310. licts 408 configurations 90 95 407 determining type size and speed 126 errors 405 errors system 433 expansion adapters 405 finding failing 125 information 90 95 406 location determining failing 125 MAP 80286 to 80486 9 MAP 8086 6 problems 125 system 405 system board 405 type 1 processor boards 128 type 2 processor boards 128 type 3 processor boards 128 video 401 memory module kit identification 123 memory FLASH 382 menu selection ASCII terminal setup 430 micro channel adapter errors 433 Index 457 micro channel continued checkout procedures 19 symptom to FRU index 26 microphone gain toggle 108 microphone input loop 108 microprocessor jumper option 76 77 130 microprocessors 380 miscellaneous symptoms 30 mismatch problems software hardware 181 missing non SCSI device 24 missing SCSI and non SCSI devices 25 missing SCSI device 24 modem diagnostics 112 monitors parts 297 motor start jumper setting 414 mouse connector 404 mouse parts 298 moving preparing hard disk 374 N network configuration errors 89 errors 89 service procedures 74 new installation OS 2 problems 130 no beep symptoms AT 12 no beep symptoms Micro Channel 27 no load operation 422 non ibm displays 402 non removable terminators 419 non scsi device missing 24 notices 445 numbers phone 1 800 443 numeric error codes micro channel 33 numeric error codes AT 15 NVRAM and NVRAM extension 381 OBI DASD Hot Swap
311. lid failures if the SCSI devices are exposed to continuous excessive voltages If you have too many terminators installed for example three internal hard disk drives each with a terminator the result might be a drop in voltages to a point where devices will not operate or they operate intermittently 414 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 16 Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Switch Settings 1 Switch Location 2 On Position 3 Off Position x gt il pl 2 3 4 5 T T T T xo X cm oom o o 7 amp amp tc INTERNAL SCSI scsi Busy LIGHT 1505 NESS Interrupt Settings Interrupt switches are labeled IRQ 0 IRQ 1 and IRQ 2 The default interrupt setting is IRQ 10 IRQ 0 IRQ 1 IRQ 2 Interrupt Setting Off Off Off IRQ 3 On Off Off IRQ 5 Off On Off IRQ 10 default On On Off IRQ 11 Off Off On IRQ disabled On Off On IRQ 14 Off On On IRQ 15 On On On IRQ disabled Memory Address Switch Settings Memory address switches are labeled MEM 0 and MEM 1 The default memory range is 8K from hex CA000 to CBFFF If you are using a memory manager you must exclude the adapter memory address range to avoid memory conflicts Refer to your memory manager instructions For example Hardware Maintenance Reference 415 when
312. line disturbances 423 power on features 380 power on jumper 95 remote 150 power on password limitations 382 power on password removing 376 power supply features 422 preparing hard disk for moving 374 Index 461 printer errors 134 privileged access password 378 problems 70 80 486DX33 processor upgrade 136 during OS 2 installation 130 memory 125 real time clock 150 software hardware mismatch 181 undetermined 183 processor errors 433 model 90 95 126 processor boards 20 MHz and 25 MHz 284 installation 90 95 135 matrix 90 95 126 memory type 1 128 memory type 2 128 memory type 3 128 model 70 380 model 90 95 380 with diagnostic LEDs 135 without diagnostic LEDs 135 processor type 90 95 126 processor upgrade problems 70 80 486DX33 136 program diagnostics starting system 425 program errors application 433 programs updating system 426 protection over current 422 over voltage 422 short circuit 422 surge 424 under voltage 422 PS 2 E diagnostics 133 PS 2 types descriptions 435 PS ValuePoint ISA adapter configuration changing 91 R range operating voltage 422 rate switch settings data 74 462 PS 2 Maintenance Manual real time clock problems 150 rear panel security option 375 recording customized configuration 429 reference section this manual 363 refresh rates possible 402 related service information 107 reliability 424 remote power on jumper 95 150 removable terminators 419 removals replacements portables
313. ll become active in the Bay Array selection list Note Only SCSI hard disk drives are shown as RDY ONL DDD OFL or HSP state SCSI tape and CD ROM drives are not shown They appear when you select drive information Refer to Bay Array Selection List on page 165 for the drive status meanings The numbers shown on the left are the bay IDs See Installing Internal Drives Type 86XX on page 176 for an explanation of the bay IDs 4 Use the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the RDY ready drive you want to define as the hot spare then press Enter The RDY changes to HSP hot spare You can press Enter again to toggle between HSP and RDY 5 Press Esc when you have finished The cursor will become active in the Create Delete Array menu 6 If you want to create a disk array go to Creating a Disk Array on page 161 Hardware Maintenance Service 159 7 If you are finished a Select Exit or press Esc A pop up window will appear asking you to confirm your change Note The changes you make are not saved until you confirm them by selecting Yes in the Confirm pop up window b Select No if you do not want the drive you selected to be a hot spare select Yes to define it as a hot spare drive c Back up the disk array configuration information to diskette Refer to Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 170 for instructions Deleting a Disk Array Th
314. lled 3 Hard Disk Drive 4 System Board t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Maintenance Service Symptom Error FRU Action 010483XX 1 Hard Disk Adapter ESDI 2 System Board 0104XXXX 1 Hard Disk Drive not listed above 2 Hard Disk Adapter ESDI 3 Hard Disk Cable 4 Power Supply 0106XXXX See Network Service Procedures on page 74 1 Ethernet Network Adapter A 2 System Board 3 Bus Adapter 0107XXXX 1 5 25 inch External Diskette Drive 2 5 25 inch Diskette Drive Adapter A 0109XXXX 1 ActionMedia Check the adapter cables Adapter A 2 System Board 0112XXXX 1 SCSI Adapter This adapter does not have 2 Any SCSI Device cache 3 System Board 0119XXXX 1 3119 Adapter 0121XXXX 1 300 1200 2400 Modem A 2 Any Serial Device 3 System Board 01290001 01290002 01290003 01290004 01290007 01290008 Possibly a recoverable processor board error 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 01290050 01290051 01290052 01290053 01290054 01290055 01290056 Probably a fatal error Processor Board 2 System Board 01290100 012902XX 01290400 01290700 01290800 Cache error 1 Processor Board 2 System Board Cache 3 System Board 012903 XX Math coprocessor error 1 Math Coprocessor 2 Processor Board 01290XXX not listed above 1 Processor
315. low level format on a drive controlled by the RAID adapter To perform a low level format 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 2 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu r Warning A low level format erases all data and programs from the drive 3 Select Format drive The low level format program starts 4 Follow the instructions on the screen You can perform a low level format on more than one drive at a time Changing the RAID Parameters You can change the RAID parameters using the advanced functions by selecting Change RAID parameters The default settings are Stripe unit size 8K The stripe unit size is the amount of data written on a given disk before writing on the next disk To maximize the overall performance this stripe unit should be chosen such that the stripe unit size is Hardware Maintenance Service 173 close to the size of the system I O request The default is set to 8K data bytes Warning Once the stripe unit is chosen and data is stored in the logical drives the stripe unit cannot be changed without destroying data in the logical drives Rebuild priority Equal Rebuild priority can be set to equal high or low When set to equal the rebuild I O request and system request get equal priority in the execution order When set to high the rebuild request will get
316. ly Or in a DOS full screen press then release the Ctrl Alt S keys simultaneously this key combination will not work in an OS 2 DOS box The Standard System Parameters screen will appear Follow the instructions on the screen to view or change the configuration Press Esc from any screen in the setup utility The Exiting Setup pop up screen will appear Press F4 to save the configuration information and restart the server When configuring a PC Server 8640 you must correctly exit the Setup utility to save the configuration information If a configuration error occurs during POST a configuration error message appears before the operating system loads Press F1 to bypass the error Do not start the Setup Utility while using the EISA configuration program diskette 60 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom to FRU Index QAPlus PRO Always start with General Checkout QAPlus PRO on page 59 The Symptom to FRU Index lists symptoms errors and the possible causes The most likely cause is listed first Use this index to help you decide which FRUs to have available when servicing the computer In the following error codes X can be any number or letter Note For IBM devices not supported by the QAPlus PRO diagnostics code refer to the manual for that device For information on Go to Additional service help Related Service Information For example voltage on page
317. ly Some drives are shipped with the motor start jumper installed to reduce POST time If many large capacity drives are added to the computer and they are set to start at power on the power supply might shut down If this happens it means that the total motor start surge current of a multiple drive startup exceeds the reserve current capacity of the power supply You might have to remove one or more motor start jumpers Note Non IBM drives use either a jumper or a switch to set the motor start mode To set the SCSI ID on a Rewritable Optical Drive do the following 1 Position the device so that the three position jumper is at the lower right corner 2 Refer to the table below to position the Rewritable Optical Drive jumpers for IDs 6 through 0 SCSI Jumpers SCSI Jumpers ID 123 ID 123 6 2 5 1 4 0 3 Terminator Function Even though the system can appear to be operating correctly with or without terminators installed it is not actually operating correctly The SCSI Bus can operate at data rates up to 5MB per second Because of the high speed the bus must be terminated properly at both ends with resistors terminators or you eventually will have problems If you do not terminate the SCSI bus correctly you can experience intermittent errors For example if a terminator is missing the result might be poor signal quality or improper higher voltages Intermittent errors can lead to so
318. m Error Log on page 433 Notes 1 On 90 and 95 only systems with a Type 3 processor board submodel codes 28 29 36 37 support the system error log 2 After service clear any noninformational errors from the error log Viewing the System Error Log 1 Go to the Main Menu 2 Select More Utilities 3 Select Display system error log 4 Follow the instructions on the screen Read the error log to see if any errors are stored Use that information to help determine what is causing the failure If you cannot find the problem using the error log run diagnostics if you have not already done so Hardware Maintenance Service 25 Symptom to FRU Index Micro Channel This index supports the following PS 2 Models 50 55 56 57 60 65 70 76 77 80 85 90 and 95 Always start with General Checkout Micro Channel on page 19 For information on Additional service help For example voltage checks 0S 2 Trap errors or processor board errors Go to Related Service Information on page 107 Possible software and hardware mismatch problems not repairable by replacing FRUS Software Hardware Mismatch Problems on page 181 Starting the System Programs Starting System Program Diagnostics on page 425 Erasing Power On Passwords Removing a Power On Password on page 376 Privileged Access Password Jumper 9556 9557 Privileged Access Passw
319. m Notes 1 If multiple error codes are displayed diagnose the first error code displayed 2 If the computer hangs with a POST error to Symptom to FRU Index QAPlus PRO on page 61 3 If the computer hangs and no error is displayed see Undetermined Problems on page 183 4 device cannot be selected from the Module Test menu that device may be defective 001 Power off the computer and all external devices Check all cables and power cords Set all display controls to the middle position Insert the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics diskette into drive A Power on all external devices Power on the computer Check for the following responses 1 One beep 2 Readable instructions or the Main Menu DID YOU RECEIVE THE CORRECT RESPONSES Yes No 002 Find the failure symptom in Symptom to FRU Index QAPlus PRO on page 61 003 Run the Advanced Diagnostics Test If necessary refer to QAPlus PRO Diagnostics on page 386 If you receive an error go to Symptom to FRU Index QAPlus PRO on page 61 QAPlus PRO is a trademark of DiagSoft Inc Hardware Maintenance Service 59 PC Server 8640 Setup Utility To use the PC Server 8640 Setup utility do the following 1 2 m Important Power on the computer During the POST memory test press and then release the spacebar then press and release the Ctrl Alt S keys simultaneous
320. m the 11 x 11 connector on the new system board 250 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 60 8560 65 8565 and 80 8580 Parts 20 Hardware Maintenance Service 251 Index System Unit 60 65 80 1 13 13 13 14 15 15 15 252 Front Bezel Logo see DASD 1 2 Ht Diskette Drive Bezel 1 3 Ht Diskette Drive Bezel Blank Bezel for Diskette Drive 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel 5 25 Inch CD ROM Drive Blank Bezel for 5 25 Inch Drive Bay Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel 5 25 Inch CD ROM Bezel for 00G1959 Base Foot Battery Speaker Assembly Battery Speaker Assembly 8565 Battery Hard Disk Drive Support Structure Rear Mounting Plate for 72X8527 Adapter 72X8569 72X8549 72X8550 34F0030 72X8535 15F7915 00G1959 72X8560 92F0156 34F0044 72X8565 33F5950 57F1437 72X8498 72X8527 72X8563 See Options and Adapters Matrix on page 311 Cover 8580 311 Cover 8565 All Models Cover All Others Cover Lock Assembly Cover Lock Kit see DASD Hard Disk Drive Slide Tray SCSI Drive Support Structure 1 2 Ht Drive Drive Support Structure 1 3 Ht Drive System Board 10MHz 8560 256KB Memory Kit for 72X8538 System Board 16MHz 8565 2MB Memory Kit for 92F0800 4MB Memory Kit for 92F0800 Real Time Clock Module 2KB NV RAM Module System Board 16MHz 8580 041 0
321. may want to try LS parity placement to improve performance The default parity placement is RA Read ahead On Normally the IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide Streaming RAID Adapter A transfers data from disk to its local cache in steps of stripe unit size This provides excellent overall performance when workloads tend to be sequential However if the workload is random and system I O requests are smaller than stripe unit size reading ahead to the end of the stripe unit will result in a wasted SCSI bus bandwidth and wasted disk utilization When read ahead is set to Off the size of data transfer from the disk to local cache is equal to the system request size and read ahead to the end of the stripe unit is performed r Notes 1 The Read ahead setting can be changed without destroying data in a logical drive 2 When the configuration is saved on a diskette the RAID parameters are saved also Administration Monitoring Utilities Several of the operating systems that your server supports also support for disk array models RAID monitoring programs The monitoring programs are OS 2 RAID Controller Administration and Monitor OS 2 RAID NetFinity Alert Manager OS 2 RAID Controller Administration for IBM RAID Controller Administration for Vines These programs include many of the functions contained in the IBM RAID configuration program but unlike that program they reside on top
322. move one adapter at a time until the symptom goes away 1 Any Adapter 2 System Board 3 Processor Extended Memory Test Failed An error was detected in Extended Memory Memory Module 2 System Board Floppy Drive Failed 1 Diskette Drive One or more diskette drives 2 System Board failed 3 Diskette Drive Cable General Function Failed 1 Any Adapter Remove one adapter at a 2 System Board time until the symptom goes 3 Processor away Hard Drives Failed One or more of the Hard Disk Drive tests detected an error Hard Disk Drive 2 Hard Disk Drive Adapter if installed 3 System Board Incorrect DOS version 1 Ensure you are using DOS version 3 0 or higher INT Mask Register Failed The INT Mask Register tests detected an error 1 Microprocessor 2 System Board Invalid Date The back up clock and DOS dates do not match 1 Real Time Clock Assembly 2 System Board 68 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Error Message Symptom FRU Action Invalid Time The back up clock and DOS 1 Real Time Clock Assembly time of day settings do not 2 System Board match Linear Cylinder Access 1 Hard Disk Drive Test Failed 2 Hard Disk Drive Cable Hard disk drive error The 3 Hard Disk Drive redundancy check of the Adapter if installed sectors read does not match 4 System Board the information on the drive Logic Function Fai
323. mplete the installation procedure A RAID redundant array of inexpensive disks controller diskette must be created from the ServerGuide CD for all disk array models Note Locate the ServerGuide CD You will need the main ServerGuide CD shortly after you power on the server 1 Power on all external devices then power on the server 2 After the POST completes press the CD ROM tray release button The CD ROM tray extends out approximately one inch from the server Pull the tray straight out until it stops Note If the CD ROM tray does not extend out insert the end of a paper clip into the manual tray release opening 3 With the label information facing right center and place the main ServerGuide CD on the hub 4 Push the CD ROM tray back into the server 5 Press F1 to restart the server If the server does not restart press Ctrl Alt Del 6 If the server is a disk array model or if you are installing one of the operating systems available in the ServerGuide package select Start Here from the Main Menu and follow the instructions on the screen If you are not installing an operating system from ServerGuide go to Not Installing an Operating System from ServerGuide Not Installing an Operating System from ServerGuide f you are not installing one of the operating systems available in the CD package use the 152 PS 2 Maintenance Manual following procedure to create the disk
324. n Adapters 405 Memory Errors 405 Unique Memory Information 90 95 406 Model 90 Memory 406 Model 95 Memory 406 Memory Configurations 90 95 407 Error Detection 90 95 407 Resolving Memory Address Conflicts 408 Changing the Software Configuration 408 Changing the System Configuration 408 SCSI System Information 409 SCSI Hard Disk Drives and Devices 409 Understanding SCSI ID Numbers 409 SelectingaSCSIID 409 Setting SCSIID 411 SCSI ID Switch Settings 411 SCSI ID Jumper Settings 412 2GB SCSI 16 Bit 68 Pin Hard Disk Drive ID Switch Settings 412 Optical Head Lens Cleaning Procedure 413 Setting the Motor Start Jumper 414 Terminator Function 414 16 Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Switch Settings 415 Interrupt Settings 415 Memory Address Switch Settings 415 Address 416 Internal Devices Attached to an Adapter 417 External Devices Attached to an Adapter 417 Terminators SCSI Adapters 418 Terminators on System Boards 419 Selectable Drive Startup Function 420 To Change the Startup Sequence 421 System Unit Power Supplies 422 Power Supply Features 2 422 Operating Voltage Range 422 No Load Operation 422 Over C
325. n SCSI is missing from the Devices List then continue Hardware Maintenance Service 23 Missing Non SCSI Device If a non SCSI device is missing from the list replace it If more than one non SCSI device is missing isolate them one at a time until you find the device causing the failure Note If the number of diskette drives shown on the list is incorrect an error can occur during the tests this is the case restart the computer select View Configuration from the Set Configuration menu and verify that the drive information is correct then continue testing Missing SCSI Device Note On some models with SCSI on the system board slot number 0 or 1 designates the logical position for the SCSI controller Diagnostics might instruct you to replace the SCSI adapter in slot 0 or 1 leading you to believe that a SCSI adapter is missing In that situation replace the system board the SCSI controller is built into the board If a SCSI device is missing from the list determine if the missing device is connected to the SCSI controller on the system board or a SCSI adapter Either the system board or the SCSI adapter might be defective Continue with the following procedure 1 Power off the computer and disconnect any internal and external SCSI devices from the computer except default drive 6 if installed 2 If the device is connected to a SCSI adapter install the external terminator if no external SCSI devices are attac
326. n UltiMedia systems only 9577 486DX2 33 66 MHz 9577 Special Bid System Board for Pinnacle CD ROM Bootable Systems Optional Microprocessors P23T 25 50 MHz P23T 33 66 MHz 2MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 4MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 8MB Memory Module Kit 70ns Control Assembly Assy Without Volume Control Power Switch Cable Speaker Assy With Volume Control Power Switch with button Cable and Speaker Pedestal Miscellaneous Parts Kit see page 303 92F0003 92F0249 92F0272 92F0250 92F0250 96F7763 96F7764 96F7640 92F0247 92F0248 96F7755 92F0058 92F0138 85F0086 10G3971 96F7758 92F0042 87F4836 41G3877 33F8354 39G6407 65G8615 39G2668 39G5698 39G2669 39G6086 39G6444 92F0147 92F2582 92F0102 92F0105 64F3606 92F0002 41G3929 92F0000 92F0015 Hardware Maintenance Service 261 Index DASD 9557 9577 8 Drive Tray 3 5 Inch Drive Bays 1 2 3 85F0097 5 25 Inch Bay Drive Guides 2 92F0014 9 1 44MB Diskette Drive 85F0050 9 2 88MB Diskette Drive 64F4148 9 2 88MB 3 5 inch with electronic eject 92F0132 3 5 inch Bezel Bay 1 for 73G6059 73G6067 5 25 inch Bezel Bay 1 for 73G6059 73G6068 5 25 inch Bezel Bay 2 for 73G6059 73G6069 Bezel Bay 1 for 92F0132 92F0146 Bezel Bays 2 and 3 for 92F0132 92F0133 Diskette Drive Cable 96F7756 1 2MB 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive 64F4102 Rail Kit for 64F4102 85F0041 left right rails screws 7 40MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 56F8866 7 60MB Hard Di
327. n program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 Note To create an array using hard disks in an existing array refer to Redefining Space in an Array on page 169 2 Select Create delete array from the Main Menu 3 Select Create disk array from the Create Delete Array menu The cursor will be active in the Bay Array selection list Important In the following step when you press Enter to Select a drive for an array you cannot deselect it by pressing Enter again as you can with the hot spare selection process Carefully determine which drives you want to include in the array before beginning the selection process If you change your mind after selecting the drives for an array you can delete the array by selecting Delete disk array from the Create Delete Array menu and begin again 4 Select each drive you want in the array by using the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the drive and then pressing Enter As you select each drive the status will change from RDY Ready to ONL Online 5 When you have selected all the drives you want to include in the array press Esc The cursor will become active in the menu 6 If you have drives you did not use in this array and you want to create another array you can do one of the following Define the logical drive or drives for this array then create another array and its logical drives See D
328. n the MAP you might be sent to the Symptom to FRU Index There you will find a list error symptoms error codes and the possible causes The most likely cause is always listed first and it is in bold type Another use for the Symptom to FRU Index is to help you decide which FRUs to bring with you on a service call Try to get the customers POST error or error symptom from the dispatcher The MAP can send you to a Symptom to FRU Index under various conditions Listed below are the actions to take for most conditions Symptom Response Information Action POST Error Use the first error that except 1999 range appears on the screen If multiple error codes appear diagnose them in the order that they appear the multiple errors might be false errors POST Error in the Refer to IML and IPL I999XXXX Range Errors on page 55 Any POST Error Plus an Diagnose the error code Incorrect Audio Response first No POST Error Refer to Symptoms in the index System Starts Up in BASIC Refer to IML and IPL Errors on page 55 Error Range is Not Listed An additional service package is required for the device generating the error Refer to that service package 114 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Error Code Format This section provides an explanation of the encoded SCSI and non SCSI Post error codes and detailed information about each code Error messages are displayed on the screen as
329. n to the Main Menu Note The status of the hard disk drive determines the status of the logical drives in the array in which the hard disk is grouped Bay Array Selection List The status of the drives in the Bay Array selection list is defined as follows Status Meaning CDR CD ROM drive installed DDD Defective The drive is an online or hot spare drive that does not respond to commands If a RDY drive is defective or powered down it shows an empty bay a blank status not a DDD status FMT Format The drive is being reformatted HSP Hot spare The drive will replace a similar drive that becomes defective in real time At that time its status changes to ONL and its array association is displayed OFL Offline The drive is a good drive that has replaced a defective drive in a RAID level 1 or level 5 array It is associated with an array but does not contain any valid data The drive state remains OFL during the rebuild phase Hardware Maintenance Service 165 Status Meaning ONL Online The drive is part of an array If this drive fails logical drives defined in the array in which this drive is grouped will have a status of offline if the logical drive is assigned RAID level 0 with a good status or Critical if the logical drive is assigned RAID level 1 or level 5 with a good status RDY Ready The drive is recognized by the adapter and is available
330. nce Manual Symptom Error FRU Action 00020XXY 000217XY 1 System Board If the Y digit is in the Memory range to V suspect Memory Riser Card the model 90 95 processor 90 board first t Processor Board See page 126 90 95 2 System Board 000210XX 000211XX 1 Processor Board Check memory 90 95 2 System Board Memory 3 Memory Riser Card 90 4 System Board 000214XX 000215XX 1 System Board 000216XX 000221XX Memory 000226XX 000240XX Memory Riser Card 000235XX 000241XX 90 Check memory It might be System Board the wrong type or in the Processor Board wrong slot 90 95 2 Bus Adapter 000225XX 1 System Board Check memory It might be Memory the wrong type or wrong Memory Riser Card speed 90 System Board Processor Board 90 95 2 Bus Adapter 000221XX 1 System Board ROM to RAM parity error 000231XX 1 Expanded Memory Option 00024300 00024400 1 Processor Board 90 95 000245XX 000246XX 1 Processor Board Check memory t 2 Memory Riser Card 90 3 System Board 4 System Board Memory 00024700 1 Processor Board 90 95 000251XX Information only Memory location changed on the memory expansion option 00025200 1 Processor Board 90 95 2 System Board t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Maintenance Service 39 Symptom Error
331. nd 486DLC2 System Board Upgrade Model 76 77 9576 9577 System Board Model 80 041 071 111 121 311 321 System Board Model 80 A16 A21 A31 System Board Server 85 486 System Board PS 2 9585 xKx and 9585 xNx System Board Model 90 XP 486 System Board Model 95 486 System Board Server 9595 9595A PC Server 486DX2 System Board PC Server Pentium System Board Parts Catalog Model 25 25 286 25SX 8525 Parts Model 30 8530 Parts Model 30 286 8530 Parts Model 33 9533 Pars Model 35 8535 Parts Model 40 8540 Parts Model 50 8550 Parts 2 Model 53 9553 Parts Model 55 8555 SX Model 56 8556 Parts 2 Model 57 8557 Parts Model 60 8560 65 8565 and 80 8580 Parts Model 70 8570 Parts Models 56 76 9556 9576 Parts Models 57 77 M57 M77 9557 9577 Parts Model 90 8590 Pars I re rere a viii PS 2 Maintenance Manual 197 198 199 200 PC Server 8640 Parts PC Server 500 Type 86XX Parts Server 85 9585 Model 95 XP 486 8595 Parts Server 9595 PS 2 9585 xKx and PS 2 9585 xNx Parts o gs oe ery ds Server 9595A Parts Model 3509 Parts Model 3510 Parts Model
332. nd 95 On these systems the X digit of the POST error for example 00020xXx indicates the socket location Determining Failing Memory Location X 56 57 76 77 90 85 95 digit Socket Socket Socket Socket equals X 1 Mem 1 Mem 1 J1 J11 A1 X 2 Mem 3 Mem 3 J3 B1 X 3 Mem 2 Mem 2 J2 A2 X 4 Mem 4 Mem 4 J4 B2 X 5 J1 J14 X 6 J2 B3 X 7 J3 A4 X 8 J4 B4 X U Unknown When a mixture of 4MB 8MB and 16MB or larger memory module kits are installed in the 9585 xKx and Hardware Maintenance Service 125 9585 xNx computers the smaller kits must be installed in the higher numbered connectors A4 B4 is the highest and the larger kits in the lower numbered connectors A1 B1 is the lowest Determining Memory Type Size and Speed The Y digit of the POST error for example 00020xxY indicates the type size and speed Size Speed digit equals Y 0 Parity 4MB 80ns Y 1 Parity 2MB 100ns Y 2 Parity 1MB 100ns Y 4 Parity 4MB 70ns Y 5 Parity 2MB 85ns Y 6 Parity 1MB 85ns Y 8 Parity 8MB 80ns Y 9 Parity 2MB 80ns Y B Parity 8MB 70ns Y C Parity 2MB 70ns Y D Parity 2MB 120ns Y E Parity 1MB 120ns Y K ECC 16MB 70ns Y Q ECC 4MB 70ns Y R ECC 32MB 70ns Y S ECC 8MB 70ns Y T ECC 2MB 70ns Y Z Unknown If you are still unable to determine which memory module kit failed follow the isolation procedure under Finding the Failing Memory on page 125
333. ndividual test 1 Use the up and down arrow keys and to move to the highlighted bar to the test you want to run 2 Press Enter to run the test Note The results of the test appear in the lower right hand Test Log window Also if you enabled Test Logging the results are recorded in the Test Log 3 When the test completes press Esc to return to the Test Group Menu Stopping the Tests To stop running a specific test or stop testing after you have started a test press Esc while the test is running The test pauses at the first possible opportunity and the Skip Abort Test Menu appears with the following options Option Action Continue The test program begins testing where it left off Skip to The test program skips the current test but next test remaining tests for the selected Test Module continue Skip to The test program skips the remaining tests in next group the current test group Abort all The test program stops and returns to the tests previous menu Using the System Utilities The Diagnostic Diskette contains utilities for formatting diskettes performing a low level format on a hard disk and editing Formatting Diskettes To format a diskette within the Diagnostic programs select one of the following options Format A high density 1 44MB Format A low density 720KB Format B high density 1 44MB Format B low density 720KB After selecting one of
334. ndling ESD sensitive parts Keep the parts in protective packages until they are inserted into the product Avoid contact with other people Wear a grounded wrist strap against your skin to eliminate static on your body Prevent the part from touching your clothing Most clothing is insulative and retains a charge even when you are wearing a wrist strap Use the black side of a grounded work mat to provide a static free work surface The mat is especially useful when handling ESD sensitive devices Select a grounding system such as those listed below to provide protection that meets the specific service requirement Note The use of a grounding system is desirable but not required to protect against ESD damage Attach the ESD ground clip to any frame ground ground braid or green wire ground Use an ESD common ground or reference point when working on a double insulated or battery operated computer You can use coax or connector outside shells on these computers Use the round ground prong of the AC plug on AC operated computers Grounding Requirements Electrical grounding of the PS 2 computer is required for operator safety and correct computer function Proper grounding of the electrical outlet can be verified by a certified electrician Hardware Maintenance Reference 369 Drive and Diskette Compatibility Matrix The following table provides identification information for 3 5 inch diskette drives
335. nector J20 13 Bus adapter connector 14 System board memory 15 Battery 16 connector 2 17 connector 1 LAL al 0 NH a EH m gt UU i MUIT Eo Eu vare Hardware Maintenance Service 191 Model 35 40 System Board Note See Model 33 note Real time clock module connector Pointing device connector Keyboard connector Parallel port Serial port Display connector Control connector Control Assembly Power supply connector P2 Power supply connector P1 1 Diskette drive connector 11 Hard disk drive connector 12 Password override connector J14 13 80387SX Math coprocessor connector 14 Bus adapter connector 15 Memory module connector 1 16 connector 2 17 connector WE Z iii 192 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 50 System Board Type 1 Expansion slots Extended video adapter slot Hard disk drive bus adapter slot Fuse Fan assembly connector Memory module package connec
336. nfiguration Running Automatic Configuration might alter customized configuration settings Note the current settings using View configuration If the configuration was customized save it then restore it to the customized settings after service is complete 150 PS 2 Maintenance Manual ServerGuide CDs Type 86XX SCSI Controller on the System Board SCSI Device Default Settings SCSI Diagnostic Tests SCSI ID Using to Help Isolate Failures Servicing LAN Stations Workstations Software Hardware Mismatch Problems Undetermined Problems VPD Codes Information System Board Locations Parts Catalog Hardware Maintenance Service 151 Using the CD ROM Drive and ServerGuide you are installing an operating system it is important that you read and understand the following information The ServerGuide CD contains SCSI small computer system interface and SVGA super video graphics array device drivers that will be automatically installed if you install one of the operating systems that are available in the CD package If you choose not to install one of the operating systems that are available on the CDs you still must use the ServerGuide CD to create diskettes containing the SCSI device drivers and SVGA video device drivers The device driver diskettes that you create will contain README files that explain how to install these drivers and co
337. ng voltages to give the power supply capacitors time to discharge On a Model 95 there is an access cover fan to cool the processor If that fan does not work you have one of the following problems No power to the fan 12 V 1 4 V dc required at the two fan cable pins on the base Defective J28 cable check cable continuity Hardware Maintenance Service 147 Defective fan To test the fan use a two wire jumper to connect the fan terminals to the cable pins on the base Defective system board Model 3510 Lead Lead V de V de Pin Pin Minimum Maximum B D 3 7 6 2 C A 49 0 15 0 Model 3532 A C D Lead Lead V de V dc Pin Pin Minimum Maximum B D 4 75 5 25 11 40 12 60 148 PS 2 Maintenance Manual OBI DASD Hot Swap Storage Expansion Enclosure If the power on indicator is not on and if the power supply fan is not running check the power cord for proper installation and continuity Note Verify that the voltage select switch if applicable is set for the correct voltage If the power cord is OK either the power supply is defective or a defective device is causing the power supply to shut off Check the power supply voltages If the voltages are incorrect replace the power supply If the voltages are correct and the Symptom to FRU index does not solve the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 183 Connector P3
338. nnector Keyboard connector Memory module connectors Tamper evident connector Power supply connector Processor Cache connector Diskette drive cable connector Password override connector JMP1 Control panel connector Battery Privilege access password jumper Server guard jumper If a server guard is not installed the jumper must connect the two pins closest to the control panel connector He 210 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 90 XP 486 System Board NH Il 12 13 Power switch speaker assembly J2 Battery BT1 SCSI adapter slot J1 Adapter slots J1 J3 J4 and J6 Processor board slot J8 Memory riser card slot J11 Memory riser card slot J14 Video memory connectors Diskette drive cable connector J15 Power supply connector J25 Power supply connector J26 Power on password override connector J10 Fan connector J5 Hardware Maintenance Service 211 Model 95 XP 486 System Board 1 32 bit expansion slots video extensions J9 J11 Processor board slot Serial connector Parallel connector J28 connector access cover fan Pointing device connector Keyboard connector Memor
339. nnector 3 MEM 3 OU PF t I Model 70 System Board Full Size 16 MHz 20 MHz Hardware Maintenance Service 203 Model 70 System Board 25 MHz Battery speaker assembly connector Hard disk and diskette drive bus adapter connector Expansion slot 1 16 bit Expansion slot 2 32 bit Expansion slot 3 32 bit 80387 Math coprocessor connector Memory module connector 4 MEM 4 Memory module connector 3 MEM 3 Memory module connector 2 MEM 2 1 Memory module connector 1 MEM 1 Nb 0 O 204 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 70 486DX33 and 486DLC2 System Board Upgrade 0 NH p Power supply connector Diskette drive cable connector Memory module connectors P23T Upgrade connectors Password override connector J11 Expansion slots Video connector Serial connector Parallel connector Pointing device connector Keyboard connector a nmm lo L J7 annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnai J11 Hardware Maintenance Service 205 Model 76 77 9576 9577 System Board Pointing device connector J1 Keyboard connector J2 Parallel port connector J3 Serial port connector 1 J4 Serial port connector 2 J5 Oscillator select jumper SPD 25 MHz systems only 7 Option microprocessor s
340. ntenance Service 41 Symptom Error FRU Action 00110100 Serial connector error possible system board failure 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 001101XX 00110200 00110600 00110800 System Board 2 Any Serial Device 00110900 00110700 1 Communications Cable 2 System Board 001102XX 1 Run Advanced Card selected feedback error Diagnostics 001103XX Port fails register check 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 2 System Board 001106XX Serial option cannot be turned off 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 2 System Board 001107XX 001110XX Register test failed 1 Serial Device Cable 2 System Board 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 2 System Board 001116XX 1 Run Advanced 16550 interrupt error Diagnostics 001117XX 1 Run Advanced Failed baud rate test Diagnostics 0011XXXX 1 System Board not listed above See Power Supply Voltage Check on page 138 before replacing system board 001201XX Check voltages T 001202XX 001206XX 001208XX 001209XX 0012XXXX System Board 2 Any Serial Device 1 Dual Async Adapter A 2 System Board 3 Any Serial Device 001207XX 1 Communications Cable 2 Dual Async Adapter A 00129020 1 Cached Processor Disk cache error Option 2 System Board 001301XX 001302XX Game Adapter 2 Joystick 001402XX Printer not ready Information only t If this symbol is
341. nts For Interupt level int n n can be 3 4 5 7 9 10 11 12 or 15 For I O Address port xxxx xxxx can be from 200 to 2FO from 300 to 360 or from 400 to FFEO in multiples of 10 In an OS 2 environment for DOS and Windows workstations change these wireless adapter parameters through the LAN Support Program diskette Checking the Base Configuration OS 2 Environment To verify that all prerequisites have been installed as defined by the configuration for your base refer to Table 10 on page 103 If all the prerequisites have been installed access LAPS and verify the options binds and parameters that were selected during installation If they are correct you must re install 102 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Table 10 OS 2 Prerequisites for Base and NAP station Prerequisites Base Stand alone Base Wired Stand alone Base Wired Lan Cell with Base Wired Lan Cell NAP only NAP without NAP TCP IP N A N A V2 0 V2 0 V2 0 TCP IP Using Network Management V2 0 Network Manager is WNM V2 0 and CSD UN50382 V2 0 and CSD UN50382 V2 0 and CSD UN50382 V2 0 and CSD UN50382 IBM IEEE 802 2 IBM Wireless LAN Bridge NTS 2 V1 0 N A NTS 2 V1 0 NTS 2 V1 0 with CSD level 7020 NTS 2 V1 0 NTS 2 V1 0 with CSD level 7020 NTS 2 V1 0 NTS 2 V1 0 with CSD level 7020 NTS 2 V1 0 N A Note 1 Install and bind TCP IP with your device driver depending on your backbone adapter If
342. numbers 443 10BASE T 10BASE2 Ethernet adapters ISA 90 20 and 25 mhz processor boards 284 25 SX system board locations 188 25 286 parts FRUs 223 25 286 system board locations 187 25 parts FRUs 223 25 system board locations 185 186 25SX parts FRUs 223 30 286 parts FRUs 229 30 286 system board locations 190 30 parts FRUs 227 30 system board locations 189 33 parts FRUs 231 33 system board locations 191 35 parts FRUs 233 35 system board locations 192 3509 parts FRUs 285 3510 parts FRUs 287 3511 parts FRUs 289 3532 parts FRUs 291 295 40 8540 parts FRUs 236 40 system board locations 192 50 8550 parts FRUs 239 50 50Z system board upgrades locations 194 50 memory problems 125 50 system board locations 193 53 9553 xBx system board upgrade locations 195 53 9553 parts FRUs 241 55 SX 8555 parts FRUs 243 55 memory problems 125 55 system board upgrade locations 197 55 system board locations 196 56 8556 parts FRUs 246 Copyright IBM Corp 1994 447 56 8556 system board locations 198 56 9556 parts FRUs 257 56 9556 system board locations 199 56 memory problems 125 57 8557 parts FRUs 248 57 8557 system board locations 198 57 9557 system board locations 199 57 amp M57 9557 parts FRUs 260 57 memory problems 125 60 8560 parts FRUs 251 60 65 80 system board 486DX2 486DLC2 upgrades loca
343. o Run the Low Level Format Program There are three reasons to run this program 1 You are installing software that requires a low level format 2 You get recurring messages from the diagnostic tests telling you to run the low level format program on the hard disk 3 You want to try this as a last resort before replacing a failing hard disk drive How to Run the Low Level Format Program 1 Power on the computer 2 Start the system programs as described in Starting System Program Diagnostics on page 425 3 When the Main Menu appears press Ctrl A 4 When the Advanced Diagnostic Menu appears select Format Hard Disk Then follow the instructions on the screen Preparing the Hard Disk for Use When the low level format program completes you must copy all the files to the hard disk Before you can copy the files you must 1 Create the System Partition if the hard disk drive had a System Partition using the Restore the System Partition utility program from the system programs on the System Diskettes 2 Format the hard disk using the operating system The commands vary with the operating system Refer to the operating system manual for a description of the program commands to use 3 Install the operating system You are now ready to reinstall the files Hardware Maintenance Service 129 Option Microprocessor Jumper 76 77 The speed jumper labeled SPD is on the system board near the option micropro
344. o to Related Service Information on page 107 46 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error FRU Action 010453XX Information only Wrong drive type 010454XX 1 Run Advanced Sector buffer test error Diagnostics 010455XX 010456XX Controller error 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 010459XX Drive diagnostic command error Information only 010461XX 1 Run Advanced Drive format error Diagnostics 010462XX 1 Run Advanced Controller seek error Diagnostics 010464XX 1 Run Advanced Hard Drive read error Diagnostics 010467XX 1 Run Advanced Drive non fatal seek error Diagnostics 010468XX 1 Run Advanced Drive fatal seek error Diagnostics 010469XX 1 Run Advanced Drive soft error count exceeded Diagnostics 010470XX 010471XX 010472XX Controller wrap error 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 010473XX Corrupt data Low level format might be required 010480XX Information only Hard Disk Drive ESDI Drive Cable Controller System Board RON 010481XX ESDI drive D seek error Run Advanced Diagnostics 010482XX Drive select acknowledgement bad 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 010490XX 010491XX Drive 0 1 read error Run Advanced Diagnostics Riser Card if installed Hard Disk Drive System Board RON 010499XX Drive controller error Run Advanced Diagnostics 2 Riser Card if insta
345. oard 90 95 3 System Board No beep fan runs and 000258XX is displayed Check memory t 1 System Board No beep fan runs power on indicator is on and computer hangs during POST with a message displayed See Undetermined Problems on page 183 t System Board Processor Board 3 Power Supply No beep and the computer is otherwise functional 1 Control Speaker Assembly 2 Processor Board 90 95 3 System Board t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Maintenance Service 27 Symptom Error FRU Action No beep and the computer is not functional See Undetermined Problems on page 183 t System Board 2 Power Supply No beep fan runs power on indicator is on and computer hangs during POST with no message displayed See Undetermined Problems on page 183 1 System Board 2 Processor Board 90 95 3 Any Device or Adapter 4 Bus Adapter t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 28 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Beep Symptoms Symptom Error FRU Action One long and one short beep 1 Display Adapter any type Check display 2 System Board 3 Video Memory if used 4 Bus Adapter 5 Power Supply One long and two short 1 Display Adapter
346. oard Upgrade 486DLC2 System Board Upgrade 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade Card 60 486DX33 Processor Upgrade Card 80 System Unit 70 486DX33 Processor Upgrade Card 486DX33 System Board Upgrade 486DLC2 System Board Upgrade 61G3502 71G2625 71G2633 92F0102 92F0105 73G3233 64F3606 60G2950 95F4721 95F4728 92F0403 92F0404 92F0405 71G2683 71G2684 71G2602 92F0102 92F0105 73G3233 64F3606 60G2950 95F4721 95F4728 92F0403 92F0404 92F0405 71G2662 71G2684 71G2685 71G2643 71G2610 71G2625 92F0437 92F0436 71G2641 71G2606 Hardware Maintenance Service 295 CD ROM Drives Internal CD ROM Drive eject button above slot Terminator Kit for 81F7930 Cleaning Kit for 81F7930 Disks CD Caddy Internal CD ROM II Drive With eject button below slot Enhanced Internal CD ROM II Drive With eject button below slot Terminator Kit for 92F0084 Signal Cable Power Cable Remote ID Switch Cable 3510 Audio Card Cable Screws 3510 Grounding Bracket 8560 8565 8580 Mounting Slide 8590 CD ROM Drive Bezel Assemblies 8557 8560 8565 8580 8590 8595 Media Kit No Cleaning Necessary for 92F0084 Test Disk CD Caddy CD ROM Parts Ground Spring Model 95 CD Caddy Rail Kit 8560 8565 8580 3510 Rail Kit 8557 Headphones 296 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 81F7930 59F3530 59F3562 92F0084 61G1901 92F0082 34F0043 72X8521 92F0086 92F0085 85F0010 92F0162 85F0008 34F0044 92F0081 64F0138 31F4232 92F0
347. ocket 049 25 MHz and 33 MHz systems only 8 External SCSI connector J6 Internal SCSI connector J7 1 Control panel connector J19 11 Power supply connector P2 J18 12 Power supply connector P1 J17 13 Diskette drive connector J21 14 Bus adapter connector J13 15 Password override connector JMP1 TL 206 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 80 041 071 111 121 311 321 System Board Power supply connector Diskette drive connector Memory expansion kit connectors Math coprocessor connector 8580 111 121 311 321 Battery speaker connector Math coprocessor connector 8580 041 071 16 bit expansion slot 32 bit expansion slot Video slot slot 6 Display connector Serial connector Parallel connector Pointing device connector Keyboard connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 Ii 12 13 14 E E E Hardware Maintenance Service 207 Model 80 A16 A21 A31 System Board Power supply connector Diskette drive connector Memory expansion kit connectors Math coprocessor connector Battery speaker connector 16 bit expansion slot 32
348. ode appears and remains on the screen 1 Restart the workstation 2 Ensure that you have not exceeded the number of devices that the network can support If the above items are correct restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter 82 5 2 Maintenance Manual Problem Action ET 00 00 02 Field stops incrementing If the elapsed time indicator stops incrementing check that 1 All cables and cords are properly attached to the workstation 2 The address for the network adapter was properly added to the network software 3 The adapter configuration BNC UTP is set properly 4 The server is operational If the above items are correct restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter OP XXXX Field appears If a code other than appears an error has occurred during startup The following is a list of possible error messages 1 The network adapter was not found Check to see that 1 The adapter is installed in the workstation 2 All cables and cords are connected correctly to the workstation and network access point 3 The file server is available and fully operational If the above items are correct restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter 3 The shared RAM diagnostic tests failed Ensure that the RAM address assigned for the network adapter does not conflict wi
349. of the failing drive 3 Turn the knob clockwise one quarter 14 of the way then slide it to the left 4 Pull the drive out of the computer 5 Reverse this procedure to install the new drive Note If the array was configured using level 0 the information on the failed drive cannot be restored to the new drive Bay IDs Drives are marked with a bay ID when you insert them into a bay drive is removed and reinstalled in a different bay the system will alert you that you have a drive in an incorrect bay and tell you which bay to use Configuration The IBM RAID Controller Configuration Diskette is required to configure the disk array The Main Menu of the configuration program provides the following choices Help To see help for the choices on the screen View configuration To see the existing disk array configuration Create or delete array To select the drives for an array you want to create or to delete a previously created array 398 5 2 Maintenance Manual Initialize or synchronize array After establishing an array If you are using one or more drives that have been previously used select Initialize logical drive to a predetermined state Any data existing on the drive is altered If you do not want to alter the data on the drive select Synchronize logical drive to recompute and rewrite the parity data on the drive Rebuild device To replace a failed drive and rebuild logical drives RAID levels 1 and
350. of your operating system and do not require you to start the program from a startable diskette or from a startable compact disc You can start these programs from your active operating system desktop Each of these monitoring programs allow you view the RAID configuration reconfigure the array when replacing a defective drive and perform tuning tasks such as changing the write policy Trademark of the IBM Corporation NetWare is a trademark of Novell Inc Banyan and Vines are trademarks of Banyan Systems Inc Hardware Maintenance Service 175 To monitor the drive status with OS 2 Novell NetWare Microsoft Windows and Banyan Vines you must run the administration programs The RAID controller diskette contains files that must be installed when you use OS 2 NetWare or Banyan Vines See the README file on the RAID controller diskette for installation and usage instructions for OS 2 RAID Controller Administration and Monitor OS 2 RAID Controller Administration for Netware and IBM RAID Controller Administration for Banyan Vines For OS 2 RAID NetFinity Alert Manager see the ServerGuide CD documentation Drivers The RAID adapter requires the installation of device drivers See the README file on the RAID controller diskette for detailed instructions If you install OS 2 from the ServerGuide CD the device drivers will be installed automatically however you install OS 2 from diskette you will need to install th
351. ograms or Services except those expressly designated by IBM are the user s responsibility IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to the IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation 500 Columbus Avenue Thornwood NY 10594 U S A Trademarks The following terms denoted by an asterisk in this publication are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States and or other countries AIX AT HelpCenter HelpClub HelpLearn HelpWare IBM Micro Channel OS 2 Personal System 2 Portmaster PS 2 Presentation Manager PS ValuePoint SystemXtra ThinkPad UltiMedia XGA The following terms denoted by a double asterisk in this publication are trademarks of other companies 80387SX Intel Corporation ActionMedia Intel Corporation Microsoft Microsoft Corporation Netware Novell Corporation Novell Novell Inc PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association QAPlus DiagSoft Inc Sco The Santa Cruz Operation Inc Triplett Triplett Corporation UNIX UNIX System Laboratories Inc VESA Video Electronics Standards Association Windows Microsoft Corporation XENIX Microsoft Corporation Hardware Maintenance Reference 445 446 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Index Special Characters IML initial machine load 382 Numerics 1 800 phone
352. ollowing is a list of possible error conditions that can occur when the workstation is attempting to connect to the network 74 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Problem Action AC 0040 0000 0000 Field appears AE 166 XX 0011 Field appears This field indicates that the adapter has detected an internal error Restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter If the problem still remains replace the system board This field indicates that the workstation contains two Token Ring adapters The primary adapter shown here 166 could not establish communication with the file server The reason is indicated by the xx message and can be either BU or OP The BU and OP were described previously Restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Token Ring adapter If the problem still remains replace the system board BU XXXX Field appears This field indicates errors that occur during startup If a code other than appears and the field is highlighted an error has occurred The following is a list of possible error codes 24 The shared RAM diagnostic failed Ensure that the RAM address assigned for the Token Ring adapter does not conflict with other devices installed in the workstation Refer to Selecting Network Configuration Parameters on page 87 if you need additional information about the configuration parameters All other error codes Replace
353. olumn of the Logical Drive list d To stop the initialization at any time press Esc Then press Esc again to return to the menu or press Enter to continue initializing the drive To back up the disk array configuration to diskette you will need a 3 5 inch formatted diskette To back up the disk array configuration a Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu b Select Backup config to diskette Follow the instructions on the screen A pop up window shows the default file name of CONFIG You can change the file name by typing over the default The Backup program will assign a file name extension of dmc PS 2 Maintenance Manual Drive Maintenance The following section provides information about status indicators for logical and hard disk drives and the results of a hard disk drive failure It also contains procedures for replacing defective drives and for redefining the space in an array by replacing logical drives Obtaining Drive Status To see the ID capacity and other information about each of the hard disk drives attached to the RAID adapter 1 Start the RAID configuration program See Starting the RAID Configuration Program on page 157 2 Select Drive information 3 Use the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key to highlight each of the drives shown in the Bay Array selection list As a drive is highlighted the information for that drive is shown at the bottom of the screen 4 Press Esc to retur
354. onal processor on a 20 or 25 MHz processor board On the 20 MHz board below left the jumper 2 must be in positions 1 and 2 if a 487SX processor is installed in connector 3 If there is not a 487SX processor in connector 3 the jumper must be in positions 2 and 3 The 25 MHz processor board below right has a second processor connector 3 for either an optional 487SX processor extended math capability or an 80486SX 25 50 MHz processor If you install an option processor in connector 3 of the 25 MHz board you do not have to remove the existing processor it is overridden Carefully insert the tip of a screwdriver between the processor and the connector edge and gently twist the screwdriver around all edges until the processor raises up When you reinstall the processor align the beveled corner 1 with the beveled corner marked on the board Bee 284 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 3509 Parts 285 Hardware Maintenance Index Internal ISA CD ROM 1 2 3 4 Adapter Data Cable 40 wire ribbon cable Drive Audio Cable Index External ISA CD ROM 5 6 7 8 286 Drive Enclosure External Data Cable Adapter Drive PS 2 Maintenance Manual 61G4110 61G4111 61G4109 61G4112 61G4113 61G4115 61G4114 61G4109 Model 3510 Parts Index 3510
355. onfiguration see Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 170 c After you back up the disk array follow the instructions that came with the operating system and install the operating system Non Disk Array Models Only f the server is nota disk array model do the following 1 2 Press the CD ROM tray release button to release the tray from the server Remove the CD from the tray and push the tray back into the server Follow the instructions that came with the operating system and install the operating system Hardware Maintenance Service 153 Configuring the Disk Array Type 86XX The following information applies only to disk array models Use this information to perform the tasks necessary to configure add change or delete one or more disk arrays If you did not create an IBM RAID controller diskette go to Using the CD ROM Drive and ServerGuide on page 152 Familiarize yourself with the information contained in this manual and the RAID redundant array of inexpensive disks information in the User s Reference shipped with the server Verify the disk array configuration The disk array model comes configured as one logical drive view the disk array configuration go to Viewing the RAID Configuration on page 159 and select View Configuration from the Main Menu To create a disk array go to Creating a Disk Array on page 161 Backup the disk array configuration Se
356. onfiguration has been changed run Automatic Configuration Otherwise run Advanced Diagnostics Check SCSI Device Default Settings on page 180 t 2 System Board 3 Bus Adapter 000175XX Security error The system board EEPROM failed 1 System Board 000176XX Security error The covers were removed without using the key The tamper evident switch was tripped 1 Start the system from the Reference Diskette or server image and reconfigure the system 2 Security Switch Assembly 3 System Board 000177XX 000178XX Security error Passwords corrupted Reset 1 System Board 000179XX System error log might be full 1 Go into the log and note the errors Clear the log then run Advanced Diagnostics 000181XX The computer requires a network adapter for remote IPL or a hard disk drive ID of 6 LUN 0 for IML neither of these were detected 1 Run Automatic Configuration 2 Network Adapter 3 Hard Disk Drive 4 System Board 000182XX Privileged access password PAP data is corrupted To restore it move jumper JMP2 to position 0 write enabled 000183XX Wrong password entered Information only 1 Enter the Privileged access password PAP instead of the power on password t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Maintenance Service 37 Symptom Error
357. onyms Abbreviations and Terms We Want Your Comments Do You Need Technical References Problem Determination Tips Phone Numbers U S and Canada Notices AEE fedd SEE Trademarks Index ke Ra a br xii PS 2 Maintenance Manual Hardware Maintenance Service This part of the manual contains the general checkout procedures related service procedures Symptom to FRU indexes and parts listings for PS 2 products Note This manual and the diagnostic tests are intended to test only IBM products Non IBM products of any kind including adapter cards accelerator boards options or non IBM devices can give false errors and invalid computer responses If you remove a non IBM device and the symptom goes away the problem is with the device you removed Warning The drives in the computer you are servicing might have been rearranged or the drive startup sequence changed Be extremely careful during write operations such as copying saving or formatting Data or programs can be overwritten if you select an incorrect drive FRU Replacement Strategy Use the following strategy to prevent unnecessary FRU replacement and service expense If you are instructed to replace a FRU and that does not correct the problem reinstall the original FRU before you continue Some computer have both a processor board and a system board If you are instruc
358. ord on page 378 Tamper Evident Switch 9556 9557 Security on page 375 Memory Address Conflicts Resolving Memory Address Conflicts on page 408 Replacing the system board does not correct the problem removable processor is installed Processor Board Installation 90 95 on page 135 26 PS 2 Maintenance Manual No Beep Symptoms Symptom Error FRU Action No beep fan runs power on LED lights memory may or may not count and blinking cursor continuously loops 1 Processor Cache 90 95 2 Processor Board Memory count hangs during POST Check memory t 1 System Board Memory 2 Memory Option if installed 3 System Board 4 Processor No beep power on indicator does not come on and fan does not run Important On computers with a tamper evident switch when the cover is off the switch must be in the up or on position to supply power to the computer Also the switch might be out of adjustment not making contact Remove the switch and form the contacts If this is not the problem see Undetermined Problems on page 183 T 1 Adapter Guide Switch Assembly 2 Power Supply 3 Control Speaker Assembly 4 Processor Board 90 95 System Board Any Device or Adapter 7 Bus Adapter No beep fan runs and 000215XX is displayed Check memory t 1 System Board Memory 2 Processor B
359. ou boot the Reference Diskette you will get an error The system is trying to load IML from an inoperable hard disk To avoid this you must first erase the power on password first If there is a privileged access password set you do not need to erase it but you will be prompted to enter it On FLASH systems POST and BIOS code is contained in the FLASH EEPROMS Regardless of the condition of the default hard disk you will always be able to load diagnostics from the Reference Diskette On Model 90 and Model 95 be sure you have the correct type of Reference Diskette there is more than one type For a list of FLASH and IML systems see PS 2 System Specifications on page 435 After you replace the default hard disk drive that is the drive with the System Partition you must recopy all of the Hardware Maintenance Reference 385 system programs onto the replacement hard disk To recopy the programs 1 Start the system using the customer s backup copy of the current System Partition 2 Select Backup Restore system programs from the Main Menu 3 Run the Restore the System Partition option to load the IML image if it is an IML system the system programs and the customer and advanced diagnostic programs onto the default hard disk drive Notes 1 If the user s backup of the System Partition is incomplete you will not restore the entire System Partition If this occurs after you have recopied the IML
360. ox Modem PCMCIA Type II for Japan All other countries 43G3412 43G3399 43G3414 43G3392 58G4330 54F0693 54F0695 43G4302 54F0715 43G3396 43G3415 54F0720 54F0693 54F0763 43G4302 43G3407 43G3392 66G0902 54F0996 58X9868 43G3409 43G3410 43G3411 54F0763 54F0997 43G3392 54F0998 54F0999 54F0717 43G3416 43G3397 43G3413 43G3392 54F0515 71G6222 66G0901 92F0289 Hardware Maintenance Service 307 SCSI Adapter Terminators Terminator External for 85F0063 Terminator Internal for 85F0063 Terminator Internal for 8520002 Tools and Miscellaneous Data Acquisition Distribution Panel Data Migration Facility Ethernet D Shell Wrap Plug Ethernet BNC T Connector Ethernet BNC 50 ohm Terminator 2 required Grounding Wire Set Hard Disk Drive Removal Tool Keyboard Key Cap Removal Tool Plastic Envelope For Wrap Plug Processor Removal Tool 9577 Screwdriver Kit SCSI Terminator any SCSI device space permitting SCSI Terminator Kit R PAC Terminator Modules 3 for 40 60 80 120 and 160MB SCSI Hard Disk Drives Snap Tool for Snap Removal Speech Control Assembly Video Memory Module Removal Tool Video Memory Module Insertion Tool Wrap Plug ISDN Primary Rate Adapter Wrap Plug Tri Connector Wrap Plug 6157 Tape Attachment Adapter A Wrap Plug Token Ring Network Adapter A Wrap Plug Realtime Interface Co Processor Multiport 2 78 pin Wrap Plug for Multiport Interface Cable Dir
361. poration QAPlus PRO is a trademark of DiagSoft Inc Related Publications The following publications are available from IBM or your IBM Authorized Dealer For Information About See Publication Disk Array technology RAID Configuration Program Configuring Your Disk Array booklet S82G 1506 Installation Planning for Personal System 2 computers Personal System 2 Installation Planning and Beyond G41G 2927 Installation Planning for Advanced Personal System 2 servers Advanced PS 2 Servers Planning and Selection Guide GG24 3927 PS ValuePoint computers IBM PS ValuePoint HMM S61G 1423 Laptop Notebook and Portable computers IBM Mobile Systems HMM Volume 1 S82G 1501 ThinkPad computers IBM Mobile Systems HMM Volume 2 S82G 1502 Monitors Displays IBM Display HMM Vol 1 SA38 0053 IBM Monitor HMM Vol 1 S68G 2484 IBM Monitor HMM Vol 2 S71G 4197 Obsolete Publications This manual obsoletes these previous publications Publication Part Form Number PS 2 HMM 71G3716 S52G 9971 PS 2 HMM Supplement 71G6781 S71G 6781 PS 2 HMM Supplement 82G3782 S82G 3782 PS 2 HMM Supplement 82G3836 S82G 3836 PS 2 HMM Supplement 82G3896 S82G 3896 PS 2 OBI Supplement 83G7709 S83G 7709 PS 2 HMM Supplement 83G7836 S83G 7836 PS 2 HMM Supplement 83G7912 S83G 7912 PS 2 OBI Suppl
362. power cord 3 Check the power cord for a A third wire ground connector in good condition Use a meter to measure third wire ground continuity for 0 1 ohm or less between the external ground pin and frame ground b The power cord should be the appropriate type as specified in Parts Catalog on page 222 c Insulation must not be frayed or worn 4 Remove the cover 5 Check for any obvious non IBM alterations Use good judgment as to the safety of any non IBM alterations 6 Check inside the unit for any obvious unsafe conditions such as metal filings contamination water or other liquids or signs of fire or smoke damage 7 Check for worn frayed or pinched cables 8 Check that the power supply cover fasteners screws or rivets have not been removed or tampered with 368 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Handling Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Devices Any computer part containing transistors or integrated circuits ICs should be considered sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD ESD damage can occur when there is a difference in charge between objects Protect against ESD damage by equalizing the charge so that the machine the part the work mat and the person handling the part are all at the same charge Notes 1 Use product specific ESD procedures when they exceed the requirements noted here 2 Make sure that the ESD protective devices you use have been certified ISO 9000 as fully effective When ha
363. power to the system in the case of a power outage They are usually used only when the potential loss of data or use is unacceptable Numerous devices of this type are available but not all of them produce an AC sine wave voltage U S PS 2 systems require sine wave If the uninterruptible power device is defective or the wrong type you might experience a failure that is extremely difficult to diagnose 424 PS 2 Maintenance Manual System Partition This section provides information regarding the programs in the System Partition Notes 1 If you are not familiar with the Reference and Diagnostic Diskettes System Diskettes refer to Reference and Diagnostic Diskettes on page 383 2 The system diagnostics files on the Reference and Diagnostic diskettes are also on the system partition The System Partition is a protected area of the hard disk It contains part of POST and BIOS referred to as the IML image The information stored in the System Partition is protected against accidental erasure or modification The user cannot access the System Partition through normal operating system Read and Write operations The System Partition also includes the system programs and the customer and advanced diagnostic programs The partition is not affected when the drive is formatted using the operating system format command The partition is erased if you use the advanced diagnostics format program Using the system programs
364. processor Extended Math Capability for 92F0079 80486 25 50 MHz Overdrive Processor runs internally at 50 MHz for 92F0079 80486DX2 25 50 MHz runs internally at 50 MHz 80486 50 MHz single socket both boards are one single FRU SCSI Adapter with cache SCSI Adapter without cache Terminator External for 8520063 Terminator Internal for 85F0063 Terminator Internal for 85F0002 Terminator in line for 320 400MB Memory Riser Card Support Bracket Video Memory Module Battery Label Kit Miscellaneous Parts Kit see page 301 Shipping Carton 92F0100 92F0147 92F0161 57F1597 85F0063 85F0002 33F8464 34F0025 57F2870 92F0142 57F3029 75X5894 33F8354 33F8367 33F8370 74F3583 Hardware Maintenance Service 265 Index DASD 90 6 6 15 16 17 18 N a uo 266 1 44MB 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Drive Slide for 64F0162 2 88MB Drive with slide not supported on all early type 1 systems Drive Slide for 64F0204 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel 5 25 Inch Hard Disk Drive Bezel Bezel for Hard Disk Drive 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel 3 5 Inch Device Filler Bezel Blank Bezel for 5 25 inch Drive Bay Device Power Cable Device Power Cable supports two devices SCSI Internal Cable Diskette Drive Signal Cable 60MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 80MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 104MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 120MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 160MB Hard Disk
365. ps sockets or connectors adapters can be identified by looking at the number of pins in the I O connector and the gender of the connector F connectors TV type indicate a broadband network adapter BNC connectors mini twistlock indicate a 3270 emulation adapter or possibly if it is an AT Bus adapter it could be a Cluster adapter The 3270 adapter does not have switches the Cluster adapter does 9 pin Male connectors usually indicate a serial port 9 pin Female connectors usually are display adapters but could also be Token Ring adapters if it is an AT Bus adapter If it is a short card it is a Token Ring If itis a long card it is a display adapter If the adapter is for the Micro Channel it is a Token Ring adapter IBM does not market 9 pin display adapter for Micro Channel systems 15 pin Male 2 rows of pins adapters are 5250 or 36 38 Emulation adapters These two adapters are the same and differ in name only depending if it is an AT Bus or Micro Channel adapter 15 pin 3 rows of pins Male connectors could be the Page Printer adapter double card or an Ethernet single card if it is a Micro Channel card or it could be a game adapter short card or a Page Printer adapter double card if it is an AT Bus adapter 15 pin 3 rows of pins Female connectors on an AT bus indicate a PS 2 display adapter If it is a Micro Channel adapter it might be an 8514 A adapter double card with many soc
366. questing assistance from Service Support and Engineering functions Machine type and model Failure symptom What when where single or multiple systems 15 the failure repeatable Has this configuration ever worked If it has been working what changes were made prior to it failing Reference Diskette Version and revision level Hardware configuration Print out print screen configuration from system partition or Reference Diskette currently being used Operating system software and revision level 05 2 SYSLEVEL Command Software setup appropriate to the software CONFIG SYS STARTUP CMD AUTOEXEC BAT m Important To eliminate confusion identical systems are considered identical only if they 1 Are the exact machine type and models 2 Have the same adapters attachments in the same locations 3 Have the same address jumpers terminators cabling 4 Have the same software versions and levels 5 Have the same Partition Reference Diskette version 6 Have the same configuration options set in the system 7 Have the same setup for the operation system control files Config Sys Autoexec bat Startup Cmd etc Comparing the configuration and software set up Config sys etc between working and non working systems will often lead to problem resolution 442 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Phone Numbers U S and Canada Before you place a call to the Suppo
367. quired drivers are installed correctly on the computer Hardware Maintenance Service 133 PCMCIA Adapter Switch Settings Switches on the PCMCIA adapter must be set as shown 52 54 ao NOS 51 53 T NM PCMCIA PC Card Lock Override PC Cards can be locked in place for security purposes with the lock mechanism Any of the four lock mechanisms can be unlocked manually To unlock a locked mechanism use a pen or pencil to press its lock solenoid in the direction of the arrow shown below Solenoids 1 and 3 are shown locked Solenoids 2 and 4 are shown unlocked Printer Errors 1 Make sure the printer is properly connected and powered on 2 Run the printer self test If the printer self test does not run correctly the problem is in the printer Refer to the printer service manual If the printer self test runs correctly continue If the printer is attached to any parallel port press the print screen key to print any screen text If the printer prints the screen the problem is software related If the printer does not print the screen continue Install a wrap plug on the parallel port and run the advanced diagnostic tests to determine which FRU failed 194 PS 2 Maintenance Manual If the advanced diagnostic tests with the wrap plug installed do not detect a failure replace the prin
368. r 8590 0G5 486SX 20 8590 0G9 486SX 20 8590 0GF 486SX 20 8590 0H5 486SX 25 8590 0H9 486SX 25 S N 23TXD00 to XPV99 8590 0J5 80486 25 All other S N 8590 0J5 80486 25 S N 23PAAA0 to RLTG9 8590 0J9 80486 25 All other S N 8590 0J9 80486 25 8590 0JF 80486 25 S N 23RLTHO to TYKP9 8590 0KD 80486 33 All other S N 8590 0KD 80486 33 8590 0KF 80486 33 8590 0L9 486 25 50 8590 0LF 486 25 50 8595 0G9 486SX 20 8595 0GF 486SX 20 8595 0H9 486SX 25 8595 0HF 486SX 25 S N 23FPMAZ to GMBWY 8595 0J9 80486 25 All other S N 8595 0J9 80486 25 8595 0JF 80486 25 8595 0KD 80486 33 8595 0L9 486 25 50 8595 0LF 486 25 50 8595 0MF 486 50 8595 0MT 486 50 9553 1BX 486SLC2 25 50 9553 2BX 486SLC2 25 50 9553 OB7 486SLC2 25 50 9553 OB8 486SLC2 25 50 9556 0B6 486SLC2 25 50 9556 0BA 486SLC2 25 50 9557 0B6 486SLC2 25 50 9557 0BA 486SLC2 25 50 9557 1BA 486SLC2 25 50 9576 0H6 486SX 25 9576 0U6 486SX 33 9576 0UA 486SX 33 9577 0UA 486SX 33 9577 0UF 486SX 33 9577 1UA 486SX 33 9577 486DX2 33 66 9577 486DX2 33 66 9577 1NA 486 33 66 9585 OKG 4860 33 9585 OKT 486DX 33 9585 ONG 4860 33 66 9585 ONT 4860 33 66 9585 0X6 486SX 33 9585 0XA 486SX 33 9585 0XF 486SX 33 9595 0LF 486 25 50 9595 0MF 486 50 9595 0MT 486 50 9595 PQG Pentium 66MHz 9595 PQT Pentium 66MHz Video XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA XGA SVGA SVGA SVGA
369. r chooses to share the device the setting should be changed back to Enabled Keep Remove Settings The only time that you will see the Keep and Remove options is when the device physically is disconnected from the computer At that time you have the option of removing the device from the configuration table by changing the setting to Remove Changing the Settings To change the settings do the following Select Set and View SCSI device configuration from the Set configuration menu Select the appropriate device on the list Press F6 to change the settings Press F10 to save the changes in configuration 180 PS 2 Maintenance Manual SCSI Diagnostic Tests The diagnostic tests usually identify the failing device but because of the many dependencies you can be misled by an error code It is important to understand that all devices in a SCSI chain depend on an open line of communication on the SCSI data bus Certain conditions can cause misleading error codes to appear For example a short circuit in the bus arbitration logic on the system board can inhibit communication between the system board and a SCSI adapter If this condition exists the error code that appears would indicate that the SCSI adapter failed when the failure was really on the system board SCSI ID Using to Help Isolate Failures Each device on a SCSI chain has a unique SCSI ID Use the SCSI ID to help pinpoint which device is failing For more information s
370. ray system therefore none of the hard disks have a System Partition You must run diagnostics from the System Diskettes for the base system and from the IBM RAID Controller diskette for the disk array devices Accessing System Programs and Starting Diagnostic Tests The method used to access the system programs in order to start the diagnostic tests varies with the system After you get to the system programs Main Menu you can run any of the utility programs or start diagnostic tests Starting Advanced Diagnostics on ROM Based Systems 1 2 Insert the Reference Diskette into diskette drive A Power on the computer and follow the instructions on the screen until the System Programs Main Menu appears Press Ctrl A to select the advanced diagnostic mode The advanced diagnostics menu appears Select System Checkout from the advanced diagnostics menu Follow the instructions on the Screen to select your choice of tests Starting Advanced Diagnostics on IML Based Systems 1 2 Power on the computer and wait for the prompt Press Ctr Alt Del and watch the cursor closely When the cursor moves to the upper right corner of the screen press Ctr Alt Ins The system programs main menu appears Press Ctrl A to select the advanced diagnostic mode The advanced diagnostics menu appears Select System Checkout from the advanced diagnostics menu Follow the instructions on the Screen to select your choice of tests Note
371. rror 90 95 it is a 20 MHz board and 2 System Board the processor is not a 487SX the jumper must be in positions 2 and 3 487SX is indicated on the processor 000102XX 000103XX 1 System Board 000104XX 000107XX 2 Processor Board 000105XX Information only Command not accepted 000106XX 1 Run Advanced Converting logic test Diagnostics failure 000107XX 000108XX 1 System Board 000109XX Memory Interrupt or memory failure 2 System Board 3 Processor Board 90 95 4 Any Adapter 5 Bus Adapter 00010XXX 1 System Board 000110XX 1 Memory Module Kit Check memory t 2 System Board For Model 95 also see 000201XY for socket location list t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Maintenance Service 33 Symptom Error FRU Action 000111XX 1 Adapter Memory 2 Expansion Adapter 3 System Board 000112XX 000113XX 1 System Board Possible timeout error 2 Processor Board 90 95 000114XX 1 Any Adapter ROM error 2 Bus Adapter 000115XX 1 System Board 80386 protect mode failure 2 486DX33 Upgrade or BIOS checksum error 70 80 000116XX 1 Run Advanced Possible read write Diagnostics problem 2 486DX33 Upgrade 70 80 000118XX 1 System Board Previously detected error Memory Run Advanced Diagnostics 2 Processor Board 90 95 000119XX 1 Run Automatic Configuration 2 88MB diskette dri
372. rror Management Overview Running Adapter Diagnostics PCMCIA Credit Card Problems Interrupt Level or Address Conflicts Checking the Base Configuration OS 2 Environment LAPS Installation Problem Problem Resolution Worksheet Obtaining the Necessary Data Related Service Information vi ACPA A Advanced Diagnostic Tests Audio Output Tone Tone Microphone Input Loop Loop Microphone Gain Toggle Toggle CSD DOS Version Level Check CSD 05 2 Version Level Check Combined FRUs Diagnostics Display Adapter 8514 A Display Self Test Display Considerations Fax Modem Checkout 2 How to Use a Symptom to FRU Index Error Code Format 2 Identifying Adapters Keyboard Voltage Check Standard Connector Memory Module Kit Identification Memory Problems Models 50 55 60 65 70 80 Models 53 9553 xBx 56 57 76 77 85 90 ANd 95 Lu dren fe Determining Models 90 95 Processor Type Processor Board Matrix 90 95 Using the Low Level Format Program PS 2 Maintenance Manual Option Microprocessor Jumper 76 77 OS 2 Problems during a New Installation OS 2 Trap Errors PCMCIA Diagnostics PS 2 E Model 33 PCMCIA Adapter Switch Set
373. rs and so on Select System Utilities Run a low level format also contains system utilities Format a diskette DiagSoft is a trademark of DiagSoft Inc Hardware Maintenance Reference 387 Error Messages Messages generated by the software the operating system or application programs generally are text messages but they also can be numeric Basically there are five types of error messages POST error messages Diagnostic error messages POST beep codes Software generated messages Multiple messages Error Description Message POST Displayed when POST finds problems with Error the hardware or detects a change in the Messages hardware configuration POST Sounds emitted from the speaker if POST Beep finds a problem One beep indicates POST Codes completed successfully Multiple beeps indicate a problem was found by the POST Diagnostic Displayed when a test program finds a Error problem with a hardware option Messages Software Displayed if a problem or conflict is found by Generated an application program the operating system Error or both For an explanation of these Messages messages refer to the information supplied with that software package Multiple The first error that occurs can causes Messages additional errors Follow the suggested action of the first error displayed In this case the system displays more than one error message Always follow the sugge
374. rt Center refer to Problem Determination Tips on page 442 U S Authorized Dealers or Servicers Number Information 1 800 937 3737 1 800 426 2472 1 800 426 7763 1 800 IBM DEAL 1 303 924 4015 1 800 237 5511 1 800 327 5711 1 800 426 1484 1 800 759 7483 1 800 342 6672 IBM Business Partner Education IBM Customer Engineer Technical Support IBM National Support Center IBM PartnerLink Technical Support IBM Part Number ID and look up IBM Software Defect Support CSDs IBM Software Ordering service publications IBM Supplies Technical Hotline IBM Warranty Claims Center OS 2 Replacement Diskettes problems during new system installation U S Customers and Helpware Subscribers Number Information 1 800 426 8322 1 800 999 0052 1 407 982 6408 1 800 964 8523 1 800 772 2227 1 800 426 4238 1 800 742 2493 1 800 447 4700 1 404 835 6600 1 800 426 4238 1 800 426 2468 1 800 426 2468 1 800 282 0226 1 800 426 3333 1 800 IBM SERV 1 800 426 7282 1 800 426 9402 Ext 150 1 800 241 1620 1 800 742 2493 1 800 342 6672 1 800 237 5511 1 800 237 5511 1 303 924 4125 1 800 284 5933 1 914 962 0310 1 800 237 4824 Customer Education Business Unit Customized Operational Services Developers Assistance HW amp SW End User Support HelpCenter HelpLearn Customer Satisfaction Center HelpCenter TDD ASCII IBM Anti Virus Services IBM Authorized Dealer Referrals IBM Bulletin Board IBM Customer Satis
375. s 130 of its nominal value the power supply automatically shuts down until the on off switch is recycled Under Voltage Protection If any voltage drops below its regulation range the power good signal drops preventing any further processing in the system Automatic Restart Most PS 2 power supplies have an automatic restart feature This allows the power supply to restart after an AC voltage power outage Beginning with products announced in October 1990 a 3 to 6 second delay was added to enable all subsystems and peripherals ample time to reset prior to sequencing power back to the system 422 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Power Line Disturbances All PS 2 power supplies have been tested for power line disturbances Power supplies will stay in specification if any of the following conditions occur A 20 below nominal voltage for 2 seconds repeated 10X with a 10 duty cycle 80V in 100V Range and 160V in 200V Range A 30 below nominal voltage for 5 seconds repeated 10X with a 10 duty cycle 70V in 100V Range and 140V in 200V Range A 15 above nominal voltage for 1 second repeated 10X with a 10 duty cycle 143V in 100V Range and 276V in 200V Range A 400Hz oscillatory exponentially decaying disturbance at the peak of the input line voltage The initial impulse of the disturbance will increase the input voltage by an amount equal to the nominal line voltage This is performed 100 times at 3 second intervals A puls
376. s Memory ECA Engineering Change Announcement ECC Error Correction Code EGA Enhanced Graphics Adapter ESD Electrostatic Discharge ESDI Enhanced Small Device Interface EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EWS Energy Work Station FRU Field Replaceable Unit replaceable part GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus IEEE 348 GSA General Services Administration HMM Hardware Maintenance Manual HMR Hardware Maintenance Reference HMS Hardware Maintenance Service Ht Height IDE Integrated Drive Electronics IC Integrated Circuit IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IML Initial Machine Load IPL Initial Program Load ISO International Organization for Standardization ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network LAN Local Area Network LBA Local Block Address 438 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Term Information LTB LUN MAP MCGA MCA MHz MIDI MM N A NDD NMI NSC NVRAM OEM PCMCIA POS PUN RAID RAM RGB RIPL ROM SASD SCB SRAM SCSI SCSI ID SPD SR T A TDD UL VCA VESA VGA VPD VRAM WORM XGA Local Transfer Bus Logical Unit Number as in SCSI Maintenance Analysis Procedure Modified Color Graphics Adapter 320 x 200 x 256 Micro Channel Architecture bus structure Mega hertz millions of cycles per second Musical Instrument Digital Interface Multimedia Not Available or Not Applicable National Distribu
377. s are intended to test only IBM marketed products Products not marketed by IBM prototype cards or modified options can give false errors and invalid system responses Refer to the Hardware Maintenance Reference section of this manual for any related PS 2 reference information 130 5 2 Maintenance Manual OS 2 Trap Errors The following information will be helpful in diagnosing trap errors Error Information Code 0000 See note 7 Application software error contact the 0001 software vendor s support 0002 See notes 4 6 8 and 9 Install CSDs run CHKDSK Replace the defective memory 0003 See note 7 Application software error contact the 0004 software vendor s support 0005 0006 Check the memory Run CHKDSK Contact the 0007 application software vendor s support 0008 0009 See note 7 Application software error contact the 000A software vendor s support 000B 000C If SYS1942 appears contact the software vendor s support If Exception in Device appears refer to note 4 Run CHKDSK All other messages Run CHKDSK and check the memory If a 113 error appears see ECA024 000D If SYS1943 A Prog appears contact the software vendor s support If Int Proc Error at 0220 3557 appears set the Token Ring to 16K RAM window install CSD s If double trap 000D appears install the latest CSDs For all other messages or conditions contact t
378. s important that you back up the disk array configuration information frequently to keep the backup information on the diskette current To restore the RAID configuration information 1 Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette into the primary drive and power on the system If the system already is on press Ctrl Alt Del 2 Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu 3 Select Restore config from diskette 4 Follow the instructions on the screen Using the Advanced Functions This section gives the procedures for using the advanced functions such as changing the write policy changing the RAID parameters and formatting a drive Warnings appear throughout this section to alert you to potential loss of data and should be heeded before answering yes to the confirmations requested by the RAID configuration program Changing the Write Policy When you configure a logical drive the RAID adapter automatically sets the write policy to write through WT mode where the completion status is sent after the data is written to the hard disk drive To improve performance you can change this write Hardware Maintenance Service 171 policy to write back WB mode where the completion status is sent after the data is copied to cache memory but before the data is actually written to the storage device Although you gain performance with write back mode it creates a greater risk of losing data due to a power failure This is
379. s internally at 50 MHz 80486 50 MHz 57F1597 single socket both boards are one single FRU Adapter Guide 33F8440 25 System Board Memory Module Kits Parity Memory Module Kits 1MB 85ns 95 90X8624 Type 1 amp 3 Processor Boards 2MB 85ns 95 92F0104 Type 1 amp 3 Processor Boards 2MB 70ns 85 95 92F0102 2MB 80ns 95 92F0103 4MB High Reliability Parity SIMM 70ns 71G6203 4MB 80ns 95 92F3337 8MB High Reliability Parity SIMM 70ns 71G6204 8MB 80ns 95 64F3607 ECC Memory Module Kits 4MB 70ns Type 3 Boards only 95 92F0097 8MB 70ns Type 3 Boards only 95 92F0098 26 Cover Fan Cable Assy 61G3824 28 Information Panel Cable 95 33F8429 Indicator Panel Cable 85 92F0239 Speaker 33F8444 I O Shadowbox Ground Spring with thumbscrews 92F0099 Miscellaneous Parts Kit see page 301 33F8435 Shipping Carton 74F3565 Index DASD 85 95 Hard Disk Drive Mounting Tray 85 85F0013 Hard Disk Drive Mounting Tray 95 64F0141 60MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 6128296 80MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 56F8854 104MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 95F4748 120MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 6128298 160MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 56F8851 212MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 95F4749 320MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 85F0011 SCSI 400MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 85F0012 NNNNNNNNOQ Hardware Maintenance Service 275 Index DASD 85 95 continued 7 NNNNN 10 12 13 14 18 18 276 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 540MB Hard Disk
380. s the password There is no need to move the connector back to the previous position Model 50 60 70 80 Override Jumper 1 2 3 4 Power off the computer and unplug the power cord Remove the system unit cover If the speaker assembly has pins short pins 2 and 3 together If the speaker assembly does not have pins insert a meter lead into connector 1 and short the other end of the lead to frame ground With the assembly shorted power on the computer This erases the power on password Remove the short after POST is finished Hardware Maintenance Reference 377 Additional Override Jumper Functions The override jumper is most often used to erase a power on password However on IML systems moving the jumper also has the following effects on the system Unattended Start Mode Server Mode If the Unattended Start Mode is activated power off the computer move the jumper then power on the computer The unattended start mode is deactivated You must reset the Unattended Start Mode Power on password is required to run in the Unattended Start Mode Override Jumpers on IML Systems The Server 95A has no System Partition It loads the IML and POST from the EEPROM on the system board or on the processor board If a power on password is set and the Reference Diskette is in the diskette drive move the password override jumper then power on the computer The system default is bypassed and the system
381. shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 42 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error FRU Action 001403XX Information only No paper error or interrupt failure 001404XX 1 Run Advanced System board timeout Diagnostics failure 001405XX 1 Run Advanced Parallel adapter error Diagnostics 001406XX 1 Run Advanced Presence test error Diagnostics 0014XX00 1 Printer not listed above 2 System Board Check printer before replacing system board t 001701XX 001703XX 1 Hard Disk Drive 001704XX 001714XX 2 Cable ST506 0017XXXX 3 Hard Disk Adapter Not listed below ST506 4 System Board 5 Power Supply 001702XX 1 Hard Disk Adapter 001705XX 001706XX 1 Format the Drive 001707XX 001708XX 2 Hard Disk Drive 001710XX 001711XX 001712XX 001713XX 001715XX 001716XX 001717XX 001726XX 001735XX 001750XX 001751XX 001752XX 001753XX 001754XX 001755XX 001757XX 001780XX 001781XX 001782XX 001790XX 001791XX Read write problem Be sure the drive type is supported If it is try a low level format If the error continues replace the hard disk drive 00180100 to 00180700 1 System Board 00186XXX 1 Set Configuration Features 2 Battery 0018XXXX 1 System Board not listed above Expansion Unit 00240100 00240200 1 Display any type If screen colors change 00240100 00240200 1 System Board If screen colors are OK 2 Display
382. sible values for ISA mode operation parameters that you can select according to your system configuration Input Output I O base address this is used by the Hardware Maintenance Service 97 computer to identify and communicate with each individual adapter Table 6 I O Base Address ISA Mode Switch Positions Base Address 123 000 86A0 100 96A0 010 A6A0 110 B6A0 001 C6A0 101 D6A0 011 E6A0 111 F6A0 RPL memory enable this allows you to enable or disable the RPL memory Table 7 RPL Memory Enable ISA Mode Switch Position RPL Memory 4 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Interrupt level this establishes the priority by which the adapter can interrupt the computer The lowest value is given the highest priority To use interrupt level 9 for the IBM Wireless LAN adapter make sure that no other adapter in your computer uses interrupt level 2 Table 8 Interrupt Level ISA Mode Switch Positions Interrupt Level 56 00 9 10 10 01 11 11 15 Direct memory access DMA arbitration level this establishes the priority by which the adapter can access the computer memory The lowest value is given the highest priority Table 9 DMA Arbitration Level ISA Mode Switch Positions ISA DMA Level 78 00 0 10 1 01 3 11 Invalid 98 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Wireless LAN Utilities Diskette
383. sing an ASCII terminal follow the instructions supplied with the operating system When the cursor moves to the top right corner of the screen press Ctrl l Diagnostics When an ASCII terminal is selected as the system console the following will not appear on the diagnostic installed device list Keyboard Mouse System board async port Video displays Error Messages f you get a 161 or 173 error during POST the selection you made in the Set Console utility program is no longer valid When this happens the system will look for a video adapter If it finds one the keyboard and display will be used as a console If it does not find one the ASCII terminal will be used as a console 96 8N1 Error Message This is not an error message An 96 8N1 message on the Model 95 console indicates that the system is set to ASCII terminal mode no ASCII terminal is attached remove the battery then wait five minutes Replace the battery and restart the system 432 PS 2 Maintenance Manual System Error Log Note Not all 90 and 95 systems support the system error log On these systems the BIOS nonmaskable interrupt NMI handler writes an entry to the error log each time an error is detected Note If the system halts during POST nothing will be logged Viewing the Error Log To view the error log start the system programs and select More utilities from the Main Menu then select Display system error log For any error that
384. sion Adapters Memory Errors Unique Memory Information 90 95 Model 90 Memory Model 95 Memory Memory Configurations 90 95 Error Detection 90 95 Copyright IBM Corp 1994 400 401 402 403 404 404 404 404 405 405 405 405 406 406 406 407 407 363 Resolving Memory Address Conflicts Changing the Software Configuration Changing the System Configuration SCSI System Information SCSI Hard Disk Drives and Devices Understanding SCSI ID Numbers Selecting SCSIID Setting SCSI ID Optical Head Lens Cleaning Procedure Setting the Motor Start Jumper Terminator Function 2 16 Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter Switch Settings Interrupt Settings Memory Address Switch Settings l O AddresS ope ae a Selectable Drive Startup Function System Unit Power Supplies Power Supply Features System Partition Starting System Program Diagnostics Updating the System Programs Upgrading the System Partition Version Backing up the System Partition Restoring the System Partition Running Automatic Configuration Recording a Customized Configuration ASCII Terminals ASCII Terminal Setup and Menu Selection ASCII Termin
385. six slim high drives or three half high drives or a combination of both drive sizes If you use a combination remember that one half high drive uses the equivalent space of two slim high drives If you install drives in bank D or E you will remove the fan assembly on the rear of the server install a direct access storage device DASD backplane in banks D and E and install an optional 220 watt power supply Each backplane has six connectors to support up to six hard disk drives Removing a Drive from Bank C D or E Locate the drive you are removing You do not have to power off the server to remove a drive from banks C D and E Warning If you are removing a failed hard disk drive that is part of a disk array in bank C D or E you must not accidentally remove a good drive Before you attempt to remove a defective drive thoroughly review the information displayed on your server s screen to determine the location of the failed drive Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications on page 167 explains the codes that your server uses to indicate a defective drive When a hard disk drive fails a blinking green indicator light illuminates on the knob of the drive tray When a hard disk drive is good a solid green indicator light illuminates on the knob of the drive tray If you partially or completely remove a good drive instead of the defective one your server might lose valuable data This situation is especially
386. sk Drive SCSI 6128296 7 80MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 56F8854 7 104MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 95F4748 7 212MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 95F4749 7 320MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 85F0011 7 400MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 85F0012 7 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 92F0406 7 540MB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 61G3788 7 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 9577 92F0089 7 1GB Hard Disk Drive SCSI 92F0428 Drive Cable Three connector 96F7649 Drive Slide 96F7775 14 3 5 Inch Blank Bezel Bay 4 85F0092 Bezel Insert for 8520092 85F0095 15 5 25 Inch Louvered Bezel Bay 3 85F0094 Bezel Insert for 85F0094 85F0096 Air Baffle Fixed Disk Drive Bay 4C 92F0251 16 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Bay 2 3 85F0003 5 25 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Bay 2 3 64F4125 5 25 Inch Blank Bezel Bay 2 85F0091 CD ROM Drive Bezel Bay 2 3 85F0008 Rewritable Optical Drive Bezel 92F0159 17 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Bay 1 85F0093 18 Retainer Plate 85F0098 19 Diskette Drive Cable 96F7756 20 Hard Disk Drive Cable 96F7649 Index Ultimedia 9557 9577 CD ROM 92F0084 ACPA Adapter 95F1256 ActionMedia Adapter 69F9733 ActionMedia to Display Cable 69F9737 21 Cable Control Assy to Audio Card 92F0113 22 Cable Control Assy to System Board 96F7762 Cable ACPA to ActionMedia 11 42G2779 262 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 90 8590 Parts Eq AQ nur T A es Hardware Maintenance Service 263 Index System Unit 90 1 2 3 10 11 12 12
387. skette FLASH allows POST and BIOS code to be updated without replacing any hardware This is done with an update diskette This diskette copies the new code to the FLASH EEPROMs Instructions are included with an update diskette 382 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Note If the customer installs an option that requires an upgrade to the POST and BIOS information have the customer contact their Authorized IBM Dealer or Marketing Representative or call the IBM HelpCenter U S and Puerto Rico only at 1 800 772 2227 They will receive free of charge a set of upgrade diskettes for their system Errors during POST POST errors are displayed as follows ROM and IML Systems When POST detects a problem on ROM and IML based systems an eight digit error code appears FLASH Systems When POST detects a problem on FLASH systems an eight digit error code appears followed by a short text message indicating the type of failure These messages are generated from the code loaded into FLASH at the time the system was manufactured Notes 1 Depending on the model these EEPROMs are either on the processor board or on the system board The EEPROMs contain the POST and BIOS code 2 On FLASH systems the system always loads the POST and BIOS code from the FLASH EEPROMS POST and BIOS code does not reside on the System Partition or on the Reference Diskette 3 On FLASH systems POST and BIOS can be updated without replacing any hardware Th
388. ss Password Power on Features System Features Microprocessors Processor Boards 70 Contents 267 270 273 277 280 285 287 289 291 293 295 295 296 297 298 298 300 304 305 306 308 308 309 310 311 363 365 365 366 368 369 369 370 371 ix Processor Boards 90 95 380 NVRAM and Extension 381 POST Overview 381 POST and BIOS in ROM 382 POST BIOS in IML 382 POST BIOS in FLASH 382 Errors during POST 383 Reference and Diagnostic Diskettes 383 Accessing System Programs and Starting Diagnostic Tests 384 Replacing Hard Disk Drives That Have a System Partition 385 QAPlus PRO Diagnostics 386 Power On Self Test POST 386 POST Beep Codes 387 Test Programs 387 Error Messages 388 Return Codes 388 Using the Test Programs 389 Program Navigation 389 Using the First Letter of a Menu Choice 389 Using the Function Keys 389 Command Line Options 390 Viewing the Test Groups 390 Scripting eal bok se eS 391 Changing Logical Unit Numbers 391 Test Group Specifications 391 Starting the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics Diskette 391 Module Testing Mode
389. ssembly Pawl required for 92F0003 Front Cover Logo R 9576 PS 2 76 486 9576 PS 2 76 486DX2 9556 PS 2 56 486SLC2 9556 PS 2 56LS 486SLC2 Top Cover Assembly no lock Top Cover Assembly no lock for models 92F0003 79F3459 92F0245 92F0408 96F7770 96F7771 92F0252 73G6059 56 with S N YCW00 to YNR99 and YNTOO to YZN99 76 with S N ATXDA to AXATL Cover Screw Thumbscrew see DASD Hard Disk Shelf Retainer Plate Power Supply 118 Watt Rear Panel 9576 Rear Panel 9556 Base Frame Assembly R Base Frame Assembly R for models 79F3463 96F7776 33G8423 79F3443 52G7917 52G7916 96F7767 73G6062 56 with S N YCW00 to YNR99 and YNTOO to YZN99 76 with S N ATXDA to AXATL Front Shield EMI Shield EMI Clip Cable Shield top of bay Tamper Resistant Rear Cable locking Cover Assembly option see DASD see DASD Card Guide Speaker Bracket 9576 Adapter Guide Tamper Evident Switch Assembly 9556 System Boards no memory 486SLC2 25 50 MHz 9556 486SLC3 33 66 MHz 9556 486SLC3 33 66 MHz 9556LS 486SLC3 25 75 MHz 9556 486SX 33 MHz for non UltiMedia systems only 9576 486SX 33 MHz 9576 486DX2 33 66 MHz for non UltiMedia systems only 9576 486DX2 33 66 MHz 9576 Optional Microprocessors P23T 25 50 MHz P23T 33 66 MHz 2MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 4MB Memory Module Kit 70ns 8MB Memory Module Kit 70ns Math Coprocessor Socket Bus Adapter with battery 9556 Bus
390. st The Logical Drive Size pop up window shows the space in this array that is available for logical drives Type the size in megabytes that you want for the logical drive then press Enter A pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action Information about the new logical drive appears in the Logical Drive list Note The size appearing in the Logical Drive list might be different from the size you typed because it appears in binary equivalent The size of a logical drive is determined by a number of factors but basically the size must be divisible by the number of drives in the array Consider the following examples Example 1 There are three 1GB drives in the array You assign RAID level 0 which uses all the drives in the array with no parity storage and type 1000MB The Size MB will be 999 which is the number closest to and lower than 1000 that is divisible by 3 Example 2 There are three 1GB drives in the array and you assign RAID level 5 Data is striped across all three drives in the array but the space equivalent to that of one drive is used for redundant storage Therefore if you type 1000MB the Size MB remains 1000 because it is divisible by 2 drives which is the space available for data If you do not use the entire array for this logical drive you can create another by assigning either the same Hardware Maintenance Service 163 9 164
391. sted action instructions for the first error message displayed Return Codes For the test programs to properly determine if a test Passed Failed or Aborted the test programs check the error return code at test completion To register the test properly in the test log the test programs must generate one of the following return codes Return Description Code 0 Indicates that the device passed its test 1 Indicated that the device failed its test 2 or Indicates that the test stopped or was greater aborted 388 5 2 Maintenance Manual Using the Test Programs The test programs provide advanced functions and utilities for power users and service or support professionals to troubleshoot even the most difficult problems Program Navigation You can maneuver within the test programs by typing the first letter of a menu choice using the function keys or using command line options Using the First Letter of a Menu Choice Throughout the test programs pressing the first letter of an option on a menu is the same as moving to that item with the cursor and pressing Enter however this function is not enabled on Test Group Screens Using the Function Keys Use the following keys to maneuver throughout the test programs Keys Action Enter Select an item run the test module or run the test Down Moves the cursor down Arrow Up Arrow Moves the cursor up F1 Calls up the appropria
392. stem Board 71G2641 P1 Model 80 486DX33 Processor Upgrade Card 92F0437 Hardware Maintenance Service 137 Power Supply Voltage Check If the power on indicator is not on and if the power supply fan is not running check the power cord for proper installation and continuity Note Verify that the voltage select switch if applicable is set for the correct voltage If the power cord is OK either the power supply is defective or a defective device is causing the power supply to shut off Check the power supply voltages If the voltages are incorrect replace the power supply If the voltages are correct and the Symptom to FRU index does not solve the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 183 Models 25 25 SX 25 286 Power Good Ground 12 Volts 12 Volts Ground Ground Ground Ground 5 Volts 5 Volts 10 5 Volts 11 5 Volts 12 Models 30 30 286 Power Good Ground 12 Volts 12 Volts Ground Ground OORUN Ground Ground 5 Volts 5 Volts 5 Volts 5 Volts 4 gt 138 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 33 If the power on indicator is not on check the power cord for proper installation and continuity If the power on indicator is not on but the computer is functioning normally replace the power switch speaker assembly 1
393. stem Unit Power Cord for Colombia U S Venezuela System Unit Power Cord for Hong Kong Singapore U K System Unit Power Cord for France Germany Spain System Unit Power Cord for Italy Chile System Unit Power Cord for Australia New Zealand New Guinea Papua System Unit Power Cord for Denmark System Unit Power Cord for Israel System Unit Power Cord for Bangladesh Pakistan South Africa Sri Lanka System Unit Power Cord for Switzerland System Unit Power Cord for Thailand System Unit Power Cord for Japan 6952300 62X1045 14F0033 13F9979 14F0069 13F9940 13F9997 14F0087 14F0015 14F0051 1838574 79F2755 304 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Rewritable Optical Drives 3 5 Inch Rewritable Optical Drive 92F0167 Rewritable Optical Cartridge 38F8647 Drive Mounting Slide for 92F0167 85F0022 Tray with Bezel for 92F0167 85F0021 Objective Lens Cleaner for 92F0167 38F8681 Prism Lens Cleaner for 92F0167 38F8682 3 5 Inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive 92F0167 Mounting Tray 92F0269 Mounting Tray Bezel Model 3510 92F0268 Drive Bezel Assembly Model 8535 8540 8556 8557 Bays 2 3 92F0159 Model 9556 9576 92F0159 Model 9557 9577 Bays 2 3 92F0159 Model 8560 8565 8580 92F0156 Model 8590 9590 B Bay 92F0157 Model 8590 9590 D Bay 92F0158 Model 8590 9590 Filler 64F4149 Model 3511 8595 9595 92F0155 Hardware Maintenance Service 305 ServerGuard Adapter Parts
394. stem automatically assigns RAID level 0 to any logical drives defined in an array containing only one hard disk drive When this is the case the Select RAID Level pop up window will not appear If you have only two hard disk drives in the array the Select RAID Level pop up window appears but RAID level 5 is not selectable because you need at least three hard disk drives in an array to assign RAID level 5 to one of the logical drives You can define more than one logical drive for your array The only restriction is that the maximum number of logical drives you can define is eight Use the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the RAID level you want to assign to these logical drives then press Enter PS 2 Maintenance Manual Note Because the level you assign can influence the space needed for the drive you must assign a RAID level before you enter the size of the logical drive The Logical Drive list shows you the logical drive ID the size of each logical drive the RAID level you assigned to that logical drive and the date that the logical drive was created The status of the logical drive also is shown Good means that all is well with the drive Critical means that you must replace the hard disk drive or do a rebuild operation You will have received a message telling you what has happened to the drive Offline means that the logical drive is unrecoverable the data on that drive is lo
395. stem programs on the hard disk On systems without a diskette drive or if the IML hard disk failed use the System Diskettes or the user s backup copy of the System Partition On non IML systems insert the Reference Diskette in drive A start the system and follow the instructions on the screen to advance to the Main Menu of the system programs On LAN workstations access the Reference and Diagnostic Diskette image from the server Note To start the Advanced Diagnostics press Ctrl A from the system programs Main Menu Updating the System Programs You can update the system programs sometimes referred to as the IML image without writing over anything else in the System Partition You would do this for the following reasons A newer version Reference Diskette was released to enhance or correct the code currently being used The IML image in the System Partition is corrupted and you want to recopy it to the System Partition Note If the model specific instructions sent with an IML image update diskette vary from the instructions in this manual use the instructions supplied with the update diskette 1 Start the system from the Reference Diskette Select Update System Programs from the Main Menu and wait for the program to complete 2 Power off the computer remove the Reference Diskette 3 Power on the computer check for the normal power up sequence Note If the default startup sequence was customized be sure tha
396. stions Does the problem occur on only one wireless workstation or on several If on several are all the affected wireless workstations in one cell Does the problem occur on only one base or on several Are all bases in the IBM Wireless LAN affected The Problem Resolution worksheet is on the following page 104 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Table 11 Problem Resolution Worksheet software Description of the problem Level of IBM Wireless LAN microcode Level of IBM Wireless LAN your computer PS model and type see the documentation for your computer Bus type ISA MCA or PCMCIA see the documentation for your computer Disk type ESDI or SCSI see the documentation for Operating System and Level administrator Protocol stack used level and Type of application contact your network diskette Information contained in the error log files IBMWLERL LOG and IBMWLERL BAK for bases LANTRAN LOG for OS 2 environment copy the files onto a Any other significant displayed messages Network Configuration Number of cells Number of bases Number of workstations Type of backbone attachment Obtaining the Necessary Data 1 Find the level of IBM Wireless LAN software In a NetWare environment Base type MODULE at the server prompt on the system console and note the information for the following modules IBMWLCOM NLM IBMWLNAP NLM
397. t 1 2 5 5 Only Only Internal T RES Adapter Internal External and Location Type Devices Devices External Used Attached Attached Devices shown Attached above 1 1 1 1 1 N A 2 3 2 2 2 N A Table 12 Adapter Terminator Locations 418 5 2 Maintenance Manual Terminators on System Boards System boards with a built in SCSI controller on the system board either have removable or permanent automatic resistor type terminator on the system board The terminator is labeled T RES Removable Terminators 8556 8557 If there is a built in SCSI controller on the system board and there is a removable terminator on the system board that terminator serves the same purpose as an external terminator on a SCSI adapter On those systems if an external SCSI device is attached to the SCSI port on the system board the system board terminator must be removed The last SCSI device in the chain attached to that port requires termination Non Removable Terminators 9556 9557 9576 9577 If there is a built in SCSI controller on the system board but there is not a removable terminator on the system board the terminator is built into the system board The SCSI controller termination function on these systems is automatic For example if there is not an external SCSI device connected to the system board SCSI port the terminator is automatically enabled If there is an external SCSI device atta
398. t and the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter 84 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Ethernet POST Errors The following is a table of Ethernet adapter error messages that might appear in the top left corner of the screen during POST Number Action 06402 The adapter was not found Check to see that the adapter is installed correctly in the workstation If so restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter 06405 The adapter was not found at the specified base I O address Ensure that a unique base I O address was assigned to the adapter Refer to Network Configuration Errors on page 89 for additional information and instructions If a unique base I O address was assigned to the adapter restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter 06406 06416 06417 ROM Test failure 06406 LAN address ROM does not produce a valid checksum 06416 Adapter erasable programmable read only memory EPROM signature is not valid 06417 Adapter EPROM checksum is not valid Check to see that a unique base ROM address was assigned to the network adapter Refer to Network Configuration Errors on page 89 for additional information and instructions If a unique ROM address was assigned to the adapter restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter 06411 RAM Test failure Ensure that
399. t the customized settings are correct after service is complete Upgrading the System Partition Version Use the following instructions to upgrade the System Partition from the current version to another version To upgrade the version level 1 Follow the instructions in Backing up the System Partition on page 427 to make a backup copy of the System Partition 426 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Using the new level Reference Diskettes follow the instructions in Restoring the System Partition on page 428 to restore the System Partition Remove the diskette in drive A power off the system then power on the system Go to the System Partition main menu Select COPY AN OPTION and follow the instructions on the screen When instructed to insert the Option diskette insert the backup copy of the Reference Diskette instead If the system you are servicing requires a two diskette set go to the System Partition main menu again Select COPY AN OPTION When instructed to insert the Option diskette insert the backup copy of the Diagnostics Diskette instead Go to the System Partition main menu again Select SET CONFIGURATION Select VIEW CONFIGURATION to check that the selections shown are correct Press to return to the Set Configuration menu Select BACKUP CONFIGURATION Restart the system when backup configuration is complete Backing up the System Partition Use the following instructions to make a backup copy of the
400. talled in any of the expansion slots 16 bit or 32 bit depending on the model on the system board Memory expansion kits are installed on the memory expansion adapters to achieve the desired memory The amount of memory expansion kits supported varies with the option adapter The amount of available memory can be constrained by the hardware and the operating system in use It is also important to understand that memory size and speed requirements are based on the requirements of the hardware that the memory module kit is plugged into For example a system that requires 80ns memory on the system board might support memory adapters that require 85ns memory module kits In that case the memory on the adapter runs at 85ns The system board does not have to be fully populated before you add expansion memory and each memory expansion adapter does not have to be filled to capacity before you add another memory expansion adapter Memory Errors Memory errors and how the memory blocks are deallocated varies with the system It is not necessary to understand this to service the system however the information is available in the model specific Technical Reference manuals Note On some early PS 2 systems a memory error is not recoverable Hardware Maintenance Reference 405 Unique Memory Information 90 95 The 90 and 95 systems share some unique memory operation Model 90 Memory The figure below shows the location of the four m
401. te Help information Use the up arrow key or the down arrow key to scroll through the information Pressing F1 from within a Help screen provides a help index from which you can select different categories One of the important help categories is function key usage Pressing Esc exits Help and returns to where you left off Esc Go back to the previous menu Additional functions are available in the Test Module Selection screen and the Test Group screen using the following keys Keys Action Tab Move to test group or move to parameters Spacebar Toggle modules on off or toggle tests on off F2 View test results log F10 Local menu Next logical unit number for example LUN 1 LUN 2 and so on Previous logical unit number Hardware Maintenance Reference 389 Command Line Options The following Command Line Options are available when initially starting the diagnostic program from within its directory Type QAPLPRO XXX where XXX represents one of the following from the list below then press Enter Command Action B amp W The B amp W command line option forces the program to load in Black and White Monochrome mode which is often more readable on laptop computers LOG file The LOG file command line option directs the test programs to start using a specified Error Log file INT10 The INT10 command line option forces the test programs to use
402. ted to replace either the processor board or the system board and the first board that you replaced does not correct the problem reinstall the original board then replace the other processor or system board Note Pressing down on the blue levers on the Model 90 95 processor board does not fully seat the processor board into the system board connector To ensure that the processor board is fully seated press down firmly on the middle of the board until it is fully seated If an adapter or device consists of more than one FRU an error code may be caused by any of the FRUs Before replacing the adapter or device remove the FRUs one by one to see if the symptoms change Replace only the FRU that changed the symptoms Hard Disk Drive Replacement Strategy Always try to run a low level format before replacing a hard disk drive see Using the Low Level Format Program on page 129 Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1 Introduction Before using the General Checkout procedures and Symptom to FRU Indexes read the following information The two types of PS 2 computers are At Bus Micro Channel Note See PS 2 System Specifications on page 435 for a description of IBM PS 2 Computers and their features Depending on the PS 2 model computer you are servicing you need to be familiar with the following diagnostic procedures The three types of diagnostics are AT Bus Diagnostics Micro Channel Diagnostics QAPlus PRO
403. tem board or on a processor board explained below It interprets and carries out instructions Microprocessor speed varies with the model Some systems have a second connector on the system board for an optional microprocessor An option microprocessor is installed either to enhance speed or to add extended math capability to the system Some systems have a jumper on the system board that allows you to change the speed of the microprocessor Jumpers and options vary Processor Boards 70 On 25 MHz model 70 systems the microprocessor is on a small horizontally mounted card referred to as a processor board that plugs into the system board This board also has a connector for a math coprocessor For other Model 70 systems the microprocessor and math coprocessor plug directly into a connector on the system board Note The math coprocessor is a built in feature of the microprocessor on model 70 486 and model 70s with a 486DX33 Processor Upgrade or a 486 Power Platform Processor Boards 90 95 The 90 and 95 systems have the microprocessor and other components usually found on the system board installed on the processor board The processor board plugs into the system board just like an adapter does except it uses a special connector not one of the expansion slots The system requirements functions and diagnostics can differ significantly depending on which type of processor board is installed The major components on the pro
404. tenance Service 51 Symptom Error FRU Action 0206XXXX 1 SCSI 2 Adapter 2 Any SCSI Device 3 System Board 0208XXXX 1 Any SCSI Device Verify that there are no duplicate SCSI ID settings on the same bus 0210XXXA 60MB 0210XXXB 80MB 0210XXXC 120MB 0210XXXD 160MB 0210XXXE 320MB 0210XXXF 400MB 0210XXXG 40MB 0210XXXH 1GB 0210XXXI 104MB 0210XXXJ 212MB 0210XXXM 2GB 8 bit 68 pin 0210XXXN 0210XXXO 0210XXXQ 0210XXXP 50 pin 0210XXXU Size unknown If it is an external device check the external voltages See SCSI Diagnostic Tests on page 181 and SCSI ID Using to Help Isolate Failures on page 181 before replacing any FRUs t 540MB 1GB 540MB 2GB 8 bit 1 SCSI Hard Disk Drive 2 SCSI Adapter or the SCSI controller built into the system board 3 SCSI Cable 4 SCSI ID Switch On some models 0210XXXX Internal bus size unknown 0210XXX1 External bus size unknown SCSI Hard Disk Drive 2 SCSI Adapter or the SCSI controller built into the system board 3 SCSI Cable 4 SCSI ID Switch on some models The amber LED remains on The green in use LED fails to come on 1 Tape Drive 2 SCSI Cable internal 3 SCSI Adapter or the SCSI controller built into the system board 1 Tape Drive 2 SCSI Adapter or the SCSI controller built into the system board 3 SCSI Cable internal SCSI Cable external The tape
405. ter cable If that does not correct the problem do one of the following If the printer is attached to the parallel port on the system board replace the system board If the printer is attached to the parallel port on an adapter replace FRUs in the following order until the problem goes away 1 Adapter 2 System board 3 Bus adapter if installed Processor Board Installation 90 95 Improper installation can cause hard to diagnose failures and simulate various error conditions If the processor board fails you might want to try reseating it Note Never use the blue levers on the board to initially seat the board The levers are intended to help you remove the board To install a processor board correctly 1 Align the board with the designated slot not an expansion slot 2 Move the blue levers to the up unlocked position 3 Firmly press the board into the slot until it snaps into place 4 Simultaneously move the blue levers to the down locked position Processor Boards with Diagnostic LEDs The 50 MHz Type 3 processor board in a 90 95 submodel code 28 and 29 has two LEDs one in position CR1 and one in CR2 During POST CR1 should come on momentarily and CR2 should stay off If the LEDs work any other way suspect that the processor board is defective Use the LEDs to help differentiate between a processor board or a system board failure If you are instructed to replace one of the boards and t
406. th other devices installed in the workstation Refer to Network Configuration Errors on page 89 for additional information and instructions 4 The interrupt request line for the network adapter was not found Ensure that the interrupt level assigned to the network adapter does not conflict with other devices installed in the workstation Refer to Network Configuration Errors on page 89 for additional information and instructions 5 or 6 The adapter appears defective Run the test programs on the Starter Diskette image If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter Hardware Maintenance Service 83 Problem Action RQ XXXX Field appears and XXXX is a value greater than 000A If a number greater than 000A appears the file server is not present or is overloaded Check that 1 The server is available and fully operational 2 The address for the network adapter was properly added to the network software 3 The adapter configuration BNC UTP is set properly If the above items are correct and the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter SF XXXX Field appears and XXXX is a value greater than 000A If a number greater than 000A appears the server was found but is not responding Check that 1 The server is available and fully operational 2 The address for the network adapter was properly added to the network software If the above items are correc
407. the BIOS for screen writes OXXX The OXXX command line option where XXX test group for example MBD MEM VID HDU FDU KBD COM LPT and so on omits the designated test group from testing USRCONFIG The USERCONFIG file command line file option tells the test programs to look for a user diagnostic configuration file other than the default USERDIAG CFG SCRIPT The SCRIPT file R command line option file R with the R runs the selected script Please see Scripting on page 391 fora description of scripting on Note You can use a instead of a as the command line switch Viewing the Test Groups As you move the cursor bar up or down in the Test Module Selection window the right hand screen changes to show the attributes parameters and the selected tests of the corresponding Test Group The diamond mark indicates a module selected for testing The indicated attributes are characteristics of the selected test module that are used by the test programs to determine which tests to run or how to run selected tests Attributes are also used to limit the allowable range of parameters for example ending cylinder Parameters are values you select to establish the scope of tests For example you can select Extended Memory testing parameters and limit the testing to a specific range of test blocks by specifying the starting and ending memory block This might be appropriat
408. the above options to format a diskette follow the instructions that appear on the screen Hardware Maintenance Reference 393 Using the Low Level Format Program Depending on the hard disk capacity the Low Level Format program could take up to two hours When To Use the Low Level Format Program Use the Low Level Format program When you are installing software that requires a low level format When you get recurring messages from the test programs directing you to run the Low Level Format program on the hard disk As a last resort before replacing a failing hard disk drive Preparing the Hard Disk Drive for Use When the Low Level Format program is finished restore to the hard disk all the files that you previously backed up 1 Partition the remainder of the hard disk for your operating system The commands vary with the operating system Refer to your operating system manual for instructions 2 Format the hard disk using your operating system The commands vary with the operating system Refer to your operating system manual for instructions 3 Install the operating system You are now ready to restore the files File Editor The File Editor is an ASCII text editor that uses simple function key commands To access the File Editor 1 Select File Editor from the Utility Menu then press Enter 2 Insert a diskette into Drive A or Drive B before selecting the file you want to edit then select the file
409. the array is 3GB instead of 4GB Therefore when creating arrays it is wise to add drives of equal capacity 154 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Additional Storage Capacity When you add hard disk drives to the server you must configure a new disk array before the drives can be used You can either reconfigure the existing disk array to include the capacity offered with the added drives or group the added drives into their own array see Adding Drives to Create an Additional Array on page 162 You also can create an array with only one drive The RAID Configuration Program Screens When you configure the disk array or even just view its configuration you will be using the IBM RAID configuration program on the IBM SCSI 2 Fast Wide Streaming RAID Adapter A Option Diskette also called the IBM RAID controller diskette The following figure is a compilation of many of the IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration also called the IBM RAID configuration program screens The list below the figure gives explanations of the numbered areas of the figure 1 2 3 A IDN RAID Controller bibk Array Configuration Ver 2 N Adapter in Slot 4 1 98 Enter Size N of Logical Create Delete Array Drive MB 1 Help 2 Define hot spare drive 3 4 3 Delete disk array Create disk array b Exit Array Array Log Size RAID Date 1 Size MB Dru MD Level Created Status
410. the end chip 4B shows the front and rear of another 4MB chip configuration There are 8 chips on the front and 4 on the mn FATTE Front Rear FRU 4A 4B 124 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Memory Problems Models 50 55 60 65 70 and 80 Note For other Models see the following information Finding the Failing Memory Note Running customer diagnostic tests will deallocate defective memory After you replace defective memory run the memory diagnostic test to enable the replacement memory Then restart the computer and rerun the same test to validate the installed memory module kits Use the following procedure when you suspect a problem with the system memory 1 Run the advanced memory diagnostic test If the test does not indicate which memory module kit failed or if the system hangs try running the test from the System Diskettes If you still cannot identify which memory module kit failed return here and continue with the next step Note If a screen message appears asking if you have replaced a specific memory module kit suspect that it is the failing kit 2 Using a known good kit exchange each kit one at a time and repeat the memory diagnostic test until you find the defective kit Replace only the defective kit If the kits are not the problem suspect Riser Card if used Memory Expansion Adapter if used System Board Models 53 9553 xBx 56 57 76 77 85 90 a
411. thout a POST error but the operating system does not work The system starts up in BASIC IML and IPL errors can be caused by any of the following conditions Invalid selectable drive startup sequence the default drive is not in the startup sequence Operating system not found IML code not found Hardware Maintenance Service 55 Related hardware failure SCSI adapter hard disk SCSI cable Unrelated hardware failure misleading error code due to another problem on the SCSI Bus Before replacing any FRUs check the following Checking Startup Sequence and Hard Disk Drive 1 Start the computer from the Reference Diskette and select Set Features from the Main Menu 2 Select Set Startup Sequence and see if the default hard disk usually drive 6 is in the startup sequence If you receive an error message follow the instructions on the screen then return here 3 If the default drive is in the startup sequence exit from the screen and the Main Menu then go to step 5 the default drive is not in the startup sequence follow the instructions on the screen then continue with step 4 4 Remove the Reference Diskette power off the computer then power on the computer If the F1 Insert Diskette icon appears on the screen this means no operating system was found Go to step 5 If the Not OK icon appears on the screen this means that the system cannot access the System Partition Try updating the system programs If yo
412. three four five eight twelve or thirteen digits An X in an error message can be any number The shorter POST errors are highlighted in the Symptom to FRU Index Some digits will represent different information for SCSI errors versus non SCSI errors The following figure shows which digits display the shorter POST errors The figure also defines additional SCSI information Notes 1 Non IBM device error codes and documentation supersede this list 2 Duplicate SCSI ID settings will cause misleading error symptoms or messages RDDDPLSCB QEET Test state Error code Extension Qualifier Bus internal 1 external Capacity of the device Slot number of the device LUN usually PUN SCSI ID Device Number Reserved Digit usually As an example if you have SCSI error code 021050A0 each digit decodes as follows Digit Information 0 Reserved digit usually 0 210 Device number 210 indicates hard disk 5 SCSI ID assigned is 5 0 Logical Unit Number not used usually 0 A The device capacity is 60 A 60MB 0 The device is connected to the internal bus RDDD Codes for Adapters RDDD Device Type or Information 0037 SCSI on the system board 0096 SCSI adapter with cache 0112 SCSI adapter without cache 0206 SCSI 2 adapter Hardware Maintenance Service 115 RDDD Codes for Devices RDDD Device Type or Information
413. tically load Note If the computer is already on type A F1DIAG at the DOS command prompt then press Enter to load the Ethernet Setup Diagnostic program 2 Select Option 2 Test the Adapter from the Main Menu then press Enter The adapter address will be displayed for a few seconds before the diagnostics are run The following is a list of possible error conditions that can occur when the workstation is attempting to connect to the network Problem Action AC 0000 This field indicates that the adapter has Field appears detected an internal error If the code is 1 a soft error has occurred Restart the workstation If the code is 2 an unrecognized interrupt was found Ensure that a unique interrupt level was assigned to the network adapter refer to Network Configuration Errors on page 89 for additional information If a unique interrupt level was assigned restart the workstation If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter CE 0085 Field appears If a code other than appears a configuration error was found during POST Run the Automatic Configuration program on the Starter Diskette image Then ensure that a non conflicting ROM address RAM address and interrupt level were assigned to the network adapter refer to Network Configuration Errors on page 89 for additional information If the problem remains replace the Ethernet adapter Hardware Maintenance Service
414. ties are usually addressed with a revision sometimes referred to as a patch to the direct driver software Make certain the software is current and that all known revisions are installed The IBM on line bulletin board sometimes referred to as PCPROD and other software tools sources such as Novell Netware should be referenced by the software support personnel for any revisions provided by the appropriate software vendor The most likely cause of these types of problems when direct driver software is involved is the failure to obtain the latest revisions from the software vendor Software Installation It is very important to follow the vendor s installation procedures The software should not be migrated from another system unless the installation instructions indicate that migration is supported especially from a different model in the product line m Important Migrating adapters from slower systems to faster systems might cause problems This is due to device specific system specific or time dependent software code that controls these devices Adapter and Software Compatibility Hardware adapters for some operating systems must be approved by the software vendor to be compatible with that software The approval is specific to the system adapter E C level and the software version Contact the software vendor to confirm that system and adapter configuration is supported by their software level The compati
415. tings PCMCIA Card Lock Override Printer Errors 2 22 2 oio 2 ata d d ten Processor Board Installation 90 95 Processor Boards with Diagnostic LEDs Processor Boards without Diagnostic LEDs Processor Upgrade Models 50 502 60 486SLC2 Switch Settings Processor Upgrade Models 70 80 486DX33 Switch Settings Processor Upgrade Model 70 80 486DX33 FRU Isolation Processor Px Label Cross reference Power Supply Voltage Check Models 25 25 SX 25 286 Models 30 30 286 Model 33 cci A we eh X x Models 35 40 56 57 76 77 Models 50 70 Model 55 PS 2 9553 xBx Models 60 65 80 Model 90 244 fue Er Sud Bee eke PC Server 8640 PC Server 500 Type 86XX Power Supplies Server 85 PS 2 9585 xKx PS 2 9585 xNx Model 95 and 3511 Model 3510 Model 3532 ee OBI DASD Hot Swap Storage Expansion Enclosure Real Time Clock Problems Remote Power on Jumper 95 Running Automatic Configuration ServerGuide CDs Type 86XX SCSI Controller on the System Board SCSI Device Default Settings Enable and Disable Settings Keep Remove Settings Changing the Settings SCSI Diagnostic Tests SCSI ID Using to Help Isolate Failures
416. tion Division Non Maskable Interrupt National Support Center Non Volatile Random Access Memory Original Equipment Manufacturer Personal Computer Memory Card International Association Programmable Option Select Physical Unit Number as in SCSI Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks disk array models Random Access Memory read write Red Green Blue as in monitors Remote Initial Program Load Read Only Memory Sequential Access Storage Device Tape Subsystem Control Block Static Random Access Memory Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI Identification Number assigned device number Software Product Description Service Representative NDD Technical Advisor See your Marketing Representative Telecommunications Device for the Deaf Underwriters Laboratory Video Capture Adapter Video Electronics Standards Association Video Graphics Array 640x480x16 Vital Product Data Video Random Access Memory Write Once Read Many Media Extended Graphics Array 1024 x 768 x 256 Luminance Chrominance Signal Pertains to Video Hardware Maintenance Reference 439 We Want Your Comments We want to know your opinion about this manual part number 83G8990 Your input will help us to improve our publications Please photocopy this survey complete it and then fax it to IBM HMM Survey at 407 982 9825 USA Name Phone Number 1 Do you like this manual Yes No 2 What would you like to see added chan
417. tional 2 System Board Reference Diskette does not 1 Diskette Drive start 2 System Board 3 Diskette Drive Cable 4 Reference Diskette Read write errors ona 2 88MB diskette drive If the drive was just installed either the computer has down level IML code loaded or that model does not support a 2 88MB drive Use View configuration to determine if the diskette drive is listed as a 2 88MB If not the latest level Reference Diskette code must be loaded onto the System Partition Image Adapter A Memory Test failure indicated by graphic representation of adapter 1 Memory Module shown in graphic IML image has been updated and the Diskette and F1 error prompt appears on the screen 1 Verify an operating System has been loaded onto the default hard disk IML image has been updated the Diskette icon appears on the display and a 199903XX appears on the information panel 95 1 Verify an operating System has been loaded onto the default hard disk Internal Data Fax modem does not communicate with a remote modem or a fax Note Make sure the serial device power option is set to on in the Set Features program 1 Check that setup data defined by communication software is suitable for communication 2 Internal Data Fax Modem 3 System Board Internal Data Fax modem does not respond to Software and diagnostics does not find no problem Program load error d
418. tions terms and acronyms 438 accessing system programs 384 accessing the system partition 384 ACPA A advanced diagnostic tests 108 acronyms abbreviations and terms 438 adapter configuration options 90 adapters and options matrix 311 adapters identifying 122 adapters memory expansion 405 additional override jumper functions 378 address l O 90 address ROM 91 advanced diagnostic tests starting 384 application program errors 433 arbitration level 403 404 ASCII terminals 96 8N1 console message 95 432 acronym 438 configuration 431 customer satisfaction 800 number 443 HelpCenter 800 number 443 messages error 432 operation 432 setup and menu selection 430 terminals 430 AT bus MAP 3 Index 449 AT bus symptom to fru index 12 audio output tone 108 audio symptoms Micro Channel 30 automatic configuration running 150 429 automatic restart 422 available video memory 401 backing up system partition 427 beep codes POST 387 beep symptoms beep AT 13 beep Micro Channel 29 no beep AT 12 no beep Micro Channel 27 before replacing FRUs 56 BIOS and POST in FLASH 382 BIOS and POST IML 382 BIOS and POST in ROM 382 BIOS and POST upgrading 400 C cables supported 404 catalog parts FRUs 222 CD ROM drives parts 296 changing enabled disabled settings 180 changing PS ValuePoint ISA adapter configuration 91 changing software configuration 408 changing system configuration 408 check point codes 383 checkin
419. tions 202 60 memory problems 125 60 system board locations 200 65 8565 parts FRUs 251 65 memory problems 125 65 system board locations 201 70 system board upgrade 486DX33 486DLC2 locations 205 70 8570 parts FRUs 254 70 memory problems 125 70 processor boards 380 70 system board locations 203 204 70 80 problems 486DX33 processor upgrade 136 76 9576 parts FRUs 257 76 9576 system board locations 206 76 77 option microprocessor jumper 130 76 memory problems 125 77 9577 system board locations 206 77 amp M77 9577 parts FRUs 260 77 memory problems 125 80 8580 parts FRUs 251 80 system board locations 207 208 800 phone numbers 443 85 9585 server parts FRUs 273 85 memory problems 125 85 system board locations 209 8514 A display adapter 109 90 8590 parts FRUs 263 90 95 error detection 407 90 95 memory configurations 407 90 95 processor board installation 135 90 95 processor board matrix 126 448 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 90 95 processor boards 380 90 95 unique memory information 406 90 memory problems 125 90 system board locations 211 90 95 determining processor type 126 95 9595 server parts FRUs 277 95 memory problems 125 95 parts FRUs 273 95 remote power on jumper 150 95 system board locations 212 95A disk array system 396 95A server parts FRUs 280 96 8N1 error message 432 999XX errors 56 A abbrevia
420. to change Warning If you change the write policy to write back wait at least 10 seconds after your last operation before you power off the server It takes that long for the system to move the data from the cache memory to the storage device Failure to follow this practice can result in lost data 7 Press Enter to change the write policy 172 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Notice that WT changes to WB You can press Enter to alternate between WT and WB 8 When you have made your choice press Esc to return to the Advanced Functions menu 9 Select Exit The Confirm pop up window appears asking you to confirm your action 10 To return the setting to its original state select No To save your changes select Yes 11 Back up the disk array configuration information to diskette Refer to Backing Up Your Disk Array Configuration on page 170 for more information Formatting Drives You can perform a low level format on drives with RDY ready OFL offline or UNF unformatted status Note The Format drive choice on the Advanced Functions menu provides a low level format If you install a new hard disk drive that requires a standard format use the Format command provided by your operating system The Format program works like the low level format program in the advanced diagnostics portion of the system programs It is provided in the IBM RAID configuration program so that you can perform a
421. to the Main Menu select Set configuration then select Display memory map Changing the System Configuration An alternative method of resolving memory address conflicts is to change the address of the conflicting hardware option by selecting Change configuration from the Set configuration program Before changing adapter addresses identify the addresses used by the EMS driver Then set the adapter to addresses that do not conflict Note These conflicts can occur because the automatic configuration program sets up only the hardware It does not consider the operating system or application requirements If you run automatic configuration after changing an address the addresses you changed will be set back to their default values 408 PS 2 Maintenance Manual SCSI System Information The following information pertains to systems that support SCSI devices refer to PS 2 System Specifications on page 435 SCSI Hard Disk Drives and Devices Systems can be shipped with a Small Computer System Interface SCSI function The SCSI function can be on a SCSI adapter or built into the system board The default hard disk drive has the IML image preloaded in a protected partition Optional SCSI adapters can be installed in the system Each additional SCSI adapter can support up to seven external SCSI devices The hard disk drives automatically position and lock the read write heads in nondata areas when the computer is powered off
422. tomatic Configuration Running Automatic Configuration might alter customized configuration settings Note the current settings using View configuration If the configuration was customized save it then restore it to the customized settings after service is complete Recording a Customized Configuration If you want a copy of any customized configuration information on the System Partition do the following 1 If a power on password is set remove it before you start this procedure 2 Power on the computer without a diskette in the drive 3 Wait for the POST to finish system beeps Press Ctrl Alt Del When the cursor moves to the top right corner of the screen press Ctrl Alt Ins 4 Select View configuration and use the Print Screen function to print the current configuration 5 Select Set and View SCSI configuration and use the Print Screen function to print the current SCSI configuration SCSI device enable disable settings 6 If the user has changed the drive startup sequence or if you are not sure if it has been changed select Set features from the Main Menu of the system programs Then select Set startup sequence and press Enter 7 An informational warning screen might appear If so read the information and then press Enter 8 Use the Print Screen function to print the current selectable drive startup sequence Return to the Main Menu of the system programs You now have a copy of the following information
423. tors Diskette drive bus adapter slot 80286 Microprocessor Battery speaker assembly connector 1 80287 Math coprocessor connector PH Hardware Maintenance Service 193 Models 50 50Z 486SLC2 System Board Upgrade Power supply connector Memory module connectors AT IDE hard disk drive connector Diskette drive cable connector Coprocessor connector Speaker connector Password override jumper J11 Processor connector Expansion slots 16 bit 1 Expansion slot 32 bit 11 Expansion slots 16 bit 12 Video connector 13 Serial connector 14 Parallel connector 15 Keyboard connector 16 Pointing device connector amp wn JO 00000000000000000000 oon 194 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Model 53 9553 xBx System Board 1 Display connector 2 Serial port 3 Parallel port 4 Pointing device connector 5 Keyboard connector 6 connector 7 Memory module connector M2 8 connector M1 9 Power supply connector J8 1 Hard disk drive in use light J7 11 Privilege access password jumper 12 Password override connector J11 13 Power supply connector J12 14 Hard disk drive power connector 15 Diskette drive
424. tte drive 6 Press F10 this starts the bit dump and writes two files onto the diskette 7 After the screen message indicates that the process is complete remove the diskette from the drive and insert the Reference Diskette 8 Send the diskette to the support center that requested it 434 5 2 Maintenance Manual PS 2 System Specifications The following tables contain the specifications for each PS 2 model The first table contains AT bus systems The second table contains Micro Channel Non IML systems The third table contains Micro Channel IML systems S B Slots Bays SS Selectable Startup PS 2 AT Bus Type Processor Video S B Memory SS Hrd Dsk 8525 001 4 8086 8 MCGA 2 2 512K 640K N None 8525 GXX 8086 8 MCGA 2 2 512K 640K None 8525 LXX 8086 8 MCGA 2 2 640K 640K N None 8525 286 X0X 80286 10 VGA 2 2 1M 4M N None 8525 286 X3X 80286 10 VGA 2 2 1M 4M 30M 8530 001 8086 8 MCGA 3 2 640K 640K N None 8530 002 8086 8 MCGA 3 2 640K 640K N None 8530 021 8086 8 MCGA 3 2 640K 640K 20M 8530 286 E01 80286 10 VGA 3 2 1M 4M N None 8530 286 E21 80286 10 VGA 3 2 1M 4M N 20M 8530 286 E31 80286 10 VGA 3 2 1M AM N 30M 8530 286 E41 80286 10 VGA 3 2 1M AM N 45M 8535SX 040 3865 20 VGA 3 2 2M 16M Y None 85355 043 3865 20 VGA 3 2 2M 16M Y 40M 8535LS 24X 3865 20 VGA 3 2 2M 16M Y None 8535LS 14X 3665 20 VGA 3 2 2M 16M Y None 8540SX 040 3865 20 VGA 5 4 2M 16M Y None 8540SX 043 3865 20 VGA 5 4 2M 16M Y 40M 8540SX 045 386
425. u need assistance see Updating the System Programs on page 426 5 Either install an operating system on a device that is in the startup sequence or change the startup sequence to include a device that has an operating System then power on the computer check for the normal power up sequence and then run the advanced diagnostic tests If the problem still exists suspect the SCSI controller then the hard disk drive Note If you are not able to correct the problem using the IML and IPL Errors section go to Undetermined Problems on page 183 Symptom Error FRU Action 1999001X 1999002X 1 Restore the System 1999003X 1999004X Partition If you need The actions for these errors assistance see are valid only when running Restoring the System the system from the hard Partition on page 428 disk 56 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error FRU Action 19990053 19990054 19990056 19990057 19990059 19990063 19990067 19990069 The actions for these errors are valid only when running the system from the System Diskettes 1 Restart the computer from the Reference Diskette If the same error code appears try new System Diskettes 1999006X 1 Power off the computer Insert the Reference Diskette toggle the override jumper then power on the computer Then restore the System Partition If you need assistance see Restoring the System Partition on page 428 1999007X
426. u delete an array all the data and programs in the array are lost If you have data and programs that you want to save they must be backed up and then restored It is suggested you use a high speed backup device such as a tape drive To redefine the space in an array 1 Back up all data and programs in the array 2 f needed install additional hard disk drives Refer to the User s Reference for information about Selecting drive sizes 3 Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette then press Ctrl Alt Del to start the RAID configuration program 4 Delete the existing array a Select Create delete array from the Main Menu The Create Delete Array menu will disappear b Select Delete disk array The cursor will be active in the Bay Array list c Review the Logical Drive List Date Created column then press the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key to highlight the most recently defined array Note You must delete disk arrays in descending order the last one created must be the first one deleted d Press Del The Confirm pop up window appears Hardware Maintenance Service 169 e 10 Warning All the data in the array will be lost during this procedure Be sure to back up all data and programs that you want to save e If you do not want to delete the array select No To delete the array select Yes Note To use the hard disks from the existing array when cre
427. uence does not contain the default drive 1 No operating system installed 2 Selectable startup sequence does not contain the default drive 19990306 Invalid startup Trying to start from a CD ROM drive 1 Restart the computer from a startable diskette or hard disk drive 19990401 Unauthorized access Type or erase the power on password before replacing FRUs 1 System Board or Processor Board Note Whichever contains the system ROM 19990402 19990403 1 System Board or Processor Board Note Whichever contains the system ROM 19990600 19990607 19990609 Recovery prevented 1 Power off the computer Insert the Reference Diskette toggle the override jumper then power on the computer Then restore the System Partition If you need assistance see Restoring the System Partition on page 428 58 PS 2 Maintenance Manual General Checkout QAPlus PRO This general checkout procedure is for computers that are supported by the QAPlus PRO Diagnostics test Diagnostic error messages appear when a test program finds a problem with a hardware option For the test programs to properly determine if a test Passed Failed or Aborted the test programs check the error return code at test completion See Return Codes on page 388 For application program or operating system error messages refer to the information supplied with that software package
428. uld have this password If not the only way to gain access to the system programs is to replace the system board at the customer s expense The system is shipped with the privileged access password feature disabled no password is set A jumper on the system board must be moved before a privileged access password can be set for the first time The jumper can either be in the locked state or the change state The locked state prevents a privileged access password from being set changed or removed This is the position set at the factory The jumper is in position 1 when it is in the locked state The change state allows the privileged access password to be set changed or removed using the system programs The jumper is in position 0 when it is in the change state The rules for setting the privileged access password are the same as the power on password any alphanumeric combination of up to 7 characters A Z a z and 0 9 One important difference is that a privileged access password cannot be the same as the power on password The privileged access password provides several major features Restricts access to the system programs Stops the system after a POST error Prohibits unauthorized modifications to the hardware Works with the tamper evident cover switch to prevent unauthorized operation after a forced entry Can be typed at the power on password prompt to override the power on password When a privileged access
429. uring remote IPL from the file server 1 Check in power configuration and verify the modem is turned on 1 Network Adapter Program loads from the 1 Diskette Drive hard disk or a non system 2 System Board disk or disk error with the 3 Power Supply Reference Diskette in drive 4 Reference Diskette A t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 Hardware Maintenance Service 31 Symptom Error FRU Action No colors on a color display Connect display to the VGA port and run the Enhanced VGA test to see if the display is the problem Display any type 2 VGA terminator Screen colors change 1 Display any type 2 Display Adapter 3 System Board One or more keys do not 1 Keyboard work and the computer is 2 Keyboard Cable otherwise functional Check keyboard 1 3 System Board Power supply appears to fail at power on but if you disconnect optional hard disks the problem goes away load problem See Setting the Motor Start Jumper on page 414 1 Motor Start Jumper Remove the motor start start jumper from one or more option drives Power on indicator does not come on fan runs and computer is functional 1 Control Speaker Assembly Power on indicator does not come on fan runs and computer is not functional System Board 2 Power Supply Power on indicator
430. urrent Protection 422 Short Circuit Protection 422 Over Voltage Protection 422 Under Voltage Protection 422 Automatic Restart 422 Power Line Disturbances 423 Surge Protection 424 safety re ve ue Rok IRIS 424 Contents xi Current Leakage Reliability Uninterruptible Power Devices System Partition Starting System Program Diagnostics Updating the System Programs Upgrading the System Partition Version Backing the System Partition Restoring the System Partition Running Automatic Configuration Recording a Customized Configuration ASCII Terminals ASCII Terminal Setup and Menu Selection r ASCII Terminal Configuration Console Selection Operation 4s zoo Sean Error Messages 96 8N1 Error Message System Error Log Viewing the Error Log Types of Errors Detected Application Program Errors Processor Errors System Memory Errors Micro Channel Adapter Errors EmorStorage Application Dumping Extended Diagnostic Data Information PS 2 System Specifications PS 2 ATBus PS 2 Micro Channel Non IML PS 2 Micro Channel IML Acr
431. ve is installed but not supported 2 System Board 00011XXX 1 System Board not listed above 000120XX 1 System Board Possible processor self test failure Processor Cache 90 95 Processor Board 90 95 000121XX A problem was detected during memory remapping Information only 00012201 00012202 00012203 00012204 00012205 00012206 00012207 00012208 Data error Possible system board failure 1 Run Advanced Diagnostics 000129XX 1 Processor Board 2 Cache Kit 3 System Board 00013000 1 Check Drive Sequence POST could not start the operating system Operating system loaded Is the boot drive in the selectable drive sequence t If this symbol is shown next to an error above go to Related Service Information on page 107 34 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Symptom Error FRU Action 00013001 Security system is being used but the computer is not totally secured because there is a diskette drive in the startup sequence 00013002 Drive startup sequence is corrupt or invalid 00013003 EEPROM could not be read Delete diskette drive from the startup sequence if so desired Run Automatic Configuration Then reset the selectable drive startup sequence If the problem still exists replace the system board Run Automatic Configuration If the problem still exists replace the system board 000131XX System Board
432. ve Retainer Tamper Evident Linkage Assembly Front Bezel Diskette Drive Blank Bezel 3 5 Inch Diskette Drive Bezel Operator Panel Card Assembly Speaker Operator Panel Bezel DASD Tray Assembly without drive cable Base Frame R System Board without Memory Battery SCSI Adapter for RAID Array Controller SVGA NI Display Adapter A Processor Boards 80486DX2 33 66 Processor Pentium 60 MHz Pentium 66 MHz System Board Memory Module Kits Parity Memory Module Kits 2MB 70ns 4MB High Reliability Parity SIMM 70ns 8MB High Reliability Parity SIMM 70ns ECC Memory Module Kits 4MB 70ns 8MB 70ns 16MB 70ns Access Cover Fan Access Cover Fan Cable Keylock Assembly Adapter Guide 61G3533 61G3823 92F0267 33F8418 62X1045 33F8422 61G3518 92F0280 61G3526 61G3527 61G3837 71G4981 61G3838 71G4982 61G3835 61G3836 64F0204 64F4136 33F8425 61G3516 61G3519 61G3515 71G5001 71G5000 92F0259 33F8444 61G3517 61G3832 61G3822 92F2623 33F8354 92F0335 71G4877 61G2343 52G9362 92F0120 92F0102 71G6203 71G6204 92F0097 92F0098 96F9100 61G3827 61G3824 61G3825 33F8440 Hardware Maintenance Service 281 Index System Unit 9595A Ground Springs Left Spring Right Spring I O Shadowbox Ground Spring with thumbscrews DASD Ground Spring Misc Parts Kit Bracket 1 Cable Clamp 1 Jumper 1 Retainer Gasket 1 Lock Pawl 1 Standoff 1 Plastic Screws 2 Metal Screws 6 Cable Cover Option Cabl
433. ve Tray Address Cable 1GB SCSI Fast Wide Hard Disk Drive Fan Assembly Base Frame Assembly 1 Meter External 68 68 Cable Miscellaneous Parts Kit Blank Bracket Screws 2 EMC Springs 2 Fan Mounting Screws 2 Power Supply Mounting Screws 2 Power Switch Mounting Screws 2 Stand off 2 EMC Springs 2 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 92F0411 61G3527 71G0208 71G0209 06H2605 61G2177 61G2174 61G3835 71G0216 61G3838 61G3837 71G4982 71G4981 06H2601 06H2602 06H3246 71G0212 71G0215 71G5040 71G0217 06H2604 06H3228 06H3241 Common Parts 486 DX DX2 DLC2 SLC SLC2 System Board Upgrade Parts System Unit 50 502 486SLC2 System Board Upgrade 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade Card 50 486SLC2 Processor Upgrade Card 50Z 2MB Memory Module 4MB Memory Module 4MB Memory Module Industry Standard 8MB Memory Module 16MB Memory Module 80MB Hard Disk Drive 170MB Hard Disk Drive 245MB Hard Disk Drive 340MB Hard Disk Drive 527MB Hard Disk Drive Hard Disk Drive Ribbon Cable Hard Disk Drive Power Cable System Unit 55 486SLC2 System Board Upgrade 2MB Memory Module 4MB Memory Module 4MB Memory Module Industry Standard 8MB Memory Module 16MB Memory Module 80MB Hard Disk Drive 170MB Hard Disk Drive 245MB Hard Disk Drive 340MB Hard Disk Drive 527MB Hard Disk Drive Hard Disk Drive Ribbon Cable Hard Disk Drive Power Cable Original Hard Disk Drive Cable System Unit 60 65 and 80 486DX2 System B
434. vice If the device is not labeled or you need to verify the SCSI ID you can either decipher the jumper or switch settings explained later or you can do the following 1 2 410 Power on the computer and access the Main Menu of the system programs Select Set configuration from the Main Menu then select Set and view SCSI device configuration The SCSI ID for each installed SCSI device is displayed on the line that begins with Device Address The ID appears in a set of two numbers separated by a comma for example 6 The first number in this example 6 is the ID assigned to the installed SCSI device The ID for the SCSI adapter begins with the words SCSI Address SCSI Adapter Address If there are no devices connected to the SCSI controller or adapter the screen will show only the location of the SCSI controller or adapter and the ID assigned to it PS 2 Maintenance Manual Setting a SCSI ID SCSI devices have either switches or jumpers to set the SCSI ID All FRU hard disk drives are shipped preset to SCSI ID 6 The type of hardware used and the location of the jumpers or switches varies from device to device SCSI ID Switch Settings To set the SCSI ID on a device that has switches do the following Refer to the switches in the following figure Refer to the table to determine how the switches should be set for the SCSI ID you selected Using a ballpoint pen set switches 1 2 and 3 accordingly
435. x 4 screw 10 Tapping 2 x 4 screw 10 2mm 5 x 8 black screw 10 2mm 5 x 3 black screw 10 Screw 10 4 40 x 5 stud 20 4 40 x 4 8 stud 10 2mm 5 x 6 screw w washer 10 2mm 5 x 5 screw 100 Special screw 1 2mm 0 x 5 10 3 x 4 screw 10 Miscellaneous Parts Kit 27F4171 Nut 2 Cover screw 2 I O panel screw 2 3 5mm captive screw 2 Fingerstock shield 3 Fingerstock base shield 3 Slide 1 Standoff shaft 2 3mm screw 5 Ground power special bracket 1 Miscellaneous Parts Kit 33F8370 Rubber foot 4 8mm captive screw 4 Captive screw 2 3 5mm hex head screw 4 3mm Plastite screw 4 Miscellaneous Parts Kit 33F 8435 Screw 2 Cable Cable clamp 1 4mm screw 2 Breakaway washer 1 Pawl bracket 1 Cable clamp 1 Ground base spring 1 I O bracket 1 PC board standoff 1 Wing nut 1 Ground spring 1 Hardware Maintenance Service 301 Miscellaneous Parts Kit Door bezel 1 Screw 2 Miscellaneous Parts Kit Captive spring 4 Lock slide 2 Captive screw 4 Shaft standoff 2 Miscellaneous Parts Kit 2MB memory holder 2 1MB memory card shield 1 2MB memory card shield 1 Miscellaneous Parts Kit 4mm metric screw 4 Foot 2 Screw 1 Shaft standoff 2 Miscellaneous Parts Kit Blank diskette drive bezel 1 Miscellaneous Parts Kit I O bracket 1 Diskette drive retainer 1 Miscellaneous Parts Kit 4mm screw 2 Shaft standoff 2 Hard
436. y Module 021 1MB Memory Module 031 061 2MB Memory Module 031 061 486SLC System Board Upgrade 2MB Memory Module Kit for 61G3502 4MB Memory Module Kit for 61G3502 8MB Memory Module Kit for 61G3502 Battery Speaker Assembly Battery Blank Drive Bezel Drive Bezel Kit Front Bezel Logo 021 R Front Bezel Logo 031 061 R Cover Lock Assembly Cover Lock Kit 80287 Coprocessor Label Kit Misc Parts Kit System see page 302 Misc Parts Kit Options see page 302 Shipping Carton DASD 50 1 44MB Diskette Drive Includes Bezel and Drive Slide 1 44MB Diskette Drive Bus Adapter 20MB Hard Disk Drive 021 20MB Hard Disk Drive Adapter 021 30MB Hard Disk Drive 031 Slide included in 90X8628 60MB Hard Disk Drive 061 Hard Disk Drive Adapter 061 Hard Disk Drive Bus Adapter 061 160MB Hard Disk Drive Slide included in 90X8628 Hard Disk Drive Slide Kit 80MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 170MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 245MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE 340MB Hard Disk Drive ATA IDE Hard Disk Drive Ribbon Cable for 95F4728 92F0403 92F04040 Hard Disk Drive Power Cable for 95F4728 92F0403 92F04040 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 72X8501 72X8515 72X8504 90X9366 10G4005 90X9534 72X8592 72X8516 72X8561 72X8517 90X8624 92F0104 61G3502 92F0102 92F0105 64F3606 33F5950 72X8498 72X8531 15F7571 72X8502 15F7697 72X8512 72X8577 72X8528 72X8509 72X8525 72X8562 72X8590 64F0207 72X8524
437. y an Option Diskette program Note On the 90 and 95 systems with a Type 3 processor board installed when you make a backup copy of the System Partition certain files will not be loaded to the backup copy The following files will be accessible only from the original Diagnostic Diskette not a backup copy of the System Partition KP COM IDP COM DISK386 COM RECV35 COM UINSTALL EXE Restoring the System Partition Use the following instructions to restore the System Partition to a hard disk drive that you have just replaced Notes 1 This process writes over anything that is in the System Partition Do not confuse this process with Updating the System Programs on page 426 2 Use the customer s backup copy of the System Partition to restore the System Partition If there is not a backup copy use the Reference Diskette some models also have a Diagnostic Diskette You might have to recopy option files to the System Partition if they are not on the Reference Diskette To restore the System Partition 1 Start the system programs See Starting System Program Diagnostics on page 425 if you need assistance 2 Select Backup Restore system programs from the Main Menu 3 Select Restore the System Partition and follow the instructions on the screen Be sure to reset any customized configuration or drive startup information after replacing a defective hard disk drive 428 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Running Au
438. y module connectors Power supply connector 1 Power on password override jumper J16 11 Battery connector 12 Diskette drive cable connector 13 Information panel cable connector FWD On the 486SX 25Mhz system board the math coprocessor connector is located on the processor board S nn ng 212 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Server 9595 9595A 1 oon FWD 32 bit expansion slots video extensions J25 J27 Processor slot Parallel ports Serial ports Keyboard Pointing device connectors Power on Features jumper Power on Password override jumper Memory module connectors Tamper evident cable connector Power Supply connector Privilege Access Password jumper Battery Diskette drive cable connector Reserved Pins 1 and 2 must be connected Operator panel cable connector Hardware Maintenance Service 213 PC Server 486DX2 System Board 1 Memory connectors U31 U32 U33 and U34 2 Processor socket 3 ISA IDE hard disk drive LED connector W46 4 PCI IDE hard disk drive LED connector W39 5 Power LED pins 1 3 W12 6 Speaker connector J5 7 EISA slots J12 J13 J14 15 an
439. ymptom to FRU Index AT Bus on page 12 018 Step 018 continues 4 PS 2 Maintenance Manual 018 continued Press Ctrl Alt Del and check for the following responses 1 One or two short beeps 2 IBM logo screen appears DID YOU RECEIVE THE RESPONSES LISTED ABOVE Yes No 019 Go to Symptom to FRU Index Bus on page 12 If that does not correct the problem go to Undetermined Problems on page 183 020 Press Enter Select test system Select system checkout Go to Related Service Information on page 107 for Incorrect keyboard responses Incorrect printer responses Incorrect display responses jittering rolling shifting or out of focus IS THE LIST OF INSTALLED DEVICES CORRECT Yes No 021 Go to Installed Devices List on page 11 022 Run the advanced diagnostic tests DID THE TESTS IDENTIFY A FAILURE Note If the test stops and you cannot continue replace the last device being tested Yes No 023 You may have an intermittent problem Check for damaged cables and connectors Reseat all adapters drives and modules Check the system unit fan for proper operation Start an error log using a DOS formatted diskette and run the tests multiple times 024 Follow the instructions on the display If that does not correct the problem go to
440. you want to edit from the Files selection box 3 Make your changes The arrow keys move the cursor and the function keys perform search and block editing functions See File Edit Function Key Usage 4 When you are done press F10 to update the file with the changes you made or press Esc to quit the editing process without saving the changes File Edit Function Key Usage The following information describes the function of the function keys and keyboard keys when you are using the File Editor 394 PS 2 Maintenance Manual Key Description Arrows Move the cursor to the place in the text where you want to make changes Home Press Home once to move the cursor to the start of the current line Press Home twice to move to the beginning of the file Press Home three times to move to the beginning of the file End Press End once to move the cursor to the end of the current line Press End twice to move the cursor to the end of the current screen Press End three times to move the end of the file F2 Press F2 to be in search mode You are prompted to enter the search word or words on a reverse highlighted line at the bottom of the File Edit Screen After typing in the search word press Enter F3 Press to find the next occurrence of a search word F4 Press F4 to mark the start of a block of text if you have not previously marked it If you previously marked
441. ystem board locations 209 serverguard adapter parts FRUs 306 service information related 107 service procedures AT bus 3 introduction 2 Micro Channel 19 network 74 service section this manual 1 servicing LAN workstations 181 settings changing enabled disabled 180 data rate switch 74 enable and disable 180 keep remove enabled disabled 180 motor start jumper 414 SCSIID 411 setup and menu selection ASCII terminal 430 short circuit protection 422 size type and speed determining memory 126 software configuration changing 408 464 PS 2 Maintenance Manual software hardware mismatch problems 181 space saving keyboards parts 299 misc parts kits 300 specifications 435 speed type and size determining memory 126 start mode server mode unattended 378 starting advanced diagnostic tests 384 starting diagnostics system program 425 starting system program diagnostics 425 startup function selectable drive 420 startup sequence changing 421 startup sequence checking 56 stations servicing LAN 181 storage error 434 strategy FRU replacement 1 strategy hard disk replacement 1 suggestions about this manual 444 supported cables 404 surge protection 424 switch settings 70 80 486DX33 processor 136 data rate 74 hard disk drive ATA 371 switches tamper evident 375 symptom to FRU index AT bus 12 how to use 114 Micro Channel 26 symptoms audio Micro Channel 30 beep AT 13 beep Micro Channel 29 miscellaneous 30

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

巻上機の特別アセスメント指針 - JEMA 一般社団法人 日本電機工業会  ATH-CKS77XBT 取扱説明書  Hampton Bay AL995-ORB Instructions / Assembly  Emerson MVME2500 Computer Accessories User Manual  Toro 690 Series Sell Sheet  Top S326isdn Bedienungsanleitung Mode d'emploi Istruzioni per l'uso    013825 SuperDos 20 Manual Rev G.indd  取扱説明書    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file